DC-70/DC-70T/DC-70 Pro/DC-70 Exp/DC-75/DC-

78/DC-70S
Diagnostic Ultrasound System

Operator’s Manual
[Basic Volume]
 Contents
Contents ............................................................................................................................... i
Intellectual Property Statement ...................................................................................................... I
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party....................................................................................... I
Warranty ...................................................................................................................................... II
Exemptions ............................................................................................................................. II
Customer Service Department ............................................................................................... III
Important Information .................................................................................................................. IV
About This Manual ...................................................................................................................... IV
Notation Conventions .................................................................................................................. IV
Operator’s Manuals...................................................................................................................... V
Hardcopy Manuals ....................................................................................................................... V
Software Interfaces in this Manual ................................................................................................ V
Conventions ................................................................................................................................ VI
Product Difference ...................................................................................................................... VI
1 Safety Precautions.................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Safety Classifications ...................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Meanings of Signal Words ............................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Meaning of Safety Symbols ............................................................................................. 1-2
1.4 Safety Precautions .......................................................................................................... 1-3
1.5 Latex Alert ....................................................................................................................... 1-9
1.6 Warning Labels ............................................................................................................... 1-9
2 System Overview ...................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Intended Use ................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Contraindication .............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3 Product and Model Code ................................................................................................. 2-1
2.4 Product Specifications ..................................................................................................... 2-2
2.5 System Configuration ...................................................................................................... 2-4
2.6 Introduction of Each Unit ................................................................................................. 2-9
2.7 I/O Panel ........................................................................................................................2-11
2.8 Power Supply Panel ...................................................................................................... 2-12
2.9 Physio Panel ................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.10 Control Panel ................................................................................................................ 2-14
2.11 Symbols ........................................................................................................................ 2-18
3 System Preparation .................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Move/Position the System ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Connecting the Power Cord & Protective Grounding ........................................................ 3-2
3.3 Monitor Adjustment.......................................................................................................... 3-7
3.4 Control Panel Position Adjustment ................................................................................... 3-9
3.5 Connecting a Probe......................................................................................................... 3-9
3.6 Connecting Peripheral Devices...................................................................................... 3-10
3.7 Installing a Printer...........................................................................................................3-11
3.8 Basic Screen & Operation ............................................................................................. 3-15
4 Exam Preparation ..................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Patient Information .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Select Exam Mode and Probe ......................................................................................... 4-9
4.3 Select the Imaging Mode ............................................................................................... 4-10

i
 4.4 Activate & Continue an Exam ......................................................................................... 4-11
4.5 Pause & End an Exam ................................................................................................... 4-11
5 Image Optimization ................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Imaging Mode ................................................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 B Mode Image Optimization ............................................................................................ 5-4
5.3 M Mode Image Optimization ............................................................................................ 5-9
5.4 Color Mode Image Optimization .....................................................................................5-12
5.5 Power Mode Image Optimization ....................................................................................5-17
5.6 PW/CW Doppler Mode ...................................................................................................5-18
5.7 Color M Mode ................................................................................................................5-25
5.8 Anatomical M Mode........................................................................................................5-26
5.9 TDI .................................................................................................................................5-29
5.10 3D/4D ............................................................................................................................5-33
5.11 Contrast Imaging ............................................................................................................5-74
5.12 iScape View (Real-time Panoramic Imaging) ..................................................................5-81
5.13 Elastography ..................................................................................................................5-85
5.14 Stress Echo ....................................................................................................................5-87
5.15 Tissue Tracking Quantitative Analysis (QA).....................................................................5-96
6 Display & Cine Review .......................................................................................... 6-103
6.1 Splitting Display ............................................................................................................6-103
6.2 Image Magnification .....................................................................................................6-103
6.3 Freeze/Unfreeze the Image. .........................................................................................6-104
6.4 Cine Review .................................................................................................................6-105
6.5 Image Compare ...........................................................................................................6-108
6.6 Cine Saving..................................................................................................................6-109
6.7 Setting Cine Length ......................................................................................................6-109
7 Physiological Signal ................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1 ECG ................................................................................................................................ 7-2
8 Measurement ............................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1 Basic Operations ............................................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 General Measurements ................................................................................................... 8-2
8.3 Application Measurements .............................................................................................. 8-4
8.4 Measurement Accuracy ................................................................................................... 8-5
9 Comments and Body Marks ..................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Comments....................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Voice Comments ............................................................................................................. 9-5
9.3 Body Mark....................................................................................................................... 9-6
10 Patient Data Management ....................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Patient Information Management ....................................................................................10-1
10.2 Image File Management .................................................................................................10-1
10.3 Report Management.......................................................................................................10-9
10.4 iStation - Patient Data Management..............................................................................10-12
10.5 iStorage........................................................................................................................10-16
10.6 Network Storage...........................................................................................................10-16
10.7 Print .............................................................................................................................10-16
10.8 Back Up Files using the DVD Drive ..............................................................................10-17
10.9 Patient Task Management ............................................................................................10-18
10.10 Administration ..............................................................................................................10-19

ii
 10.11 V-Access ..................................................................................................................... 10-27
11 DICOM/HL7 .............................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1 DICOM Preset ................................................................................................................11-2
11.2 Verify Connectivity ........................................................................................................ 11-10
11.3 DICOM Services........................................................................................................... 11-11
11.4 DICOM Media Storage ................................................................................................. 11-15
11.5 Structured Report ......................................................................................................... 11-16
11.6 Showcase Recording.................................................................................................... 11-17
11.7 DICOM Task Management............................................................................................ 11-17
12 Setup........................................................................................................................ 12-1
12.1 System Preset ............................................................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Exam Mode Preset ........................................................................................................ 12-9
12.3 Measurement Preset ................................................................................................... 12-10
12.4 Comment Preset ......................................................................................................... 12-10
12.5 iWorks Preset ............................................................................................................... 12-11
12.6 Stress Echo Preset ....................................................................................................... 12-11
12.7 DICOM/HL7 Preset ..................................................................................................... 12-12
12.8 Print Preset ................................................................................................................. 12-12
12.9 Network Preset ............................................................................................................ 12-13
12.10 Maintenance ............................................................................................................... 12-17
12.11 Security ....................................................................................................................... 12-19
12.12 System Information ..................................................................................................... 12-20
13 Probes and Biopsy ................................................................................................. 13-1
13.1 Probes .......................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 Biopsy Guide ............................................................................................................... 13-19
13.3 Middle Line.................................................................................................................. 13-53
14 DVR Recording ....................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1 DVR Recording ............................................................................................................ 14-1
14.2 Send Image .................................................................................................................. 14-1
14.3 DVR Video Replay ....................................................................................................... 14-2
15 Acoustic Output ...................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1 Concerns with Bioeffects ............................................................................................... 15-1
15.2 Prudent Use Statement.................................................................................................. 15-1
15.3 ALARA Principle (As Low As Reasonably Achievable) ................................................... 15-1
15.4 MI/TI Explanation .......................................................................................................... 15-2
15.5 Acoustic Power Setting.................................................................................................. 15-3
15.6 Acoustic Power Control ................................................................................................. 15-4
15.7 Acoustic Output ............................................................................................................. 15-4
15.8 Measurement Uncertainty.............................................................................................. 15-5
15.9 References for Acoustic Power and Safety .................................................................... 15-6
16 EMC Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration ................................................... 16-1
17 System Maintenance .............................................................................................. 17-1
17.1 Daily Maintenance ......................................................................................................... 17-1
17.2 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 17-7
Appendix A iScanHelper ...........................................................................................A-1
Appendix B Barcode Reader ....................................................................................B-1
Appendix C iWorks (Auto Workflow Protocol) ........................................................C-1

iii
Appendix D Wireless LAN ........................................................................................ D-1
Appendix E Battery .................................................................................................. E-1
Appendix F Ultrasound Gel Warmer ........................................................................F-1
Appendix G Electrical Safety Inspection ................................................................. G-1

iv
© 2020 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Operator’s Manual, the issue date is 2020-12.

Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called Mindray)
owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual. This manual may
refer to information protected by copyright or patents and does not convey any license under the
patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of others.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information. Disclosure of
the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray
is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any other
derivative work of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray
is strictly forbidden.

, and are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray

in China and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for
informational or editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective owners.

This posting serves as notice under 35 U.S.C.§287(a) for Mindray patents:

http://www.mindrayna.com/patents.

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party

Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.

All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be liable for
errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the
furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.

Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product, only if:
 all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this product
are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
 the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national and
local requirements; and
 the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.

Note
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical professionals.

Warning

I
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a
reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or
personal injury.

Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or other
charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting from the
improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not approved by
Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.

This warranty shall not extend to:

 Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.
 Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.
 Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified or
unauthorized service people.
 Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible enough.
 Others not caused by instrument or part itself.

II
Customer Service Department

Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, High-tech industrial park,
Nanshan, Shenzhen, 518057,P.R.China
Website: www.mindray.com
E-mail Address: [email protected]
Tel: +86 755 81888998

Fax: +86 755 26582680

Manufacturer: Mindray DS USA, Inc.

Address: 800 MacArthur Blvd.

Mahwah, NJ 07430-0619 USA
Tel: +1(201) 995-8000

Toll Free: +1 (800) 288-2121

Fax: +1 (800) 926-4275

III
 Important Information
1. It is the customer’s responsibility to maintain and manage the system after delivery.
2. The warranty does not cover the following items, even during the warranty period:
(1) Damage or loss due to misuse or abuse.
(2) Damage or loss caused by Acts of God such as fires, earthquakes, floods, lightning, etc.
(3) Damage or loss caused by failure to meet the specified conditions for this system, such as
inadequate power supply, improper installation or environmental conditions.
(4) Damage or loss due to use of the system outside the region where the system was originally
sold.
(5) Damage or loss involving the system purchased from a source other than Mindray or its
authorized agents.
3. This system shall not be used by persons other than fully qualified and certified medical
personnel.
4. DO NOT make changes or modifications to the software or hardware of this system.
5. In no event shall Mindray be liable for problems, damage, or loss caused by relocation,
modification, or repair performed by personnel other than those designated by Mindray.
6. The purpose of this system is to provide physicians with data for clinical diagnosis. The physician
is responsible for the results of diagnostic procedures. Mindray shall not be liable for the results
of diagnostic procedures.
7. Important data must be backed up on external memory media.
8. Mindray shall not be liable for loss of data stored in the memory of this system caused by
operator error or accidents.
9. This manual contains warnings regarding foreseeable potential dangers, but you shall also be
continuously alert to dangers other than those indicated. Mindray shall not be liable for damage
or loss resulting from negligence or ignorance of the precautions and operating instructions
described in this operator’s manual.
10. If a new manager takes over this system, be sure to hand over this operator’s manual to the new
manager.

About This Manual

This operator’s manual describes the operating procedures for this diagnostic ultrasound system
and the compatible probes. To ensure safe and correct operation, carefully read and understand
the manual before operating the system.

Notation Conventions
In this operator’s manual, the following words are used besides the safety precautions (see “Safety
Precautions”). Please read this operator’s manual before using the system.
NOTE: Indicates information of interest to users of this system regarding exceptional conditions
or operating procedures.

The diagnostic ultrasound system is not intended for ophthalmic use. Its
CAUTION: use in this clinical specialty is contraindicated.

IV
 U.S.A. Federal Law restricts this device to sale by or on the
order of a physician.

Operator’s Manuals
You may receive multi-language manuals on compact disc or paper. Please refer to the English
manual for the latest information and registration information.
The content of the operator manual, such as screens, menus or descriptions, may be different from
what you see in your system. The content varies depending on the software version, options and
configuration of the system.

Hardcopy Manuals
 Operator’s Manual [Basic Volume]
Describes the basic functions and operations of the system, safety precautions, exam modes,
imaging modes, preset, maintenance and acoustic output, etc.
 Operator’s Manual [Advanced Volume]
 Operator’s Manual [Acoustic Power Data and Surface Temperature Data]
Contains data tables of acoustic output for transducers.
 Operation Note
Contains a quick guide for basic system operations.

NOTE: Manuals on CD are the manuals translated into languages other than English,
according to the English manuals.
If you find that the contents of the manuals on CD are NOT consistent with the system
or the English manuals, refer ONLY to the corresponding English manuals.
The accompanying manuals may vary depending on the specific system you
purchased. Please refer to the packing list.

Software Interfaces in this Manual

Depending on the software version, preset settings and optional configuration, the actual
interfaces may be different from those in this manual.

V
Conventions
In this manual, the following conventions are used to describe the buttons on the control panel,
items in the menus, buttons in the dialog boxes and some basic operations:
 <Buttons>: angular brackets indicate buttons, knobs and other controls on the control
panel or on the keyboard.
 [Items in menu or buttons in dialog box]: square brackets indicate items in menus, on the
soft menu or buttons in dialog boxes.
 Click [Items or Buttons]: move the cursor to the item or button and press <Set> or use the
soft key corresponding to the soft menu.
 [Items in menu] → [Items in submenu]: select a submenu item following the path.

Product Difference
Product B- Color Double Machine Spline
B-Profile
Model Histogram Velocity dist apperance length
Gray, white
DC-70S √ √ √ √ √
and blue
Gray and
DC-70T √ x √ √ √
white
Gray and
DC-70 √ √ √ √ √
white
Gray and
DC-70 Pro x √ √ √ √
white
Gray and
DC-70 Exp x x √ √ ╳
white
Gray and
DC-75 √ x √ x ╳
white
Gray and
DC-78 √ x x √ ╳
white

VI
1 Safety Precautions

1.1 Safety Classifications

 According to the type of protection against electric shock:
Externally powered CLASS I EQUIPMENT
 According to the degree of protection against electric shock:
Type-BF applied part
 According to the degree of protection against harmful ingress of water:
The main unit is rated IPX0
The probes are rated IPX7
The foot switch is rated IPX8
 According to the disinfection and sterilization method(s) recommended by manufacturer:
Equipment with disinfection and sterilization method(s) recommended by manufacturer.
 According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of a FLAMMABLE
ANESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR or WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE
EQUIPMENT not suitable for use in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC MIXTURE
WITH AIR or WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE
 According to the mode of operation:
CONTINUOUS OPERATION
 Does the equipment has any defibrillation-proof applied parts:
Non-defibrillation-proof applied part
 Permanently installed equipment or non-permanently installed equipment:
Non-permanently installed equipment

Safety Precautions 1-1

 1.2 Meanings of Signal Words
In this manual, the signal words DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION, NOTE
and Tip are used regarding safety and other important instructions. The signal words and their
meanings are defined as follows. Please understand their meanings clearly before reading this
manual.
Signal word Meaning
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will
DANGER result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could
WARNING result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may
CAUTION result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTE Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may result in
property damage.
Description Important information that helps you use the system more effectively.

1.3 Meaning of Safety Symbols

Symbol Description
Type-BF applied part
The ultrasound probes connected to this system are type-BF applied parts.
The ECG leads within this system are type-BF applied parts.

Caution.

General warning sign.

Patient/user infection due to contaminated equipment. Be careful when

performing cleaning, disinfection and sterilization.

Patient injury or tissue damage from ultrasonic radiation. The ALARA

principle must be practiced when operating the ultrasound system.

1-2 Safety Precautions

1.4 Safety Precautions
Please observe the following precautions to ensure patient and operator safety when using this
system.
Do not operate this system and probes in an atmosphere containing
DANGER: flammable gases or liquids such as anesthetic gases, hydrogen and
ethanol, because there is danger of explosion.

1. Connect the power plug of this system to wall receptacles that meet
WARNING: the ratings indicated on the nameplate. If adapters or multifunctional
receptacles are used, it may cause the leakage current to exceed the
safety requirements.
2. Within 1.5 meters of the patient, connect peripherals to an auxiliary
power outlet which is capable of isolation protection, or power
peripherals by an auxiliary output cable or isolation transformer
which complies with IEC 60601-1 in Chapter 16 or a power input of
the same safety level.
3. DO NOT use different-phase power supplies to power
peripherals, such as air conditioning power supply.

4. When using peripherals which are not powered by the

ultrasound system's auxiliary output, or peripherals other than
those permitted by Mindray, ensure the overall leakage current of
peripherals and the ultrasound system meets the requirement of
the local medical device electrical regulations (e.g., the touch
leakage current should be no more than 500uA as per IEC 60601-
1 in Chapter 16), and the responsibility is held by the user.
5. Connect the grounding conductor before turning the system ON.
Disconnect the grounding cable after turning the system OFF.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
6. For connecting power and grounding, follow the appropriate
procedures described in this operator’s manual. Failure to do so
may result in the risk of electric shock. Do not connect the
grounding cable to a gas pipe or water pipe. This may lead to
improper grounding or a gas explosion.
7. Before cleaning the system, disconnect the power cord from the
outlet. Failure to do so may result in system failure and electric
shock.
8. This system is not waterproof. Do not use this system in any
location where water leakage may occur. If any water is sprayed on
or into the system, this may lead to electric shock. If water is
accidentally sprayed on or into the system, contact the Mindray
Customer Service Department or a sales representative.
9. DO NOT use a probe that has a damaged or scratched surface, or
exposed wiring of any kind. Immediately stop using the probe and
contact the Mindray Customer Service Department or a sales
representative. There is a risk of electric shock if using a damaged
or scratched probe.

Safety Precautions 1-3

 10. Do not allow the patient to come into contact with live parts of the
ultrasound system or other devices, e.g., signal I/O ports. This may
lead to electric shock.
11. Do not use an aftermarket probe other than those specified by
Mindray. Such probes may damage the system causing a profound
failure, with fire being the worst-case scenario.
12. Do not subject the probes to knocks or drops. Use of a defective
probe may lead to electric shock.
13. Do not open the covers or the front panel of the system. Short
circuit or electric shock may occur when the system hardware is
exposed and powered on.
14. Do not use this system when any digital device, such as a high-
frequency electrotome, high-frequency therapy device or
defibrillator, is already applied. This would result in a risk of electric
shock to the patient.
15. Only use the ECG leads provided with the physiology module.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
16. When moving the system, hold the handle. Failure to do so may
result in damage by abnormal force. Do not push the system from
the left/right side. This may cause it to topple over.
17. The system's auxiliary power output is used to supply power for the
recommended peripheral devices. Do not connect other devices to
the outlet. The rated output power limitation may be exceeded and
this may lead to failure.
18. Additional equipment (analog or digital) connected to the
ultrasound system must comply with the relevant IEC standards
(e.g., IEC 60950 information technology equipment safety standard
and IEC 60601-1 medical equipment standard). Furthermore, all
configurations must comply with the standard IEC 60601-1. It is the
responsibility of the person who connects the additional equipment
to the signal input or output ports and configures a medical system
to verify that the system complies with the requirements of IEC
60601-1 in Chapter 16. If you have any questions regarding these
requirements, consult your sales representative.
19. Prolonged and repeated use of keyboards may result in hand or arm
nerve disorders for some individuals. Observe local safety or health
regulations concerning the use of keyboards.
20. When using intra-cavity probes, do not activate the probe outside
the patient’s body.
21. DO NOT touch the Signal I/O ports if in contact with the patient. This
may lead to electric shock.
22. To avoid risk of electric shock, this equipment must only be
connected to a supply mains with protective earth.
23. Connecting electrical equipment to MSO effectively leads to
creating an ME SYSTEM, and can result in a reduced level of safety.

1-4 Safety Precautions

 24. Use detachable power supply cord as mains power breaking device.
DO NOT set equipment in place where difficult for disconnection of
detachable power supply cord！
25. Do not modify this equipment without authorization of the
manufacturer.
26. Always read and follow carefully the manufacturer instructions on
the contrast agent label.
27. When using a probe, pay attention to the status of the ultrasound
image. Do not use the probe to perform image acquisition when
the image is frozen.

1. Precautions concerning clinical examination techniques:

CAUTION:
This system must only be used by qualified medical professionals.
This operator’s manual does not describe clinical examination
techniques. The clinician should select the proper examination
techniques based on specialized training and clinical experience.
2. Malfunctions due to radio waves:
If a device emitting radio waves is used in the proximity of this
system, it may interfere with operations. Do not use or take any
devices transmitting RF signals (such as cellular phones,
transceivers and radio-controlled products) into the room where the
system is located.
If a person brings a device that generates radio waves near the
system, ask him/her to immediately turn the device OFF.
3. Precautions concerning moving the system:
Install the system on a flat surface with the casters locked.
Accidental moving may result in damage.
Do not move the system laterally. This may result in damage in case
of toppling.
If on a slope, the system should be moved slowly by two people.
Unexpected sliding may result in damage.
Do not sit on the system. This may result in the individual falling if
the system moves.
Objects placed on the monitor may fall and result in injury to
individuals.
Fasten and fully secure any peripheral devices before moving the
system. Loose peripheral devices may fall and result in injury to
individuals.
When moving the system on steps, ensure the system does not
topple.
4. If the circuit protector is tripped, it indicates that the system or a
peripheral device was improperly shut down and the system is
unstable. You cannot repair the system under this circumstance and
must call the Mindray Customer Service Department or a sales
representative.

Safety Precautions 1-5

 5. There is no risk of high-temperature burns during normal ultrasound
examinations. It is possible for the surface temperature of the probe
to exceed the patient's body temperature due to factors involving
environmental temperature and exam type. Do not apply the probe to
the same region on the patient for a prolonged period of time. Apply
the probe only for the period of time required for the purpose of
diagnosis.
6. Do not use the system to examine a fetus for a prolonged period of
time.
7. The system and its accessories are not disinfected or sterilized prior
to delivery. The operator is responsible for cleaning and disinfecting
probes and sterilizing biopsy brackets according to the manuals
prior to use. All items must be thoroughly processed to completely
remove harmful residual chemicals, which are not only harmful to
the human body, but also damage the accessory.
8. It is necessary to press <End Exam> to end the current scan that is
in progress and clear the current Patient Information field. Failure to
do so may result in new patient data being combined with the
previous patient's data.
9. Do not connect or disconnect the system’s power cord or its
accessories (e.g., a printer or a recorder) without turning the system
power OFF first. This may damage the system and its accessories or
cause electric shock.
10. If the system is improperly powered off during operation, it may
result in damage to the data on the system hard drive or system
failure.
11. Do not use a USB memory device (e.g., a USB flash drive, or a
removable hard disk) which contains unsafe data. This may result in
system damage.
12. It is recommended to only use the video devices specified in this
manual.
13. Do not use gel, disinfectant, probes, probe sheath or needle-guided
brackets that are not compatible with the system.
14. The applied contrast agents should be compliant with the relevant
local regulations.
15. Read the Acoustic Output Principle in the operation manual carefully
before operating this system in clinical examinations.
16. The cover contains natural rubber that can cause allergic reactions
in some individuals.
17. Use ultrasound gel which complies with the relevant local
regulations.
18. Normal operation may be affected by an unstable mains power
supply. It is recommended that the product be powered from an
uninterruptible power supply.
19. DO NOT expose the system to excessive vibration through
transportation. Mechanical damage may result.

1-6 Safety Precautions

 20. Always keep the system dry. Avoid transporting this system quickly
from a cold place to a warm place; otherwise condensation or water
droplets may form allowing a short circuit and possible electric
shock.

NOTE: 1. DO NOT use the system in the vicinity of strong electromagnetic fields (such as
transformers), which may affect the performance of the system.
2. Do not use the system in the vicinity of high-frequency radiation sources (e.g.,
cellular phones), which may affect the performance of the system or even lead to
failure.
3. When using or positioning the system, keep the system level to avoid instability.
4. To avoid damaging the system, do not use it in the following environments:
 Locations exposed to direct sunlight
 Locations subject to sudden changes in environmental temperature
 Dusty locations
 Locations subject to vibration
 Locations near heat generators
 Locations with high humidity.
5. Turn the system ON only after the power has been turned OFF for a period of time. If the
system is turned ON immediately after being turned OFF, the system may not reboot
properly and could malfunction.
6. Press the <Freeze> key to freeze an image or turn off the system power before
connecting or disconnecting a probe. Failure to do so can lead to the system and/or
probe being damaged.
7. Remove the ultrasound gel from the face of the probe when the examination is
complete. Water in the gel may enter the acoustic lens and adversely affect the
performance and safety of the probe.
8. You should back up the system properly to a secure external storage media,
including system configuration, settings and patient data. Data stored to the
system’s hard drive may be lost due to system failure, improper operation or
accident.
9. Do not apply external force to the control panel. This can lead to the system being
damaged.
10. If the system is used in a small room, the room temperature may rise. Provide
proper ventilation and free air exchange.
11. To dispose of the system or any part thereof, contact the Mindray Customer Service
Department or a sales representative. Mindray is not responsible for any system
content or accessories that have been discarded improperly.
12. Electrical and mechanical performance may be degraded due to long usage (such
as current leakage or distortion and abrasion). Image sensitivity and precision may
also deteriorate. To ensure optimal system operation, it is recommended to maintain
the system under a Mindray service agreement.
13. The replaceable fuse is inside the chassis. Refer replacement operations to Mindray
service engineers or engineers authorized by Mindray only.
14. Do not turn OFF the system power supply during printing, file storage or invoking of
other system operations. An interrupted process may not be completed, and can
become lost or corrupted.

Safety Precautions 1-7

 15. The iScape feature constructs a single extended image from a series of individual
image frames. The quality of the final image is user-dependent and requires skill to
efficiently apply the feature and technique. Exercise caution when measurements
are performed from an iScape image.
16. Ensure that the current exam date and time are the same as the system date and
time.
17. Use detachable cables as mains power breaking device.

Please read the following precautions carefully to ensure safety of the patient and the operator
when using the probes.
1. The probe is only for use with the specified ultrasound diagnostic
WARNING: system. See “2.5.2 Probes and Needle-guided Brackets Available” to
select the proper probe.
2. The ultrasonic probe must only be used by qualified professionals.
3. Confirm that the transducer and probe cable appear normal before
and after each examination. A defective probe may cause electric
shock to the patient.
4. Do not subject the probe to shock. A defective probe may cause
electric shock to the patient.
5. Do not disassemble the probe to avoid the possibility of electric
shock.
6. Never immerse the probe connector in liquids, such as water or
disinfectant, as the connector is not waterproof. Immersion may
cause electric shock or malfunction.
7. A probe sheath must be installed over the probe before performing
intra-cavity or intra-operative examinations.

1. When using the probe, wearing sterile gloves can help to prevent
CAUTION: infection.
2. Be sure to use sterile ultrasound gel. Use ultrasound gel which
complies with the relevant local regulations. and manage the
ultrasound gel properly to ensure that it does not become a source of
infection.
3. In normal diagnostic ultrasound mode, there is no danger of a
normal-temperature burn. However, keeping the probe on the same
region of the patient for a prolonged period of time may cause such a
burn.
4. Do not use the carrying case to store the probe. If the carrying case is
used for storage, it may become a source of infection.
5. The ALARA principle must be practiced when operating the
ultrasound system. Minimize the acoustic power without
compromising the quality of images.
6. The probe and the accessories supplied with it are not delivered
disinfected or sterilized. Sterilization (or high-level disinfecting) is
required before use.

1-8 Safety Precautions

 7. Disposable components should be packaged sterile and for single-
use only. Do not use if the integrity of the packaging has been
violated or if the expiration date has passed. Use disposable
components which comply with the relevant local regulations.
8. Use disinfection or sterilization solutions recommended in this
operator’s manual. Mindray will not be liable for damage caused by
other solutions. If you have any questions, please contact the
Mindray Customer Service Department or a sales representative.
9. Do not use pre-lubricated condoms as a sheath. Lubricant may not be
compatible with the probe material and may result in damage.
10. Contact with improper gel or cleaner may result in damage to the
probe:
 DO NOT soak or saturate probes in a strong polar solution such
as ethanol, chloride of lime, ammonium chloride, acetone or
formaldehyde.
 DO NOT bring the probe into contact with solutions or ultrasound
gels containing oily mediums such as mineral oil or lanoline.

NOTE: Read the following precautions to prevent probe malfunction:

 Before connecting or disconnecting the probe, freeze or turn off the diagnostic
ultrasound system.
 Clean and disinfect the probe before and after each examination.
 After an examination, wipe the ultrasound gel off thoroughly. Failure to do so may
result in the ultrasound gel solidifying and the image quality being degraded.
Repeated disinfection will eventually damage the probe. Check the probe's
performance periodically.

1.5 Latex Alert

When choosing a probe sheath, it is recommended that you directly contact CIVCO for obtaining
information regarding probe sheaths, pricing, samples and local distribution. For CIVCO
information, please contact the following:
CIVCO Medical Instruments
Tel: 1-800-445-6741
www.civco.com
Allergic reactions in patients sensitive to latex (natural rubber) may
WARNING: range from mild skin reactions (irritation) to fatal anaphylactic shock,
and may include difficulty breathing (wheezing), dizziness, shock,
swelling of the face, hives, sneezing, or itching of the eyes (FDA
Medical Alert on latex products, “Allergic Reactions to Latex-
containing Medical Devices”, issued on March 29, 1991).

1.6 Warning Labels

Warning labels are attached to this system to call your attention to potential hazards. The symbol
on warning labels indicates safety precautions.
The warning labels use the same signal words as those used in the operator’s manual. Read the
operator’s manual carefully before using the system.

Safety Precautions 1-9

 The name, design and meaning of each warning label are described as follows:
No. Warning Labels Meaning
1. a. Do not place the system on a sloped surface.
Otherwise the system may slide, resulting in
personal injury or the system malfunction. Two
a d persons are required to move the system over a
sloped surface.
b. Do not sit on the system.
c. DO NOT push the system. when the casters are
b c
locked.
d. Caution! please carefully read this manual before
use system.
2. No heavy load

3. Warning; Crushing of hands

4. Please do not lift the hanger or try to push the

ultrasound system by using it.

1-10 Safety Precautions

2 System Overview

2.1 Intended Use

The DC-70/ DC-70T/ DC-70 Pro/ DC-70 Exp/ DC-75/ DC-78/ DC-70S Diagnostic Ultrasound
System is applicable for adults, pregnant women, pediatric patients and neonates. It is intended for
use in fetal, abdominal, pediatric, small organ (breast, thyroid, testes), neonatal and adult cephalic,
trans-rectal, trans-vaginal, musculo-skeletal (conventional, superficial), adult and pediatric cardiac,
Trans-esoph. (Cardiac), peripheral vessel, intra-operative (abdominal, thoracic, and vascular) and
urology exams.

2.2 Contraindication
The diagnostic ultrasound system is not intended for ophthalmic use.

2.3 Product and Model Code

DC - □

Model code
Product code

System Overview 2-1

 2.4 Product Specifications
NOTE The functions described in the operator’s manual may vary depending upon the specific
system you purchased.

2.4.1 Imaging Mode

B Mode B
M Mode M
Anatomical M: Free Xros M, Free Xros CM
C Mode Color
Power
DirPower
D Mode PW
CW
Special imaging Smart 3D
Static 3D
4D
Color 3D
Color M
iScape (panoramic imaging)
TDI (Tissue Doppler imaging)
TDI QA
Stress Echo
Tissue Tracking QA
Contrast imaging
Contrast Imaging QA
LVO
SCV+
STIC
Niche
iLive
iPage+
Smart Planes CNS
Smart face
Smart Volume
Strain Elastography

2-2 System Overview

2.4.2 Power supply
 Power input
Voltage 220-240Vac; 100-127Vac
Frequency 50/60Hz
Power consumption 630VA
Fuse T5AH 250Vac
T10AH 250Vac
Battery DC 14.8V
6600mAh

 Power output
Voltage 220-240Vac; 100-127Vac
Frequency 50/60Hz
Power consumption 240VA (note: this is the maximum auxiliary output power of the outlet.
When the peripheral device is connected to the outlet, ensure that the
maximum auxiliary output power does not exceed this threshold.
Otherwise, the system may be damaged.)

2.4.3 Environmental Conditions

Operating conditions Storage and transportation conditions
Ambient temperature 0°C~40°C -20°C~55°C
Relative humidity 30%~85% (no condensation) 20%~95% (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700hPa~1060hPa 700hPa~1060hPa

WARNING: Do not use this system in conditions other than those specified.

2.4.4 Dimensions and Weight

21.5 inch monitor (folded): 825±5mm (Length) × 510±5mm (main unit)/533±5mm (display) (Width)
× 1090±5mm (Height)
23.8 inch monitor (folded): 825±5mm (Length) × 510±5mm (main unit)/575±5mm (display) (Width)
× 1090±5mm (Height)
Weight (including built-in batteries): <85KG.

System Overview 2-3

 2.5 System Configuration
2.5.1 Standard Configuration
 Main unit
 System software
 Built-in DVD recorder
 Accessories
 Control panel overlay
 Operator's manual
 Intra-cavity probe bracket
 Ultrasound gel
 Basic accessories (holders, dust-proof cover and cables etc.)

2.5.2 Probes and Needle-guided Brackets Available

Probe Region
Probe Type Intended Use
model Applied
Fetal, abdominal, pediatric, musculo-skeletal
C5-2E Convex Body surface
(Conventional), peripheral vessel
Abdominal, pediatric, neonatal cephalic, cardiac
C11-3E Convex Body surface
pediatric, peripheral vessel
C7-3E Convex Fetal, abdominal, pediatric Body surface
Abdominal, pediatric, small organ (breast,
L12-3E Linear thyroid, testes), musculo-skeletal (conventional, Body surface
superficial), peripheral vessel
Abdominal, pediatric, small organ (breast,
L14-6NE Linear thyroid, testes), musculo-skeletal (conventional, Body surface
superficial), peripheral vessel

Abdominal, pediatric, small organ (breast,

L14-6WE Linear thyroid, testes), musculo-skeletal (conventional, Body surface
superficial), peripheral vessel

V11-3E
V11-3WE Convex Fetal, trans-rectal, trans-vaginal, urology Transvaginal
V11-3BE
Abdominal, pediatric, neonatal cephalic, adult
P4-2E Phased array Body surface
cephalic, cardiac adult, cardiac pediatric
Abdominal, pediatric, neonatal cephalic, adult
P7-3E Phased array Body surface
cephalic, cardiac adult, cardiac pediatric
D6-2E Volume Fetal, abdominal Body surface
DE10-3E Volume Fetal, trans-rectal, trans-vaginal Transvaginal
CW5s Pencil probe Peripheral vessel Body surface
D7-2E Volume Fetal, abdominal Body surface
D6-2NE Volume Fetal, abdominal Body surface

2-4 System Overview

 Probe Region
Probe Type Intended Use
model Applied
Fetal, abdominal, pediatric, Musculo-skeletal
C5-1E Convex Body surface
(Conventional), Peripheral vessel
CB10-4E Convex Trans-rectal, Urology Transrectal
P7-3TE Phased array Trans-esoph. (Cardiac) Transesophagel
Abdominal, pediatric, neonatal cephalic, adult
P10-4E Phased array Body surface
cephalic, cardiac adult, cardiac pediatric
Abdominal, pediatric, adult cephalic, cardiac
SP5-1E Phased array Body surface
adult, cardiac pediatric
V11-3HE Convex Fetal, trans-rectal, trans-vaginal, urology Transvaginal
Abdominal, pediatric, small organ (breast,
L9-3E Linear thyroid, testes), musculo-skeletal (Conventional), Body surface
musculo-skeletal (Superficial), peripheral vessel
DE11-3E Volume Fetal, trans-rectal, trans-vaginal Transvaginal
Abdominal, Pediatric, Small Organ (breast,
thyroid, testes), Neonatal Cephalic, Musculo-
L14-5WE Linear Body surface
skeletal (Conventional), Musculo-skeletal
(Superficial), Peripheral vessel
Small Organ (breast, thyroid, testes), Musculo-
L20-5E Linear skeletal (Conventional), Musculo-skeletal Body surface
(Superficial), Peripheral vessel
6LB7E Linear/Convex Trans-rectal, Urology Transrectal
Fetal, Abdominal, Musculo-skeletal
SC6-1E Convex Body surface
(Conventional), Peripheral vessel
SD8-1E Convex Fetal, Abdominal Body surface
L16-4HE Linear Abdominal, Intra-operative (abdominal, thoracic,
and vascular), Pediatric, Small Organ (breast,
thyroid, testes), Neonatal Cephalic, Musculo- Body surface
skeletal (Conventional), Musculo-skeletal
(Superficial), Peripheral vessel
NOTE: For details about the TEE probe, refer to TEE Transducer manual.

 Some of the probes have corresponding needle-guided brackets for biopsy. The available
probes and the corresponding needle-guided brackets are listed as follows:
Biopsy
Needle-guided angle/depth
Probe model Applicable Biopsy Needle
Bracket Model
(±1°)
V11-3E/ V11- NGB-004
3BE/ V11-3WE/ metal/needle un- 0.8° 16G, 17G, 18G
CB10-4E detachable
L14-6NE NGB-007
/ L12-3E plastic/needle
/ L14-6WE Metal: 14G, 16G, 18G, 20G, 22G
detachable 40°, 50°, 60°
Plastic: 13G, 15G, 16G, 18G, 20G
metal/needle
detachable

System Overview 2-5

 6LB7E NGB-009
metal/needle 0° 13G, 15G, 16G, 18G, 20G
detachable
P4-2E / SP5- NGB-011
1E metal/needle un- 11°, 23° 13G, 15G, 16G, 18G, 20G
detachable
C5-2E NGB-015
metal/needle 25°, 35°, 45° 14G, 16G, 18G, 20G, 22G
detachable
C11-3E NGB-018
Metal/needle 15°, 25°, 35° 14G, 16G, 18G, 20G, 22G
detachable
C7-3E NGB-019
metal/needle 20°, 30°, 40° 14G, 16G, 18G, 20G, 22G
detachable
D6-2E NGB-020
metal/needle 20°, 30°, 40° 14G, 16G, 18G, 20G, 22G
detachable
DE10-3E NGB-021
metal/needle un- 2° 16G, 17G, 18G
detachable
C5-1E/ SC6-1E NGB-022
metal/needle 25°, 35°, 45° 14G, 16G, 18G, 20G, 22G
detachable
V11-3HE NGB-025
metal/needle un- 1.6° 16G, 17G, 18G
detachable
DE11-3E NGB-027
metal/needle un- 1.7° 16G, 17G, 18G
detachable
L9-3E NGB-034
metal/needle 40°, 50°, 60° 14G, 16G, 18G, 20G, 22G
detachable
L14-5WE NGB-035
metal/needle 47°, 53°, 59°, 65° 14G, 16G, 18G, 20G, 22G
detachable
SD8-1E NGB-039
metal/needle 21°, 26°, 33° 14G, 16G, 18G, 20G, 22G
detachable

 CIVCO Bracket
Probe model Needle-guided Bracket Model

2-6 System Overview

 Probe model Needle-guided Bracket Model
L14-6NE/L12- CIVCO 658-001
3E Infiniti-Plus Bracket Starter Kit
CIVCO 658-002
C5-2E
Infiniti-Plus Bracket Starter Kit
CIVCO 610-543
V11-3E/V11- Disposable Sterile Endocavity Needle Guide / Cover Kit
3BE/V11-3HE CIVCO 610-1274
Disposable, Sterile Endocavity Guide / Cover Kit

2.5.3 Options
No. Item Remarks
1. ECG /
2. DC-IN cable ECG module should be configured.
3. Three-cable lead ECG module should be configured.
4. Built-in Battery /
5. DVR module /
6. CW module /
7. 4D module /
8. Gel Warmer /
9. Built-in Wireless Adapter /
10. iScape View /
11. DICOM Basic /
12. DICOM WorkList DICOM Basic should be configured.
13. DICOM Query/Retrieve DICOM Basic should be configured.
14. DICOM MPPS DICOM Basic should be configured.
15. DICOM OB/GYN Structured Report DICOM Basic should be configured.
16. DICOM Cardiac Structured Report DICOM Basic should be configured.
17. DICOM Vascular Structured Report DICOM Basic should be configured.
18. DICOM Breast Structured Report DICOM Basic should be configured.
19. Abdomen/General Package /
20. Obstetrics Package /
21. Smart OB Obstetrics Package should be configured.
22. Gynecology Package /
23. Cardiology Package /
24. Small Parts Package /
25. Urology Package /

System Overview 2-7

 No. Item Remarks
26. Vascular Package /
27. Pediatrics Package /
28. Nerve Package /
29. Emergency& Critical Package /
30. Smart 3D /
31. Free Xros M /
32. Free Xros CM /
33. Tissue Doppler Imaging Cardiology Package should be configured.
Tissue Doppler Imaging should be
34. TDI QA
configured.
35. IMT Vascular Package should be configured.
36. Smart Volume 4D module should be configured.
37. Strain Elastography /
38. Contrast Imaging /
39. Contrast Imaging QA Contrast Imaging should be configured.
40. LVO Cardiology Package should be configured.
41. Tissue Tracking QA Cardiology Package should be configured.
42. iWorks /
43. Smart NT Obstetrics Package should be configured.
4D module and Gynecology Package
44. Smart FLC
should be configured.
45. AutoEF Cardiology Package should be configured.
46. Stress Echo Cardiac package should be configured.
47. SCV+ 4D module should be configured.
48. STIC 4D module should be configured.
49. Color 3D 4D module should be configured.
50. Niche 4D module should be configured.
4D module and Obstetrics Package
51. Smart Face
should be configured.
4D module and Obstetrics Package
52. Smart Planes CNS
should be configured.
Smart 3D or 4D module should be
53. iLive
configured.
54. iPage+ 4D module should be configured.
55. iNeedle /
Gynecology Package should be
56. IVF
configured.

2-8 System Overview

2.5.4 Peripherals Supported
Item Model
Black/white digital video
MITSUBISHI P95DW-N, SONY UP-D898MD
printer
Black/white analog video
SONY UP-X898MD, MITSUBISHI P93W-Z
printer
Color digital video printer SONY UP-D25MD
HP Officejet 7000 wide format, HP Officejet Pro 8100 (the printer
Graph/text printer
driver requires manually installed)
USB port: FS-81-SP-2 (1-pedal)
Foot switch USB port: 971-SWNOM (2-pedal)
USB port: 971-SWNOM (3-pedal)
Bar code reader LS2208, DS4308

 Parts that can be used within patient environment:

 Main unit.
 Probes.
 Footswitch.
 Printers

This system complies with IEC60601-1-2: 2014, and its RF

emissions meet the requirements of CISPR11 Class B. In a
domestic environment, the customer or user should ensure the
WARNING: system is connected to Class B peripheral devices, otherwise RF
interference may occur, and the customer or user must take
adequate measures accordingly.

NOTE: If the ultrasound system cannot recognize the SONY UP-X898MD printer
automatically, you may need to change the settings on the printer: push <PUSH
ENTER> to enter the main menu and select [DIGITAL]->[DRIVER], and select [897].

2.6 Introduction of Each Unit

System Overview 2-9

 No. Name Function
1. Monitor Displays the images and parameters during scanning.
2. Touch screen panel Operator-system interface or control.
3. Speaker Sound output.
4. Ultrasound gel holder Used for placing the ultrasound gel.
Used for placing the general probe (not including pencil probe
5. Probe holder
or intra-cavity probe).
6. Pencil probe holder Used for placing the pencil probe.
7. Probe cable hook Used for fixing the probe cable.
8. Keyboard Used for typing characters or entering some functions.
9. Main control panel Operator-system interface or control.
Control panel adjusting
10. Used for lifting or swiveling the control panel.
lever
11. USB_MIC port USB/MIC port
12. Hanger /
Intracavitary probe
13. Used for fixing the intracavitary probe.
holder
Ultrasound gel
14. Used for placing the ultrasound gel or installing the gel warmer.
holder/gel warmer
15. Physio panel Used for connecting the ECG leads and external ECG device.
16. Compartment Used for positioning the B/W video printer.
17. Probe port Sockets connecting transducers and the main unit.
18. Caster Used for securing or moving the system.

2-10 System Overview

No. Name Function
Supports the monitor, for adjusting the height and position of
19. Monitor supporting arm
the monitor.
20. Rear handle Used for pushing and moving the system.
Supporting arm locking
21. Used for locking/unlocking the supporting arm
lever
22. Cooling vent /
23. I/O Panel Interface panel used for inputting and outputting signals.
24. Caster brake Used for locking/unlocking the caster
25. Power supply panel Electrical port panel.
26. DVD-RW DVD-RW drive.

2.7 I/O Panel

No. Symbol Function

<1> USB ports.
<2> HDMI High definition multimedia interface.
<3> Network port.
<4> VGA VGA signal output.
<5> S-Video Used for separate video output.
<6> Audio signal output port, left channel.
<7> Audio signal output port, right channel.

System Overview 2-11

 No. Symbol Function
<8> / 12V power indicator
<9> / 5V power indicator
<10> / 3.3V power indicator
<11> / PC_LVDS indicator
<12> / PHV protection indicator

NOTE: 1. The S-VIDEO port performs better with analog video printing.
2. When connecting an external video device (HDMI/VGA), make sure the display
resolution setting is 1280x1024, otherwise the image quality may be degraded.

2.8 Power Supply Panel

No. Name Function

<1> Power outlet Supplies power to optional peripheral devices.
<2> Power inlet AC power inlet.
Equipotential terminal Used for equipotential bonding which balances the protective earth
<3>
potentials between the system and other electrical equipment.

2-12 System Overview

2.9 Physio Panel

No. Name Function

<1> USB port Connects USB device.
<2> Pencil probe port Used for connecting a pencil probe.
<3> MIC port Used for connecting a microphone.
Connects to ECG leads to directly obtain the patient's ECG
ECG lead signal input signals.
<4> port/external ECG
signal input port Connects the signal output port of an external ECG monitoring
device.
<5> PCG signal input port Reserved.
<6> Reserved port Reserved.

System Overview 2-13

 2.10 Control Panel

No. English Name Description

Power button
<1> / Press the button to turn on the system, the system enters the
work status and the indicator becomes green.
<2> Volume Adjust the volume.
<3> /
<4> /
<5> / Adjust the corresponding functions on the touch screen.
<6> /
<7> /
<8> TGC Slide to adjust the depth gain.
<9> Patient Enter/exit Patient Info screen.
<10> Probe Switch probe and exam mode.
<11> Review Review the stored images.
<12> Report Open/close the exam report.
<13> End Exam End the current exam.

2-14 System Overview

No. English Name Description
<14> Text Enter/exit the textual comment status.
<15> Clear Clear the comments or measurement caliper.
Press to enter the Cine Review status from non-cine status when
<16> Cine
there is a multi-frame cine file playing.
<17> Body Mark Enter/exit Body Mark.
Press to enter M mode, and rotate to adjust M mode gain. While
<18> M in 3D/4D mode, rotate the knob to make the 3D image to rotate
around X-axis.
<19> CW Enter CW mode.
Press to enter PW mode, and rotate to adjust PW or CW gain.
<20> PW While in 3D/4D mode, rotate the knob to make the 3D image
rotate around Y-axis.
<21> Power Enter Power mode.
Press to enter Color mode, and rotate to adjust Color or Power
<22> Color gain. While in 3D/4D mode, rotate the knob to make the 3D image
rotate around Z-axis.
Enter Dual mode in Non-Dual mode.
<23> Dual
Switch between the two display windows in the Dual mode.
<24> B Press to enter B mode, and rotate to adjust B mode gain.
<25> Single Enter single window in multiple window mode.
Press to enter 4D function and rotate to make the 3D image
<26> 4D
rotate.
<27> 3D Enter the 3D imaging function: Smart 3D or Static 3D.
<28> iTouch Optimize the image.
Adjust the angle.
<29> Angle/Steer
Adjust the steering of the probe.
<30> Measure Enter/exit the application measurement mode.
Switching key: Press to change the currently active window.
<31> Update
Start/stop image acquisition in iScape or 3D/4D mode.
<32> Caliper Enter/exit the general measurement mode.
Rotate to enter the pan-zoom mode, and press to enter the spot-
<33> Zoom
zoom mode.
Enter Quad mode in Non-Quad mode.
<34> Quad
Switch between the four display windows in the Quad mode.
<35> Depth Adjust the depth in real-time imaging.
<36> Focus Change the focus position.
<37> Cursor Show/hide the cursor.
Confirm an operation. The function is same with the left-button of
<38> Set
the mouse.
<39> / Move the trackball to change the cursor position.

System Overview 2-15

 No. English Name Description
Confirm an operation. The function is same with the left-button of
<40> Set
the mouse.
<41> Freeze Freeze/defreeze the image.
<42> Save Save the image; user-defined key.
<43> P User-defined keys, functions of which can be defined in preset.
<44> Print Print: user-defined key.
Battery status indicator.
 Charging status:
It illuminates in green when batteries are charged fully.
 Discharging status:
It illuminates in green when the power of the batteries is sufficient;
It illuminates in orange for low battery capacity.
<45>
AC indicator
The indicator is on at AC supply.
Standby indicator.
Standby: blinking in orange.
Hard disk status indicator.
The indicator blinks in green when hard disk is running.

NOTE: “/” means the key are undefined or have no silk print. For the undefined keys, you can
customize them.

Keyboard

 Common functional keys

No. Key Function
Confirm the entered data, or move the cursor to the top of the
1. Enter
next row of the text or input field.
2. Esc Cancel the operation or exit.

2-16 System Overview

No. Key Function
3. Tab Jump to the next operable item.
4. Space key Insert a space.
5. Caps Lock Switch between upper/lowercase.
Activate the Home function: return to start position of the
6. Home
comment.
Activate the Home function, move the cursor to the target
7. Set Home position, then press <Set Home> to set the start position of the
comment
8. Delete Text Delete all comments on the screen.
Move the cursor one letter each time, or, select the surrounding
9. Direction-control keys
objects in the selectable area.
10. Del Delete the character after the cursor
11. Back Space Delete the character before the cursor
 Functions of the F1 to F12 keys
No. Key Function
Open or close the accompanying help documents.
1 F1 Help Select the keyword, view the directory, jump to the corresponding page
and turn the pages after open the document.
2 F2 iStation Enter or exit the Patient Info system.
3 F3~F6 User-defined keys, the functions of which can be preset.
4 F7 QSave Save the current image parameters quickly.
5 F8 iZoom Enter/exit full-screen zoom status.
6 F9 DVR Reserved, enter/exit DVR mode.
7 F10 Setup Enter/exit Setup.
8 F11 Biopsy Display/hide the guide line.
9 F12 User-defined keys, the functions of which can be preset.
 Functions of key combinations
The system supports multi-language input using key combinations. Key combinations include
[Shift], [Alt Gr], [Ctrl], [Fn] and some alphabet keys. For details about switching the system to
multi-language, see “12.1.1 Region” for details.
 <Shift> key
<Shift> + key: enter the top left letter on the key.
For the alphabet keys (<A>~<Z>), press <Shift> + key to enter the current letter in a
different case.
 [Alt Gr] key
Combined with other letter keys, [Alt Gr] can be used for entering other languages.
Press [Alt Gr] and a letter key simultaneously. The letter in the top-right corner of the key
is entered.
 [Ctrl] key combined keys
On the iStation or Review screen, use <Ctrl> and <Set> to select more than one patient or
more than one image.

System Overview 2-17

  [Fn] key
For these combination keys, press <Fn> + key to use the functions indicated with a frame on
the key.
No. Fn+ Name Function
Move the cursor to the end of the row, or the rightmost side of an
1. → End
editable unit.
2. ← Home Home
3. ↑ Pg Up Turn pages upward.
4. ↓ Pg Dw Turn pages downward.
5. Home Set Home Activate the Set Home function: set the start point of a comment.

2.11 Symbols
This system uses the symbols listed in the following table. Their meanings are explained as follows:
Symbol Description

Type-BF applied part

Caution

AC (Alternating current)

Protective earth (ground)

Equipotentiality

Power button

Foot switch
Transducer sockets
Pencil probe port

Network port
USB port
VGA Used for VGA output.
S-VIDEO
Reserved, used for separate video output

AUDIO Used for stereo audio output.

HDMI High definition multimedia interface.
Microphone input jack

When the lever located at the bottom of the monitor supporting arm points to ,
you can move the monitor to the right and left.

When the lever located at the bottom of the monitor supporting arm points to ,
the supporting arm is fixed in the middle position.

2-18 System Overview

Symbol Description
Product serial number

Manufacture date
Manufacturer

Authorized representative in the European Community

Temperature limit

Humidity limitation

Atmospheric pressure limitation

CONFORMS TO AAMI STD 60601-1, IEC STD 60601-2-37, IEC STD 60601-1-6;
CERTIFIED TO CSA STD C22.2 NO. 60601-1, 60601-2-37, 60601-1-6

System Overview 2-19

3 System Preparation
1. Do not connect the system's three-wire cable with a two-wire
WARNING: plug without protective grounding. This may lead to electric
shock.
2. Connect the power plug of this system to wall receptacles that
meet the ratings indicated on the nameplate. If adapters or
multifunctional receptacles are used, it may cause the leakage
current to exceed the safety requirements.
3. Within 1.5 meters of the patient, connect peripherals to an
auxiliary power outlet which is capable of isolation protection,
or power peripherals by an auxiliary output cable or isolation
transformer which complies with IEC 60601-1 in Chapter 16 or a
power input of the same safety level.
4. DO NOT use different-phase power supplies to power
peripherals.
5. When using peripherals which are not powered by the ultrasound
system's auxiliary output, or peripherals other than those
permitted by Mindray, ensure the overall leakage current of
peripherals and the ultrasound system meets the requirement of
the local medical device electrical regulations (e.g., the enclosure
leakage current should be no more than 500uA as per IEC 60601-1
in Chapter 16), and the responsibility is held by the user.

3.1 Move/Position the System

Read and understand the safety precautions before positioning the system to ensure the safety of
both the operator and the devices.
1. Switch off the power, and pull out the plug.
2. Disconnect all cables from off-board peripheral devices (printer, recorder, etc.).
3. Release the four casters and hold the handle to move the system.
4. When moving the system to a desired location, lock the four casters.

1. Maintain a generous, free air flowing space around the back and
CAUTION: both sides of the system. Not doing so may result in failure due to
the increased rise in the system's operating temperature.
2. Pay extra attention when moving the system on a sloping surface.
Do not move it on a surface with a slope of more than 10° to avoid
the system toppling.

System Preparation 3-1

 3.2 Connecting the Power Cord & Protective
Grounding
3.2.1 Connecting Power
 The connection method is described as follows:
1. Push the retaining clamp upward, and insert the power plug into the receptacle, as shown in
the figure below.

2. Pull the retaining clamp downward to lock the power cord, as shown in the figure above.
3. Plug the power plug at the other end into an appropriate outlet. The grounding terminal should
be connected with a power grounding cable to ensure that protective grounding works
normally.

NOTE: Be sure to allow sufficient slack in the cable so that the plug will not be pulled out of the
receptacle if the system is moved slightly. If the plug is pulled out accidentally, data may
be lost.

3-2 System Preparation

3.2.2 Equipotential terminal

The symbol represents the equipotential terminal that is used for balancing the protective
earth potentials between the system and other electrical equipment.
1. Be sure to connect the equipotential wire before inserting the
power plug into the receptacle. Be sure to remove the power
WARNING: plug from the receptacle before disconnecting the
equipotential wire. Failure to do so may result in electric
shock.
2. When you connect another device to this system, you should
use the equipotential wire to connect each of equipotential
terminals. Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
3. Connect the earth cable before turning the system ON.
Disconnect the earth cable after turning the system OFF.
Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
4. DO NOT connect this system to outlets with the same fuses
that control the current to devices such as life-support
systems. If this system malfunctions and generates
overcurrent, or when there is an instantaneous current at
power ON, fuses of the building’s supply circuit may be
tripped.

System Preparation 3-3

 3.2.3 Power the System ON
To ensure safe and effective system operation, you must perform daily
CAUTION: maintenance and checks. If the system begins to function improperly,
immediately stop scanning. If the system continues to function
improperly, fully shut down the system and contact the Mindray
Customer Service Department or a sales representative. If you use the
system in a persistent improperly functioning state, you may harm the
patient or damage the equipment.
 Check before Powering ON
Check before the system is powered on:
No. Check Item
The temperature, relative humidity and atmospheric pressure meet the requirements of
1
the operating conditions. See “2.4.3 Environmental Conditions” for details.
2 There is no condensation.
There is no distortion, damage or dirt on the system and peripheral devices.
3 If any dirt is found, cleaning shall be performed as illustrated in section “17 System
Maintenance.”
4 There are no loose screws on the monitor or control panel.
There is no cable damage (e.g., power cord). Maintain secure connections to the system
5
at all times.
The probes and probe cables are free from damage or stains.
6
See chapter “13 Probes and Biopsy” for details of probe cleaning and disinfection.
7 No miscellaneous odds and ends are attached or affixed to the control panel.
Ensure that all connections are free from damage and remain clear of foreign object
8 blockages.
There are no obstacles around the system and its air vent.
9 Probe cleaning and disinfection.
10 The entire scanning environment and field must be clean.
11 The locking mechanism of the casters works normally.

Before turning the system on, check if the system is plugged in. Press the power button (to the
left of the control panel) to power the system on.

3-4 System Preparation

 Check the system after it is powered on
Check after the system is powered on:
No. Check Item
1 There are no unusual sounds or smells indicating possible overheating.
2 There are no persistently displayed system error messages.
3 There is no evident excessive noise, or discontinuous, absent or black items in the B mode
image.
4 Check whether there is abnormal heat on the surface of the probe during an ultrasound
procedure. If you use a probe which is giving off excessive heat, it may burn the patient.
5 The control panel keys and knobs are fully functional.
6 The touch screen and the main monitor screens display normally depending on the system
modes and image status.
7 The exam date and time are the same as the system date and time, and are displayed
correctly.

If you use a probe giving off excessive heat, it may burn the patient.
WARNING:
If you find anything not functioning properly, this may indicate that
the system is defective. In this case, shut down the system
immediately and contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
sales representative.

3.2.4 Power the System OFF

You must follow the correct procedures to power the system off. Also, after you upgrade the
software or when the system is down, you need to power off and restart it.
 To power the system off normally
Press the power button on left of the control panel to see the option:
 Shut down: to power the system off normally.
 Standby: to enter standby status.
 Cancel: to cancel the operation.

NOTE: 1. DO NOT rush direct shutdown of the system. It may damage the data.
2. After the system is upgraded, use “Shut Down” to power the system off to make the
upgraded data effective.

System Preparation 3-5

 3.2.5 Standby
When the batteries are charged to full capacity, the system's standby time is no less than 24 hours.
 To enter standby:
Open [Setup] → [System] → “General” to set the time for screensaver and standby. If the
system is not carrying out an operation, the screensaver appears after the screensaver delay
period. If there is still no operation, the system enters standby after the standby delay period.

Press the power button and select “Standby”, the system enters standby mode.
 To exit standby:
Press the power button.
 Under the standby status:
Press the power button to exit standby status and then power off the system.

NOTE: If the system will not be used for a long period of time, you should disconnect the power
adapter, disconnect the mains power, and turn off the power to all peripherals
connected to the system.

3-6 System Preparation

3.3 Monitor Adjustment
3.3.1 Monitor Position Adjustment
Gently hold the bottom edge of the monitor when adjusting its position.
 Height and displacement adjustment
Move the monitor support arm up or down to adjust the height, back and forth to adjust the
displacement

NOTE: Take care not to trap your hands when adjusting the monitor up and down.
 Rotate the monitor
The monitor can be rotated 90° to the left and 150° to the right along with the supporting arm.

 Tilt the monitor

When positioned vertically, the monitor can be tilted 20° backward and can be tilted forward to
a horizontal position. When transporting or moving the system, keep the monitor in the
horizontal position, as shown below:

System Preparation 3-7

  Lock the monitor
If the ultrasound system is required to be moved within a short distance (for example: move to
other department), turn the monitor to the horizontal level, push it to the locking structure, and
then the monitor can be locked. For more details, please refer to the operation diagram that is
attached to the supporting arm.

Label of the operation diagram

3-8 System Preparation

3.4 Control Panel Position Adjustment
Press the control lever downwards for about 30° to rotate the control panel ±90°. Press the lever
downwards for about 60° to move the control panel upwards or downwards.

Control
lever

3.5 Connecting a Probe

1. Press <Freeze> to freeze an image or turn off the system power
CAUTION: before connecting or disconnecting a probe. Failure to do so may
result in system or probe failure.
2. When connecting or disconnecting a probe, place it in the proper
position to prevent the probe from falling off or becoming damaged.
3. Hang the probe cable on the hanger located under the control panel
to avoid excessive bending and damage.
4. Only use probes provided by Mindray. Aftermarket probes may result
in damage or cause a fire.

NOTE: If a probe port is not used for a long period of time, use the dustproof cover to protect
the probe port from dust. Failure to do so may result in bad contact.

3.5.1 Connecting a Probe

The probes, cables and connectors should be in proper operating
WARNING: order and free from surface defects, cracks and peeling.
Otherwise, this may lead to electrical shock.
1. Keep the cable end of the transducer to the right side of the system, insert the connector into
the system port, then press in fully. (Shown in the left figure)
2. Turn the lock handle 90° clockwise to lock it securely. (Shown in the right figure)
3. Position the probe properly to avoid it being treaded on or becoming wrapped around other
devices. DO NOT allow the probe head to hang free.

System Preparation 3-9

 Lock

NOTE: Before inserting the connector into the probe port, inspect the connector pin. If the pin is
bent, do not use the probe until it has been inspected/repaired/replaced.

3.5.2 Disconnecting a probe

1. Turn the locking lever 90° counterclockwise to the vertical position. (Shown in the left figure)
2. Pull the transducer connector straight out vertically (shown in the figure below).

loose

3.6 Connecting Peripheral Devices

3.6.1 Connecting USB Devices
DO NOT directly remove a USB memory device, as the USB
WARNING: device and/or the system may become damaged.
 When connecting a USB memory device to the ultrasound system via a USB port, a sound is
heard if it is connected successfully and the symbol appears in the bottom-right corner of
the screen.
 To remove the USB device: click to open the [Remove USB Device] screen. Select the
device to be removed and click [OK]. A sound is heard when removing the USB memory device.

3.6.2 Connecting a Foot Switch

The system supports USB port-type foot switches.
 Connection
Directly insert the USB port of the foot switch into the system's applicable USB port.

3-10 System Preparation

  Function setting
The function of the foot switch can be preset. For details, see “12.1.6 Key Configuration.”

3.7 Installing a Printer

3.7.1 Installing a Graph/Text Printer
 Connecting a local printer
Note: Unless otherwise specified, printers listed in “2.5.4 Peripherals Supported” Chapter have
drivers installed already.
As shown in the figure below, a graph / text printer has a power cord and data cable. The power
cord shall be directly plugged into a well-grounded outlet.

Power supply
cable
Data cable

USB port

System Preparation 3-11

 1. Connect the data cable to the USB port on the ultrasound system.
2. Power the system and the printer on.
3. Install the printer driver. For details, please contact the Mindray service engineer.

 Print
Both report and image can be printed on a graph / text printer.
To set the default report printer and its attribute:
In "[Setup]→[Print]" screen, select the "Report Print" column in the service list. You can select
printer from the driver list next to “Printer” in the lower screen and set the items in the "Property"
box. Click [Save] after you have finished setting.
Please refer to the accompanying manuals of the printers for more details.

3.7.2 Installing a Video Printer

The system support video printers, consist of the B/W digital printers and color digital printers.
Note: Unless otherwise specified, printers listed in “2.5.4 Peripherals Supported” Chapter have
drivers installed already.
 Local printer installation
1. Position the printer in the proper place.
2. Plug the printer power cord into an appropriate outlet.
3. Use a USB cable to connect between the system's USB port and the printer's USB port.
4. Load a paper roll, and turn on the system and printer.
5. Install the printer driver. For details, please contact the Mindray service engineer.
6. Add a print service:
(1) Open the “[Setup] → [Print]” screen.
(2) Click [Add Service] to enter the page.

(3) Select the service type and enter the service name manually.
(4) Click [OK] to return to the page.
(5) Select the target printer from the drop-down list in the “Property” box and set other printing
properties.
(6) Click [Save] to complete.

3.7.3 Position the Printer

As shown in the following figure, you can open the video printer compartment gate and then place
the black/white digital video printer in the video printer compartment.

3-12 System Preparation

 Compartment gate

3.7.4 Installing/ uninstalling Probe/Gel Holder

 Installing
As shown in the figure below, align the buckle of the holder to the slot at the side of the control
panel and then insert the buckle into the slot until the buckle clicks and locks.

 Uninstalling
Press the clip in the direction of the arrow to get out the holder.

System Preparation 3-13

3-14 System Preparation
3.8 Basic Screen & Operation
3.8.1 Screen Display
The screen displays ultrasound images, parameters, menus and measurement results windows.
The following diagram maps out the different areas, such as patient information, image parameter
& menu, image area, thumbnail of images saved, help information, soft menu, system status icon,
etc.
Exam Probe
Hospital Name Patient Name
mode Model
Gender/
Date Time Operator ID HR Age /DOB
GA
Probe parameter area

Gray Thumbnail
Menu Image
scale Area
parameter
/ Image Area area
Color
Bar

ECG Curve
Cine Review
User-
defined
Trackball
Soft menu parameter window key and
hint area
gesture
hint area
Help Information System Status Icon

 Patient/Exam information
The Information area consists of the hospital name, patient name, the exam mode, the probe
model, the exam time, operator, patient ID, DOB, GA or age etc. To preset which kind of patient
information is displayed, enter the path: [Setup]→[System]→[General]. For more details, please
refer to “12.1.2 General” chapter.
 Hospital name
Display the hospital name. Hospital name can be set via "[Setup] → [System] → [Region]".
 Patient Information
Displays patient name, ID, gender, GA and age(DOB) etc. Enter the patient information
through the "Patient Info" screen. Or, import the saved patient data from DICOM/HL7
Worklist server. See “4.1 Patient Information” chapter for details.

System Preparation 3-15

  Exam Mode
Displays the currently used exam type, e.g. Abdomen.
 Probe Model
Display the currently-used probe model, or the default model.
 Probe parameter area
Displays the acoustic power. Including the acoustic power, MI (Mechanical Index) and TI
(Thermal Index). For how to set, see “MI/TI Display.”
 Exam time
Displays the exam time, including date and time. Exam time can be set via
"[Setup]→[Region]". Exam time will be frozen with the frozen image.
 Operator
Displays the operator’s name on the screen. This information is entered through the
“Patient Info” screen.
 Menu area
Includes the image menu, measurement menu, comment menu, body mark menu, and so on.
 Image area
The image area displays the ultrasound images, ECG waveforms, probe mark (or activating
window mark “M”), coordinate axis (including depth, time, velocity/frequency) and focal position
(located on the depth axis in the form of ). Annotations, body marks, measurement calipers,
color bar/grayscale bar are also displayed here.
 Image parameter area
Displays the image parameters for the active window. If there are more than one imaging
modes, the parameters are displayed by each mode.
 Clip board/Thumbnails
Displays the thumbnail images stored under the current patient.
 ECG
 ECG icon
Displays the ECG icon, which consists of a heart icon and heart rate, e.g.,
 ECG curve
ECG Display
Tip: The amplitude and position of ECG waveform can be changed.
 Help information area
The help information area displays various help information items or the progress bar in the
current status.
Tip: In terms of help information, “TB” refers to “Trackball”.
 Grayscale/color bar
Displays the grayscale/color bar corresponding to the current mode.
 Soft Menu area
The monitor's soft menu area displays the items that simultaneously appear at the bottom of
the touch screen.

3-16 System Preparation

 System status icon
This area displays the relevant system icons, such as USB memory device, printer, network,
Chinese/English entry, and current system time, etc.
 User-defined key and gesture function display region
This area displays the function defined for those user-defined keys and gestures. For details
about user-defined key, see “12.1.6 Key Configuration”.
 Trackball hint area
This area displays current function of trackball.
 Other Operations
The positions of areas illustrated here are not fixed. They can be moved within a certain area
on the monitor using the trackball.
 Results window
 Comments area
 Body marks area

3.8.2 Basic Operations of the Dialog Box

A dialog box screen consists of a title, page tabs, contents and buttons, as shown in the figure
below:
Title bar

Contents

Page tab

Contents

Functional
buttons

Composition Description
The title bar is used to give a description of the content and function of the
Title Bar
screen.
For some screens, the contents are distributed across several pages. Use the
Page Tab
<Set> key to open/close the available pages.
 Radio box: click to select the item.
 Check box: click to check or uncheck the item.
Contents
 Entry box: enter characters manually using the keyboard.
 Drop-down list box: click ▼ to show the list and select an item.

System Preparation 3-17

 Composition Description
Functional When a screen's operation is complete, click the [OK] or [Cancel] button to save
buttons or cancel the operation, and close the screen.
 To reposition a dialog box which is not a full-screen dialogue box:
1. Roll the trackball to move the cursor over the title bar of the dialog box. The cursor becomes a
. Press the <Set> key.
2. Roll the trackball and position the rectangular graphic in the new desired location.
3. Release the <Set> key, and the dialog box is moved to the desired position.

3.8.3 Menu Operation

Use the trackball to use the menu.
Menus of different modes display in real time in the top-left corner of the screen.

Menu title

Menu item
Extend button

Submenu item

For details of measurement menu operations, see the [Advanced Volume].

 Operate the menu using the trackball and left/right <Set> key.
1. Press <Cursor> to show the cursor.
2. Roll the trackball to position the cursor on the item to be adjusted.
 For a commanding item or command optional item: press <Set> to activate the item.
 For a parameter item or ON/OFF item: press <Set> to activate the item (the item turns
green when active), then press <Set> to switch between the available values.
 For a parameter optional item: press <Set> to extend the available parameters and
position the cursor on the list. Roll the trackball to position the cursor on the item to be
adjusted, then press <Set> to set the value.

3-18 System Preparation

3.8.4 Touch Screen Operation
 Mapping mode

2 3

Operating
Operations
region
1 Swipe from this area to bottom to enter the mapping mode.
2 Under mapping mode, swipe from this area to right to display the
mapping menu.
Under mapping mode, this area displays mapping menu, soft menu and
tool bar, where you can adjust image parameters, perform measurement,
image sending and review. See “5.1.2 Image Adjustment” for details.
3 Under mapping/non-mapping mode, you can do fast operation using two-
finger gesture according to the gesture hints on the bottom-right of
the screen.
4 Under mapping mode, swipe from this area to the top to exit mapping
mode.
 Enter mapping mode
Swipe the touch screen from top (region 1) to bottom to enter the mapping mode. The system
maps the image of the monitor onto the touch screen. See the figure below.
Tips: if a dialogue box is displayed on the screen, mapping mode is not available.

 Menu Operations
Swipe the touch screen from left (region 2) to right to show the mapping menu. See the
figure below.

System Preparation 3-19

 For detailed operations, see Chapter “5.1.2 Image Adjustment”.
Touch or flip the menu to the left/right to adjust the image parameters; touch the
measurement menu to select measurement tools and start measurement.
Click any blank area on the touch screen to hide the mapping menu.

See “5.1.2 Image Adjustment” for menu operation.

 Soft Menu Operations
Under mapping mode, rotate the knobs beneath the touch screen to show the soft menu.
Rotate the knob to complete the adjustment.
 Two-finger gesture
For details about two-finger gesture function setting, see “12.1.6 Key Configuration”
chapter.
Swipe the touch screen (region 3) with two fingers by the hint in user-defined key function
display region on the bottom-right of the screen. (See “3.8.1 Screen Display” chapter for
details)

 Operations on Tool Bar

 Under mapping mode, touch the real-time image on the touch screen (region 3), a
toolbar will display on the top of the touch screen, touch to enter review status.

3-20 System Preparation

  Under mapping mode, open the saved image on the main screen, and touch the
saved image on the touch screen (region 3), a toolbar will display on the top of the
touch screen, you can perform review, send to, delete operations.

Icon Description
Enter review status, see “10.2.10.1 Review an Image”
for details.
View last image.
Send image file, see “10.2.12 Sending Image Files” for
details.
View next image.

Delete the current image.

 Exit mapping mode
Swipe the touch screen from bottom to top to exit the mapping mode.

 Non-mapping mode of touch screen

The layout of the touch screen varies with the applications or modes. Swipe the touch screen
to go to another interface. Learn the interface display and operations by referring to related
chapters.
Controls on the touch screen:
Tap and hold the screen to enter control editing stage.
Tips: you cannot enter the stage from cine review mode or when there is a dialogue box on
the screen. This stage cannot switch to mapping mode.
Function Operations
Adding a
control Tap to select a button to add and tap [Confirm].

Add a user- In comment and body mark editing status, tap and then tap
defined control [Custom] to bring out the dialogue box for adding user-defined
controls. Enter the control name and tap [Confirm].
Delete a control Tap of the target control and tap [Confirm] to delete.
Change the
Tap and drag the control to the desired position.
control position

System Preparation 3-21

 3.8.5 Soft Keyboard
Under report, setup, comment adding and iStation screen, the soft keyboard icon is
displayed on the touch screen. Touch the icon to enter the soft keyboard typing screen.
Or, under patient info screen, you can see the soft keyboard typing screen on the touch screen
directly.

3-22 System Preparation

4 Exam Preparation
A patient exam can be started as per the following situations:
 New patient information: to start a new patient exam, patient information must first be entered.
 New exam: to start a new exam for patient who is already registered, the recorded information
can be obtained through either iStation or Worklist.
 Activate exam: to select an exam that has been completed within 24 hours, continue the exam
with imported patient information and exam data.
 Continue an exam: to select an exam that has been paused within 24 hours, continue the
exam with imported patient information and exam data.
General procedure for an exam:
Enter the patient information → select an exam mode and probe → Choose an imaging mode →
Start the exam.
 The system supports image scanning and measurement without patient information.

4.1 Patient Information

To start a new patient exam, it is best to enter detailed patient information. The system will set up a
unique information database for each patient based on the patient information entered, so that the
information of one patient will not be confused with that of another patient.
Before examining a new patient, press the <End Exam> key to end
CAUTION: the exam of the previous patient. Update the patient ID and
information to avoid mixing data between patients.
 To enter the Patient Info screen
Press <Patient>.
 To exit the Patient Info screen
 Click [OK] on the Patient Info screen, press <Patient> on the control panel.
 Click [Cancel] on the Patient Info screen and touch [Cancel] on the touch screen. Or press
<Esc> on the control panel to exit the screen without saving any of the entered patient
data.
 Press <B> or <Freeze> to return to the current exam mode and save the entered
information.
 Click [Quick Register] on the screen to quickly save the patient information and return to the
main screen.

Exam Preparation 4-1

 4.1.1 New Patient Information
The Patient Info screen is shown as follows:

2
3

Place the cursor over the desired box. The field box is highlighted and a flashing cursor appears.
Information can be entered or selected from the options.
You can also change the cursor's position using <Tab>, <Enter> or the up/down controls.
Information includes:
1. General information
 Patient ID
The Patient ID is generated automatically by the system after starting a new patient, and can be
modified manually. “\”, “*” or “?” is not permitted.
The ID can also be obtained using the bar code reader.
 Name
Enter the patient's name using the keyboard.
 Gender
Select Male, Female or Unknown for patient gender from the drop-down list.
 DOB (date of birth):
You can either enter the patient's date of birth manually,

Or click to select the date, and click [OK] to finish.

 Age
 Auto-generated age: once the DOB is obtained, the system displays an auto-
generated age in the field box. The unit can be “Years”, “Months” or “Days.” If the age is
less than one year, the system will automatically calculate the age in months or days.
 You can also enter the age manually.
NOTE: When you enter dates manually, enter them in same the format as that of the system.

4-2 Exam Preparation

2. Exam Type
 Exam application type
You can select from: ABD (Abdomen), OB (Obstetrics), GYN (Gynecology), CARD (Cardiac),
VAS (Vascular), URO (Urology), SMP (Small Part), PED (Pediatrics) and BREAST (Breast).
Select the exam type tab to enter exam-specific information.
 General information:
Study description: To enter a description for each exam.
Primary indications: To enter the primary indications (reason for performing the exam.)
Secondary indications: To enter the secondary indications.
CPT4 code: To enter the CPT4 code.
CPT4 description: To enter the CPT4 description.
Remarks: Exam-specific explanation or remarks.
 Exam-specific information:
Exam Type Information Description
Height /
Weight /
After the height and weight are entered, the system will
BSA (body surface
automatically calculate the BSA based on the formula
ABD area)
which is set via “[Setup] → [System] → [General].”
(Abdomen)
After the height and weight are input, the system will
BMI
automatically calculate the Body Mass Index.
Fasting /
ALT Alanine transaminase.
Height /
Weight /
Calculate the gestation age (GA) and estimated delivery
date (EDD) based on the last menstrual period (LMP), date
of conception (DOC), in vitro fertilization (IVF), basic body
temperature (BBT) and previous exam date (PRV). Select
LMP, DOC, IVF, PRV, BBT, or EDD from the drop-down list,
or calculate the GA and LMP according to the EDD and
entered date.
 LMP: after you enter the LMP, the system will
OB calculate the GA and EDD.
(Obstetrics) Calculation index  DOC: after you enter the DOC, the system will
calculate the GA and EDD.
 IVF: after you enter IVF, the system will calculate
the GA and EDD.
 PRV: enter the date and GA of the last exam, the
system will calculate a new GA and EDD.
 BBT: enter the BBT, the system will calculate the
GA and EDD.
 EDD: after you enter the EDD, the system will
calculate and display the GA and LMP.
Gravida Times of pregnancy.

Exam Preparation 4-3

 Exam Type Information Description
Ectopic Times of abnormal pregnancy, e.g., extrauterine pregnancy
Gestations Number of embryos (1, 2, 3, 4)
Para Times of delivery.
Abort Times of abortion.
Height /
Weight /
LMP Last menstrual period.
Gravida Times of pregnancy.
GYN Para Times of delivery.
(Gynecology)
Times of abnormal pregnancy, e.g., extrauterine
Ectopic
pregnancy.
Abort Times of abortion.
Female hormone basic level and drugs inducing the
IVF Info
ovulation.
Height /
Weight /
After the height and weight are entered, the system will
BSA (body surface
CARD automatically calculate the BSA based on the formula
area)
(Cardiology) which is set via “[Setup] → [System] → [General].”
BP Blood pressure.
HR /
RA Press. Right Atrium Pressure.
Height /
Weight /
VAS BP(L) (blood
(Vascular) Input left blood pressure.
pressure)
BP(R) (blood
Input right blood pressure.
pressure)
Height /

URO Weight /
(Urology) Serum PSA /
PPSA Coefficient: /

SMP (Small Height /

Parts) Weight /

PED Height /
(Pediatrics) Weight /
Height /
Breast
Weight /

4-4 Exam Preparation

3. Operating Information
Accession #: refers to the exam number used in DICOM.
Diagnostician: person responsible for the exam.
Operator: person responsible for image collection and scanning.
Ref. Physician: person who requires the operator to carry out the ultrasound.
Tip: If the name has been entered before, it is memorized by the system and can be selected
from the drop-down list.
4. Functional keys
 [Pause Exam]: pauses the current exam due to particular circumstances or system power
off.
 [Cancel Exam]: cancels the current exam.
NOTE: A canceled exam cannot be restored.

 [New Patient]: clears the current patient information in the patient information screen so
new patient information can be entered.
 [New Exam]: clears the current exam information so a new exam can be created for the
current patient.
 [OK]: saves the patient data entered and exits the screen.
 [Cancel]: cancels the patient data entered and exits the screen.

4.1.2 Retrieve Patient Information

4.1.2.1 iStation
The patient data can be obtained in iStation from the system hardware or USB memory device.
You can enter search conditions for the patient.
1. To enter the iStation screen (the screen is shown below):
 Press <iStation> on the keyboard, or
 Click [iStation] in the Patient Info screen, or
 Click [iStation] in the Review screen.

Exam Preparation 4-5

 2. Select the data source
Select the data source from the “Data Source” drop-down list.
3. Enter the search condition:
 Item: including Name, ID, DOB and Exam Date. Then enter a keyword in accordance with
the Item selected.
 Select “Find in results.” The system will search on the keyword in the existing searched
results.
4. Select the desired patient information in the list, and the system brings up the following menu:

Button Function Description

Review an
Click to enter the review screen.
Image
Patient
Click to enter the patient info screen.
Information

4-6 Exam Preparation

 Button Function Description

Review Report Click to enter diagnostic report screen.

Delete Exam Click to delete the selected record.

Backup Exam Click to back up the selected patient record to supported media.

Restore Exam Click to import the patient data from an external media.

Click to send the selected patient data to an external device,

Send Exams
MedTouch/MedSight devices, DICOM storage server or printer.
Activate
Click to continue an exam that has been completed within 24 hours.
Exams
Resume
Click to continue an exam that has been paused within 24 hours.
Exams
Other buttons:
 [New Exam]: click to enter the Patient Info screen. The corresponding patient information
is also imported to the new exam simultaneously. After editing the patient information in
the Patient Info screen, select [OK] to start a new exam.
 [Select All Exams]: click to select all records.
 [Exit]: click to exit iStation.

4.1.2.2 Worklist
Worklist is an option. To use Worklist function, you have to configure DICOM Basic and DICOM
Worklist options.
When the DICOM basic package is configured and the Worklist server has been set, click [Worklist]
in the Patient Info screen to query or import the patient data. (For details about the Worklist server
setting, see the DICOM chapter.)
Worklist can retrieve patient data of two kinds of protocols: DICOM and HL7.
Basic operation:
(1) Press the <Patient> key to open the Patient Info screen.
(2) Click [Worklist] to enter the Worklist page.

Exam Preparation 4-7

 (3) Select the data source: after select the service type, select the worklist server from the
corresponding server (DICOM and HL7 server).
(4) Enter the search condition:
a) Input the searching condition:
Select “DICOM server”. You can search via patient ID, accession #, key words, AE title,
worklist server or exam date.
Select HL7 server. Search via patient ID, patient name.
b) Click [Query]. The scheduled patients, which meet the criteria, are displayed in the lower
part of the screen.
 After the first query, you can perform the second query based on the preview results. The
scheduled patients in the list will update in real time.
 Enter patient ID, patient name, accession # and exam date, the system affords the result
in real-time.
 Or select the keyword type, enter the keywords and then click [Query] to search.
 To reset the criteria, click [Clear] button.
(5) Select the desired patient record in the displayed patient list:
a) Select the desired patient and click [Start Exam]. The patient information is imported into
the system and then an exam is started.
b) Click [Transfer] and the patient information is imported into the [Patient Info] screen. After
editing the patient information in the Patient Info screen, select [OK] to start a new exam.
c) Click [Show Detail] to see details of patient data.
(6) Click [Exit] to exit the Worklist.

4-8 Exam Preparation

4.2 Select Exam Mode and Probe
If the exam mode is changed during a measurement, all measurement
CAUTION: calipers on the image will be cleared. The general measurement data will
be lost, but application measurement data will be stored in the reports.
 Selecting exam mode
1. Connect suitable probes to the system and press <Probe> on the control panel. The touch
screen displays the following dialog box:

2. Touch the screen to select the probe type and exam mode. The system exits the dialog box and
enters the selected exam mode and probe.
Click [Exit] or press <Probe> again to cancel the selection and exit the screen.

4.2.1 Dual-probe Switch

A user-defined key for dual-probe switch can be defined in preset, by which you can fast switch the
probe under B/ Color/ Power mode.
This function applies only to probes with the same exam modes.
1. Scan to obtain the image by current probe.
2. Press the user-defined key. The available probes appear on the screen.
3. Choose the probes to be compared. The system enters dual-probe mode. The image from
previous probe is frozen.
4. Scan and obtain the required image from the current probe.
5. Press the user-defined key to switch the images of two probes.
The path for setting the keys: <F10 Setup>→[System]→[Key Settings].
1. Select the key to be defined from [Key] tab on the left side. Or, select a key from [Footswitch]
tab.
2. Select [Image Mode]→[Dual-Probe].
3. Click [OK] to confirm the setting or exit. The setting comes into effect then.

Exam Preparation 4-9

 4.2.2 Bi-plane Probe Switch
For the 6LB7E probe, after selecting the exam mode, enter B mode, and tap [C] or [L] on the touch
screen to select the convex plane or linear plane.

4.3 Select the Imaging Mode

For detailed operations in each imaging mode, see chapter “5 Image Optimization”.

4-10 Exam Preparation

 4.4 Activate & Continue an Exam
4.4.1 Activate an Exam
On the iStation screen, select an exam record which was completed within 24 hours and click
[Activate Exam] from the menu which appears. Or click [Active Exam] on the iStation or Review
screen to activate the exam.
Tip:
 The system can automatically load the patient information and exam data to continue the
exam.
 If you want to continue an exam with data in an external memory database, first allow the
system to load the patient data to the system’s patient database.
 For an activated exam, you can modify the patient ID if this patient has only one exam
recorded in the system.

4.4.2 Continue an Exam

On the iStation screen, select an exam record which was paused within 24 hours, and click
[Resume Exam] from the menu which appears to continue the exam.
If you want to select patient data in an external memory database, first allow the system to load the
patient data to the system’s patient database.
For an activated exam, you can modify the patient ID if this patient has only one exam recorded in
the system.

4.5 Pause & End an Exam

4.5.1 Pause an Exam
 Sometimes it is necessary to stop an uncompleted exam due to particular circumstances.
When the exam is paused, the system can begin other exams.
1. Press <Patient> to enter the Patient Info screen.
2. Click [Pause Exam].
 If the system is powered off during scanning, the exam status turns to “paused” after the
system restarts.
When an exam is paused, the system will:
1. Save the exam-related images, reports and measurement data, and modify the status as
“Paused.”
2. Save the exam information, including imaging mode, exam mode, image parameters, operation
mode, and so on.

4.5.2 End an Exam

Before examining a new patient, press <End Exam> to end the exam of the previous patient.
Update the patient ID and information to avoid mixing data between patients.
To end an exam, do one of the following:
 Press <End Exam> on the control panel.
 Click [New Patient] on the Patient Info screen to end the last patient exam.
 Click [New Exam] on the Patient Info screen (or iStation or Review screen) to end the last
exam.

Exam Preparation 4-11

5 Image Optimization

WARNING: The images displayed in this system are for

reference only. Mindray is not responsible for the
correctness of diagnostic results.
In Dual-B imaging mode, the measurement results
of the merged image may be inaccurate. Therefore,
the results are provided for reference only, not for
confirming diagnoses.

5.1 Imaging Mode

5.1.1 Switching Between Imaging Modes
Switch between imaging modes according to the actual situation. See “2.10 Control Panel” for
details.

5.1.2 Image Adjustment

 Adjust using the image menu:
For details about menu adjustment, see chapter “3.8.3 Menu Operation.”
 Adjust using the touch screen (non-mapping mode)

4 3 5

Image Optimization 5-1

 1. Mode display area (or main functional tabs): displays the current modes. Touch the tab to
enter the mode.
2. Other application mode access: displays the available related application modes. Touch to
enter the modes.
3. Parameter adjusting area: displays the parameters in the current imaging mode or function.
 Parameter magnitude setting: touch or to increase/decrease the value.
 ON/OFF setting: some of the parameters can only be set to ON or OFF. ON activates the
function, and when the function is activated the key is highlighted in green.
 Page selection: if there is more than 1 page for the current mode, touch

to turn the pages.

 Functional item: touch to go to the corresponding function.
4. Probes that can be switched to: select an appropriate probe for quick switch.
5. Recently used exam modes: select an appropriate exam mode for quick switch.
6. Knob-adjusting area: displays the knob-controlled parameters.
There are five knobs at the bottom of the touch screen. Their functions vary depending on the
current menu. Press or rotate the knobs to adjust the corresponding parameters.

 Adjust using the touch screen (mapping mode)

1. Enter the mapping mode to see the following mapping menu. See “3.8.4 Touch Screen
Operation” for details.

Expanding button Sub-menu

Menu title

Special mode
entrance

Menu item

2. Touch the item on the touch screen to operate:

a) Menu title: displays current imaging mode. Touch the expanding button to show all available
imaging modes under the current status, Touch to enter the modes.
b) Current available special mode entrance: displays the available imaging modes related, touch
to enter the modes. For example: iWorks, Physio.

5-2 Image Optimization

c) Parameter adjusting area: displays the parameters in the current imaging mode or function.
 Value adjustment: touch the parameter to adjust the value. To increase the value by
flipping from left to right and decrease the value by flipping from right to left.
 ON/OFF setting: some of the parameters only can be set at ON or OFF, ON is to activate
the function, and when the function is activated, the menu item is highlighted in green.
 Functional item: touch to go to the corresponding function.
 Scroll bar item: when a scroll bar displays on the right of the menu, touch the item and
swipe it up or down to show all menu items.
 Control Panel
Adjust using the trackball, control panel key, deflector rod, knob or slider.

5.1.3 Quickly Saving Image Settings

Press <F7> to access the image data saving dialog box.

 Save the image parameter adjustment:

Click [Save] to save the current image values for the current exam mode of the particular
probe.
 Create new exam data (using the current image parameter settings):
Enter the name in the box after “Save As” to assign a name for a user-defined exam mode,
and click [Create] to save the current image parameters, measurements, comments and body
mark settings to the exam mode.
 Restore the factory settings:
The settings of the current exam mode and the probe can be restored to factory data by
clicking [Restore].
 Check image parameter level and other settings:
 Click [Show Parameter] to check levels of different image parameters.
 Select “Advanced” tab to set TIC/TIB/TIS parameter.
 Select “Advanced” and set “Sampling Line Displaying” to “On”, then PW/M/TVM mode can
be entered by pressing the imaging mode key only one time.
 Select “Advanced” tab, set “Monitor CCT” to adjust color temperature, set “Monitor
Gamma” to adjust brightness.
This function is not available under dual-probe frozen mode.

Image Optimization 5-3

 5.2 B Mode Image Optimization
B mode is the basic imaging mode that displays real-time images of anatomical tissues and organs.

5.2.1 Basic Procedures for B Mode Imaging

1. Enter the patient information. Select an appropriate probe and exam mode.
2. Press <B> on the control panel to enter B mode.
3. Adjust the parameters to optimize the image.
4. Perform other operations (e.g., measurement and calculation) if necessary.
 Press <B> on the control panel to return to B mode at any time.

5.2.2 B Mode Parameters

In B mode scanning, the image parameter area in the top-right corner of the screen displays the
real-time parameter values as follows:
Echo
Parameter F D G FR DR iClear iBeam iTouch Zoom
Boost
Frame Dynamic
Meaning Frequency Depth Gain Display when the function is turned on.
Rate Range

5.2.3 B Mode Image Optimization

Image Quality
Description To switch between the fundamental frequency and harmonic frequency, and select
the corresponding frequency type. The real-time frequency value is displayed in
the image parameter area in the top-right corner of the screen, and if harmonic
frequency is used “F H” is displayed as the harmonic frequency value.
Rotate the knob under [Img Qual.] on the touch screen to select the different
fundamental/harmonic frequency values.
Press the knob to switch between fundamental frequency and harmonic
frequency.
The adjusting range of the fundamental frequency values can be divided into 4
levels: penetration preferred (HPen), general mode (HGen), resolution preferred
(HRes), and the mode between penetration preferred and general mode (HPen-
Gen).
The adjusting range of harmonic frequency values can be divided into 3 levels:
penetration preferred (Pen), general mode (Gen), and resolution preferred (Res).
Impacts The system provides an imaging mode using harmonics of echoes to optimize the
image. Harmonic imaging enhances near-field resolution and reduces low-
frequency and large amplitude noise, so as to improve small parts imaging.
Select the frequency according to the detection depth and current tissue features.

Gain
Description To adjust the gain of the whole receiving information in B mode. The real-time gain
value is displayed in the image parameter area in the top-right corner of the
screen.
Operations Rotate the <B> knob clockwise to increase the gain, and counter-clockwise to
decrease it.

5-4 Image Optimization

Effects Increasing the gain will brighten the image and you will see more received signals.
However, noise may also be increased.

Depth
Description This function is used to adjust the sampling depth, the real-time value of which is
displayed in the image parameter area in the top-right corner of the screen.
Operations Use the <Depth> deflector rod in the bottom-right part of the control panel to
adjust the depth.
The adjustable depth values vary depending on the probe types.
Effects Increase the depth to see tissue in deeper locations, or decrease the depth to see
tissue in shallower locations.

TGC
Description The system compensates the signals from deeper tissue by segments to optimize
the image.
There are 8-segment TGC sliders on the control panel corresponding to the areas
of the image.
Operations To increase the gain compensation in an area of interest, move the TGC slider to
the right.
To decrease the gain compensation in the corresponding area of interest, move
the TGC slider to the left.
About 1.5 seconds after the adjustment is complete, the TGC curve disappears.
Effects Adjust the signal gain for a particular image area to achieve a balanced image.

Acoustic Power
Description Refers to the power of ultrasonic waves transmitted by the probe, the real-time
value of which is displayed in the upper part of the screen.
Operations Adjust the acoustic power through the [A.Power] item on the touch screen.
Effects Generally, increasing the acoustic power will increase the brightness and contrast
of the image and the force of penetration.
Impacts You should perform exams according to actual situations and follow the ALARA
Principle.

Focus
Description Refers to adjusting the focus of the ultrasonic beams, using the “ ” symbols which
are displayed to the right of the image.
Operations Adjust the focus number using the [Focus Number] item on the touch screen or by
the mapping-menu on the touch screen.
Use the <Focus> deflector rod in the bottom-right part of the control panel to
adjust the focus position.
Effects The area that is focused will be of a higher contrast and resolution.
Impacts The greater the number of focal zones, the slower the frame rate.

Image Optimization 5-5

 Imaging Adjustment
Description More information can be obtained without moving the probe or changing the
sampling position.
FOV (Field 1. To change the scan range, touch [FOV] on the touch screen to enter the FOV
of View) range and FOV position adjustment status.
2. Press <Set> to switch between FOV range and FOV position.
3. Rotate the trackball to adjust the FOV position or the FOV range.
When the scan range is adjusted to its widest, the FOV position cannot be
changed.
Or you can adjust the focus by the mapping-menu on the touch screen.
You can get a much larger field of view when selecting a larger FOV.
The frame rate decreases when using a larger FOV.
B Steer Use the <Angle/Steer> deflector rod on the control panel to adjust the steer angle.
ExFOV Touch [ExFOV] or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen to turn the function
(Extended on/off.
FOV) For linear probes, the ExFOV function displays as trapezoid imaging.
For convex probes, the ExFOV function displays as extending the scanning angle.
Impacts The FOV position/range is available only for convex and phase probes.
The ExFOV function is available only for linear and convex probes.
The B Steer function is available only for linear probes.

Line Density
Description The function determines the quality and information of the image.
Operations Adjust the line density using the [Line Density] item or the mapping-menu item on
the touch screen.
There are four levels of line density available: UH, M, H, L.
Effects The higher the line density, the higher the resolution.
Impacts The higher the line density, the lower the frame rate.

Dynamic Range
Description This function is used to adjust the B image resolution to compress or expand the
gray display range. The real-time value displays in the image parameter area in
the top-right corner of the screen.
Operations Adjust the dynamic range through the [Dyn Ra.] item or mapping-menu on the
touch screen.
Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the value. Rotate the knob
counterclockwise to decrease the value.
Impacts The more the dynamic range, the more specific the information and the lower the
contrast with more noise.

5-6 Image Optimization

iClear
Description The function is used to enhance the image profile so as to distinguish the image
boundary for optimization.
Operations Adjust using the [iClear] item or mapping-menu on the touch screen.
Off represents no iClear effect, and the bigger the value, the stronger the effect.

Persistence
Description This function is used to superimpose and average adjacent B images, so as to
optimize the image and remove noise.
Operations Rotate the knob under the [Persistence] item or the mapping-menu item on the
touch screen to adjust the value.
The bigger the value the stronger the effect.
Effects Persistence can remove image noise to make details clearer.
Impacts Increasing Persistence may lead to missing signals.

Rotation/Invert (U/D Flip and L/R Flip)

Description The function provides better observation for image display.
Rotation Rotate the image using the [Rotation] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch
screen.
Images can be rotated by 0°, 90°, 180° and 270°.
When the image is rotated by 90° or 270°, the depth scale is displayed in the top
part of the screen.
Invert (U/D To invert the image horizontally or vertically.
Flip and L/R Touch [U/D Flip] or [L/R Flip] on the touch screen or the mapping-menu to invert
Flip) the image
Effects You can identify the image orientation using the “M” mark on the screen. By
default, the M mark is located in the top-left corner of the imaging area.

iBeam (Spatial Compound Imaging)

Description This function is used to superimpose and average images of different steer angles
to achieve image optimization.
Operations Adjust using the [iBeam] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen.
The system provides different levels of iBeam adjustment in single B mode. Off
represents no iBeam.
Effects Images can be optimized with less spot noise and higher resolution, so that more
details for the structure are revealed.
Impacts iBeam is not valid for phased probes.

Image Merge
Description In the Dual-split mode, when the images of the two windows have the same probe
type, depth, invert status, rotation status and magnification factor, the system will
merge the two images so as to extend the field of vision.

Image Optimization 5-7

 Operations Turn the function on or off using the [Auto Merge] item or the mapping-menu item
on the touch screen.
Impacts The function is valid only for linear probes.

Gray Map
Description This function applies the gray correction to obtain optimum images.
Operations Select from among the maps by rotating the knob under the [Gray Map] item or the
mapping-menu item on the touch screen.

Tint Map
Description This function provides an imaging process based on color difference rather than
gray distinction.
Operations Rotate the knob under the [Tint Map] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch
screen to select the map.

TSI (Tissue Specific Imaging)

Description The TSI function is used to optimize the image by selecting acoustic speed
according to tissue characteristics.
Operations Select from among the TSI modes using the [TSI] item or the mapping-menu item
on the touch screen.
The system provides four ways of optimizing for specific tissues: general, muscle,
fluid and fat.

iTouch (Auto Image Optimization)

Description To optimize image parameters as per the current tissue characteristics for a better
image effect.
Operations Press <iTouch> on the control panel to turn the function on.
The iTouch symbol will be displayed in the image parameter area of the screen
once <iTouch> is pressed.
Select different levels of iTouch effect using [iTouch] on the touch screen or the
mapping-menu.
Long press the <iTouch> key to exit the function.

H Scale
Description Display or hide the width scale (horizontal scale).
The scale of the horizontal scale is the same as that of the vertical scale (depth).
They change together in zoom mode, or when the number of the image window
changes. When the image is turned up/down, the H Scale will also be inverted.
Operations Touch [H Scale] or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen to display or hide
the scale.

5-8 Image Optimization

Dual Live
Description Display different image effects of one probe for better observation.
Operation Touch [Dual Live] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen to turn the
function on/off. Dual-split windows of the images are displayed on the main screen.
Two pages of adjustable parameters are displayed in the touch screen. Shared
parameters and left window parameters are displayed in the B(L) page, while right
window parameters are displayed in the B(R) page.
In the image parameter area in the top-right corner of the main screen, parameters
of both windows are displayed.
Impacts Image magnification is available in dual live mode.

LGC
Description Adjust the gain of scan lines to increase the image lateral resolution.
Operation Touch [LGC] or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen to access the adjusting
dialog box.
The 8 rods displayed on the touch screen indicate the corresponding image areas
on the main screen.

Touch the to adjust the gain, move downwards to decrease the gain, or move
upwards to increase the gain.
The system also provides several preset parameters for imaging.

Echo Boost
Description This function can improve contrast and decrease noise, so that a much clearer
boundary can be seen.
Operation Touch [Echo Boost] on the touch screen or the mapping-menu item to turn the
function on (when the function is turned on, the [Echo Boost] button is highlighted in
green and the system indicates “Echo Boost” in the image parameter area).
Impacts This function is only available using the phased probe in cardiac exam mode.

Dehaze
Description This function can restrain noise, so as to enhance the contrast resolution of the
image.
Operations Rotate the knob under the [Dehaze] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch
screen to adjust the value.

5.3 M Mode Image Optimization

5.3.1 Basic Procedures for M Mode Imaging
1. Select a high-quality image during B mode scanning, and adjust to position the area of interest
in the center of the B mode image.
2. Press <M> on the control panel, and roll the trackball to adjust the sampling line.
3. Press <M> on the control panel again or <Update> to enter M mode. You can then observe
the tissue motion along with the anatomical images of B mode. During the scanning process,
you can also adjust the sampling line accordingly when necessary.

Image Optimization 5-9

 4. Adjust the image parameters to obtain optimized images.
5. Perform other operations (e.g., measurement and calculation) if necessary.
If “Sampling Line Displaying” is selected, then the screen will display the sampling line all the time
and pressing <M> one will lead to entering M mode directly. See “5.1.3 Quickly Saving Image
Settings” chapter for details.

5.3.2 M Mode Image Parameters

 In M mode scanning, the image parameter area in the top-right corner of the screen displays
the real-time parameter values as follows:

Parameter F D G V DR
Meaning Frequency Depth M Gain M Speed M Dynamic Range

 During M mode imaging, menus for B mode and M mode are displayed on the touch screen at
the same time. You can switch between the 2 modes by clicking the mode tabs.
 During M mode scanning, the frequency, depth, focus position and acoustic power of the
probe are synchronous with that of B mode.
 Adjustment of the depth, focus position or TGC to the B mode image will lead to synchronous
changes in the M mode image.

5.3.3 M Mode Image Optimization

Gain
Description To adjust the gain of M mode image. The real-time gain value is displayed in the
image parameter area in the top-right corner of the screen.
Operations Rotate the <M> knob clockwise to increase the gain, and counter-clockwise to
decrease it.
Effects Increasing the gain will brighten the image and you will see more received signals.
However, noise may also be increased.

Display Format
Description To set the display format of M mode images and B mode images.
Operations Touch the different display format ratio buttons on the touch screen to adjust.
There are 5 formats available for image display: H2:3, V2:3, V3:2, V3:1, Full.
Effects Select different format types according to the actual situation and obtain a desired
analysis through comparison.

Speed
Description This function is used to set the scanning speed of M mode imaging, and the real-
time speed value is displayed in the image parameter area in the top-right corner
of the screen.

5-10 Image Optimization

Operations Rotate the knob under the [Speed] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch
screen to adjust.
There smaller the value the faster the speed.
Effects Changing speed makes it easier to identify disorders in cardiac cycles.

Tint Map
Description This function provides an imaging process based on color difference rather than
gray distinction.
Operations Rotate the knob under the [Tint Map] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch
screen to select the map.
Press the knob under the [Tint Map] item on the touch screen to turn the function
on/off.

Gray Map
Description This function applies the gray correction to obtain optimum images.
Operations To select from among the maps, turn the knob under [Gray Map] item or the
mapping-menu item on the touch screen.

Edge Enhance
Description This function is used to enhance the image profile so as to distinguish the image
boundary for optimization.
Operations Adjust using the [Edge Enhance] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch
screen.
The bigger the value, the stronger the effect.
Impacts Larger edge enhance may lead to increased noise.

Dynamic Range
Description This function is used to adjust the M image resolution to compress or expand the
gray display range.
The real-time dynamic range value is displayed in the image parameter area in the
top-right corner of the screen.
Operations Rotate the knob under the [Dyn Ra.] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch
screen.
Effects The more the dynamic range, the more specified the information.

M Soften
Description This feature is used to process the scan lines of M images to reject noise, making
image details clearer.
Operations Adjust using the [M Soften] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen.
The bigger the value the stronger the effect.

Image Optimization 5-11

 Time Mark
Description To show the time mark in M mode image.
Operation Turn on or off the function through [Time Mark] item in the menu in the upper left
corner of the screen.
Effects When time mark is displayed on the M mode image, it's much easier to identify the
cardiac cycles and detect more details.
Impacts The function is available in real-time imaging, freeze or cine review status.

5.4 Color Mode Image Optimization

The Color mode is used to detect color flow information, and the color is designed to judge the
direction and speed of blood flow.
Generally, the color above the color bar indicates the flow towards the probe, while the color below
the color bar indicates the flow away from the probe. The brighter the color, the faster the flow
speed, while the darker the color, the slower the flow speed.

5.4.1 Basic Procedures for Color Mode Imaging

1. Select a high-quality image during B mode scanning, and adjust to position the area of interest
in the center of the B mode image.
2. Press <Color> to enter B + Color mode. Roll the trackball to change the position and size of
the Region of Interest (ROI) and press the <Set> key to set.
3. Adjust the image parameters during scanning to obtain optimized images.
4. Perform other operations (e.g., measurement and calculation) if necessary.

5.4.2 Color Mode Image Parameters

 In Color mode scanning, the image parameter area in the top-right corner of the screen
displays the real-time parameter values as follows:

Parameter F G PRF WF
Meaning Frequency Color Gain Pulse Repetition Frequency (PRF) Color Wall Filter

 During Color mode imaging, the image optimizing menus for B mode and Color mode are
displayed on the touch screen at the same time. You can switch between the 2 modes by
clicking the mode tabs.
 In Color mode, the acoustic power is synchronous with that of B mode. Adjustment of the
depth to the B mode image will lead to corresponding changes in Color mode image.

5.4.3 Color Mode Image Optimization

Color Gain
Description Refers to the overall sensitivity to flow signals. This function is used to adjust the
gain in Color mode. The real-time gain value is displayed in the image parameter
area in the top-right corner of the screen.

5-12 Image Optimization

Operations Rotate the <Color> knob clockwise to increase the gain, and counter-clockwise to
decrease it.
Effects Increasing the gain will increase the flow signal presented and noise. The signals
may be missing when the gain is adjusted too low.

ROI Adjustment
Description This function adjusts the width and position of the ROI in Color mode.
Operations When the ROI box is a dotted line, roll the trackball to change the size.
When the ROI box is a solid line, roll the trackball to change the position.
Press <Set> to switch between the solid line and the dotted line.
Impacts The larger the ROI box, the lower the frame rate, and the lower the resolution and
color sensitivity.

Image Quality
Description Refers to the operating frequency of the probe in Color mode, the real-time value
of which is displayed in the image parameter area in the top-right corner of the
screen.
Operations Rotate the knob under [Img Qual.] on the touch screen or the mapping-menu item
to select the different frequency values.
The adjusting range of frequency values can be divided into 3 levels: penetration
preferred (Pen), general mode (Gen), and resolution preferred (Res).
Frequency values vary according to probe types. Select the frequency according
to the needs of the detection depth and the current tissue characteristics.

B/C Align
Description To set and restrict the maximum width of the B mode image to that of the Color
ROI.
Operations Turn the function on or off using the [B/C Align] item or the mapping-menu item on
the touch screen.
Impacts The frame rate increases when the function is turned on.

Dual Live
Description This function is used to display the B image and Color image synchronously.
Operations Turn the function on or off using the [Dual Live] item or the mapping-menu item on
the touch screen.
When the function is turned on, the window will automatically switch to dual
windows (one for the B image, and the other for the Color image).

Steer
Description The feature is used to adjust the ROI of the color flow of different angles with
immobility of the linear probe.

Image Optimization 5-13

 Operations Adjust using the <Angle/Steer> deflector rod on the control panel.
Effects This function is used to adjust the scan angle of linear probes, so as to change the
angle between the transmitting beam and flow direction.
Impacts Steer is only valid for linear probes.

Line Density
Description Line density determines the quality and information of the image.
Operations Adjust using the [Line Density] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch
screen.
4 levels of line density are provided: H, L, UH, M.
Effects The higher the line density, the higher the resolution.
Impacts The higher the line density, the lower the frame rate.

Packet Size
Description This function is an indication of the ability to detect flow, which is used to adjust the
accuracy of color flow.
Operations Rotate the knob under the [Packet Size] item or the mapping-menu item on the
touch screen to adjust the value.
0 represents no packet size control and the bigger the value the higher the
sensitivity.
Effects The higher the packet size, the more sensitive the indication for low-velocity flow.
Impacts Adjusting the packet size may lead to the frame rate changing.

Flow State
Description This function is used for fast image optimization.
Operations Adjust using the [Flow State] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen.
3 levels are provided: L, M, H.

Persistence
Description This function adjusts the temporal smoothing in Color mode to optimize the image.
Operations Adjust through the [Persistence] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch
screen.
0 represents no persistence, and the bigger the value the stronger the effect.

Smooth
Description This feature is used to reject noise and smooth the image.
Operations Adjust using the [Smooth] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen.
The system provides 6 levels of smooth function: the bigger the value the stronger
the effect.

5-14 Image Optimization

Scale
Description This function is used to adjust the speed range of the color flow, which is adjusted
using the PRF in the system. The real-time PRF value is displayed in the image
parameter area in the top-right corner of the screen.
Operations Rotate the knob under [Scale] on the touch screen or the mapping-menu item on
the touch screen.
The adjusting range varies according to the frequency, probe and depth. Adjust
according to the actual situation.
Effects Provides a much clearer color flow image.
Use a low PRF to observe low-velocity flows, and a high PRF to observe high-
velocity flows.
Impacts Aliasing may occur if a low-velocity scale is used and high velocities are
encountered.
Low velocities may not be identified when a high-velocity scale is used.

Baseline
Description Refers to the area where the velocity is zero in the scale. Adjust according to the
actual situation so as to get an optimum flow display.
Operations Rotate the knob under [Baseline] on the touch screen or the mapping-menu item
on the touch screen.
A positive value means increase the signals above the baseline, and a negative
value means increase the signals below the baseline.

Invert
Description To set the display mode of the color flow. The color scale will be inverted when the
function is turned on.
Operations Turn the function on or off using the [Invert] item or the mapping-menu item on the
touch screen.
Select “Auto Invert” in “[Setup] (F10) → [System] → [Image]”, so the color bar can
automatically invert when the color flow is steered to a certain angle to
accommodate the operator’s desire to distinguish the flow direction.
Auto invert function is available only for linear probes.

Color Map
Description This function is a combination of several image parameters, which indicates the
display effect of the color image.
Operations Rotate the knob under the [Color Map] item or the mapping-menu item on the
touch screen to select from among the maps.
The system provides 21 different maps for selection. The V group provides 11
ordinary maps and the VV group provides 10 2D maps.

Image Optimization 5-15

 WF (Wall Filter)
Description It filters out low-velocity signals to provide effective information, and this function is
used to adjust the filtered frequency. The real-time value is displayed in the image
parameter area in the top-right corner of the screen.
Operations Select using the [WF] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen.
Select the value according to the actual situation.
Impacts Flow signals may be missing.

Smart Track
Description To optimize image parameters as per the current tissue characteristics for a better
image effect. The angle and the position of the ROI are adjusted after the function is
enabled. The area is tracked without being affected by the dynamic moves.
Operation Tap [Smart Track] on the touch screen under Color/Power mode. The angle and the
position of the ROI are adjusted automatically. The vessels lay in the middle of the
ROI.

Priority
Description This function is used to set the levels of the flow display and to display the
grayscale signal or color signal.
Operations Rotate the knob under the [Priority] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch
screen to select the value.
The higher the value, color signals are first to be displayed. The lower the value,
grayscale signals are first to be displayed.

Velocity tag
Description This function is used to mark the specified velocity range in the flow to check the
flow function or specific flow velocity value.
Operation 1. Touch [Velocity Tag] or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen to enter
the velocity marking status. A green mark appears on the color bar.
2. Roll the trackball upwards and downwards to select the marking velocity.
3. Press <Set> to enter the tag range selection status, and roll the trackball
upwards and downwards to select the range.
Press <Set> to switch between marking position and marking range.

iTouch (Auto Image Optimization)

Description To optimize image parameters as per the current tissue characteristics for a better
image effect.
Operations Press <iTouch> on the control panel to turn the function on.

HR Flow (High Resolution Flow)

Description This function enhances the micro vessel imaging effect, and can be used to
analyze the tissue blood supply condition.

5-16 Image Optimization

Operations Touch [HR Flow] or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen to turn on HR
Flow status (the [HR Flow] button is highlighted in green when the status is turned
on.)
The parameters in HR Flow mode are independent from those in Color mode.

B Display
Description To turn on or off the B image display as Color imaging remains active.
Operation Turn on or off the function through the [B Display] item in the menu in the upper left
corner of the screen.
Impacts The function is available in real-time imaging, freeze or cine review status.

5.5 Power Mode Image Optimization

Power mode provides a non-directional display of the blood flow in terms of intensity as opposed
to flow velocity.
DirPower (Directional Power mode) provides additional information of the flow direction toward or
away from the probe.

5.5.1 Basic Procedures for Power Mode Imaging

1. Select a high-quality image during B mode or B + Color scanning, and adjust to position the
area of interest in the center of the image.
2. Press <Power> to enter B + Power mode. Roll the trackball to change the position of the
Region of Interest (ROI) and press the <Set> key to set. Roll the trackball to change the size
and position of the ROI.
3. Adjust the image parameters during B + Power mode scanning to obtain optimized images.
4. Perform other operations (e.g., measurement and calculation) if necessary.

5.5.2 Power Mode Image Parameters

 In Power mode scanning, the image parameter area in the top-right corner of the screen
displays the real-time parameter values as follows:
Parameter F G PRF WF
Meaning Frequency Power Gain Pulse Repetition Power Wall Filter
Frequency (PRF)
 During Power mode imaging, the image optimizing menus for B mode and Power mode are
displayed on the touch screen at the same time. You can switch between the 2 modes by
clicking the mode tabs.
 In Power mode, the acoustic power is synchronous with that of B mode. Adjustment of the
depth to the B mode image will lead to corresponding changes in Power mode image.
Parameters consistent with those in Color mode and B mode are not to be introduced. See the
relevant Color mode and B mode sections, while special items of the Power mode are introduced
in the following.

Image Optimization 5-17

 5.5.3 Power Mode Image Optimization
Power Gain
Description Refers to the overall sensitivity to flow signals. This function is used to adjust the
gain in Power mode.
The real-time gain value is displayed in the image parameter area in the top-right
corner of the screen.
Operations Rotate the <Color> knob clockwise to increase the gain, and counter-clockwise to
decrease it.
Effects Increasing the gain will increase the flow signal presented and noise. The signals
may be missing when the gain is adjusted too low.

Color Map
Description This feature indicates the display effect of the Power image.
The maps in the Power mode image are grouped into two categories: Power maps
and Directional Power maps.
Operations To select from among the maps, turn the knob under [Color Map] on the touch
screen or adjust through the mapping-menu item.
There are 8 kinds of maps provided: P0-3 belong to Power mode maps, while
dP0-3 belong to Directional Power mode maps.
The Power maps provide information about blood flow, which are highly sensitive
to the low-velocity flows.
The Directional Power maps provide information about flow direction.

Dynamic Range
Description This function adjusts the transformation of echo intensity into color signal.
Operations Adjust through the [Dyn Ra.] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen
to adjust the dynamic range.
Effects Increasing the dynamic range leads to higher sensitivity to low-power signals, thus
enhancing the range of signals to display.

5.6 PW/CW Doppler Mode

PW (Pulsed Wave Doppler) mode or CW (Continuous Wave Doppler) mode is used to provide
blood flow velocity and direction utilizing a real-time spectrum display. The horizontal axis
represents time, while the vertical axis represents Doppler frequency shift.
PW mode provides a function for examining flow at one specific site for its velocity, direction and
features. CW mode proves to be much more sensitive to high-velocity flow display. Thus, a
combination of both modes will contribute to a much more accurate analysis.
CW imaging is an option.
Adjustment items, such as SV, Steer, Duplex, Triplex, iTouch and HPRF, are not available in CW
mode.

5-18 Image Optimization

5.6.1 Basic Procedures for PW/CW Mode Exam
1. Select a high-quality image during B mode or B + Color (Power) mode scanning, and adjust to
position the area of interest in the center of the image.
2. Press <PW>/<CW> to adjust the sampling line,
 The sampling status will be displayed in the image parameter area in the top-right corner
of the screen as follows:

PW Sampling Line SV
Adjustment
Angle
SVD
CW Sampling Line Angle
Adjustment
CW Focus Depth
3. Set the position of the sample line by moving the trackball left and right. Set the SVD by
moving the trackball up and down. Adjust the angle and SV size according to the actual
situation.
4. Press <PW>/<CW> or <Update> again to enter PW/CW mode and perform the examination.
You can also adjust the SV size, angle and depth in real-time scanning.
5. Adjust the image parameters during PW/CW mode scanning to obtain optimized images.
6. Perform other operations (e.g., measurement and calculation) if necessary.
If “sampling line displaying” is selected, then the screen will display the sampling line all the time
and pressing <M> one will lead to entering M mode directly. For details, see “5.1.3 Quickly Saving
Image Settings” chapter.

5.6.2 PW/CW Mode Image Parameters

In PW/CW mode scanning, the image parameter area in the top-right corner of the screen displays
the real-time parameter values as follows:
PW Parameter F G PRF WF SVD SV Angle
Meaning Frequency Gain PRF Wall SV SV Size Angle
Filter Position
CW Parameter F G PRF WF SVD Angle
Meaning Frequency Gain PRF Wall Filter SV Position Angle
 During PW/CW mode imaging, the image optimizing menus for B mode and PW/CW mode are
displayed on the touch screen at the same time. If Color mode (Power mode) is also working,
menus for certain modes will be displayed on the touch screen synchronously, and you can
switch between them by clicking the mode tabs.
 When you adjust the depth of the B mode image, related changes will occur in the PW/CW
mode image as well.
 Most of the parameters are the same for the PW mode and CW modes, so parameters of both
are combined together to be introduced here.
Only phased and pencil probes support CW mode.

Image Optimization 5-19

 5.6.3 PW/CW Mode Image Optimization
Gain
Description This function is intended to adjust the gain of the spectrum map. The real-time
gain value is displayed in the image parameter area in the top-right corner of the
screen.
Operations Rotate the [PW] knob clockwise to increase the gain, and counter-clockwise to
decrease it.
Effects Increasing the gain will brighten the image and you will see more received signals.
However, noise may also be increased.

SV
Description To adjust the SV position and size of sampling in PW mode, the real-time value of
SV and SVD are displayed in the image parameter area in the top-right corner of
the screen.
SV size Rotate the knob under [SV] or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen to
adjust the SV size.
SVD Roll the trackball to select the SV depth.
Effects The smaller the SV size, the more accurate the result. More details are obtained
when selecting a large SV size.

CW Focus Position
Description To adjust the CW mode SVD. The real-time focus position value is displayed in the
image parameter area in the top-right corner of the screen.
Operation Roll the trackball to select the focus depth.

Image Quality
Description Refers to the operating frequency of the probe in PW mode, the real-time value of
which is displayed in the image parameter area in the top-left corner of the screen.
Operation Rotate the knob under [Img Qual.] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch
screen to select the different frequency values.
The adjusting range of frequency values can be divided into 3 levels: penetration
preferred (Pen), general mode (Gen), and resolution preferred (Res).
Select the frequency according to the detection depth and current tissue features.
Effects The higher the frequency, the better the resolution and sensitivity, and the worse
the force of penetration.

Scale
Description This function is used to adjust the speed range of the flow, which is adjusted using
the PRF in the system.
The real-time PRF value is displayed in the image parameter area in the top-right
corner of the screen.
Operations Rotate the knob under the [Scale] item on the touch screen or through the
mapping-menu item.

5-20 Image Optimization

Effects Provides a much clearer color flow image.
Use a low PRF to observe low-velocity flows, and a high PRF to observe high-
velocity flows.
Impacts Aliasing may occur if a low-velocity scale is used and high velocities are
encountered.
Low velocities may not be identified when a high-velocity scale is used.

iTouch
Description To optimize image parameters as per the current tissue characteristics for a better
image effect.
Operations Press <iTouch> on the control panel to turn the function on.

Auto-Calculation
Description This function is used to trace the spectrum and calculate the PW/CW mode image
parameters. The results are displayed in the results window.
1. Touch [Auto Calc] on the touch screen or the mapping-menu to turn the auto
calculation function on or off.
2. After the auto calculation function is turned on, touch “Auto Calculation” tab.
Auto Select parameters in the dialog box prompted by touching [Auto Calc Param] on
Calculation the Auto Calculation page.
Parameter
Auto To set the heart cycle number for auto-calculation.
Calculation Touch [Auto Calc Cycle] on the touch screen to select the cycle number.
Cycle
Trace Area To set the trace area of the Doppler wave in the spectrum map, applicable for auto
calculation, V Max and V Mean display.
To change the trace area, adjust through [Trace Area] item or the mapping-menu
item on the touch screen.
The available selections of trace area are: Above, Below, All.
Trace To set the smooth level when tracing.
Smooth
To change the trace area, adjust through [Trace Smooth] item or the mapping-
menu item on the touch screen.
The bigger the value, the higher the smooth processing.

Trace This function is used to set the sensitivity of tracing in the spectrum.
Sensitivity
To change the trace area, adjust through [Trace Sensitivity] item or the mapping-
menu item on the touch screen.
The bigger the value the higher the sensitivity.
Operations In real-time scanning, the results displayed are derived from the calculation of the
latest cardiac cycle.
In the freeze and cine status, the results displayed are calculated from the current
selected area.

Image Optimization 5-21

 Invert
Description This function is used to set how the spectrum is displayed.
Operations Turn the function on or off using the [Invert] item or the mapping-menu item on the
touch screen.
Select “Auto Invert” in the “[Setup] (F10) → [System] → [Image]”, so the spectrum
can automatically invert when the color flow is steered to a certain angle to
accommodate the operator’s desire to distinguish the flow direction.

Speed
Description This function is used to set the scanning speed of PW mode imaging.
Operations Adjust using the [Speed] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen.
There are 6 levels of scan speed available: the smaller the value the faster the
speed.
Effects Changing the speed makes it easier to identify the cardiac cycles and to detect
more details.

T/F Res.
Description This function is used to create a balance between time resolution and spatial
resolution.
Operations Adjust using the [T/F Res] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen.

Wall Filter
Description It filters out low-velocity signals to provide effective information, and this function is
used to adjust the filtered frequency. The real-time value is displayed in the image
parameter area in the top-right corner of the screen.
Operations Select using the [WF] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen.
Impacts Signals of low-velocity flow may be missing.

Tint Map
Description This function provides an imaging process based on color difference rather than
gray distinction.
Operations Adjust through the [Tint Map] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen
to select the map.

Gray Map
Description This function applies the gray correction to obtain optimum images.
Operations To select from among the maps, adjust through the [Gray Map] item on the touch
screen.

5-22 Image Optimization

Display Format
Description To set the display format of PW mode images with B mode images.
Operations Touch the different display format ratio buttons on the touch screen to adjust.
There are 5 formats for displaying the images: H2:3, V2:3, V3:2, V3:1, Full.

Duplex/Triplex
Description This function is used to set whether a B image (B + Color image) and PW image
are displayed synchronously.
Operations Touch [Duplex/Triplex] on the touch screen or on the mapping-menu to turn the
synchronization on or off.

Smart Track
Description To optimize image parameters as per the current tissue characteristics for a better
image effect.
Operation Tap [Smart Track] on the touch screen under Color/Power+PW mode. The angle
and the position of the PW sampling line, SV size, SV position and SV angle are
adjusted automatically. The vessels lay in the middle of the ROI.

HPRF
Description HPRF mode is used when detected velocities exceed the processing capabilities
of the currently selected PW Doppler scale, or when the selected anatomical site is
too deep for the selected PW Doppler scale.
Operations Turn the function on or off using the [HPRF] item or the mapping-menu item on the
touch screen.
Effects HPRF enhances the range for detecting high-velocity flow.

Baseline
Description Refers to the area where the velocity is zero in the spectrum.
Operations Rotate the knob under [Baseline] or use the mapping-menu to adjust.
Effects Changes the flow-velocity range to optimize the image.

Angle
Description This function is used to adjust the angle between Doppler vector and flow to make
the velocity more accurate.
The real-time adjusting angle value is displayed on the right part of the spectrum
map.
Operations Rotate the <Angle/Steer> knob on the control panel to adjust it.
Or rotate the knob under [Angle] to adjust it.

Image Optimization 5-23

 Quick Angle
Description To adjust the angle faster, in increments of 60°. The real-time value is displayed on
the right part of the spectrum map.
Operations Adjust using the [Quick Angle] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch
screen.
Or press the knob under [Angle] to adjust it.
There are 3 angles for quick adjustment: -60°, 0° and 60°.

Dynamic Range
Description The dynamic range conveys the information which is being transformed from echo
intensity to grayscale.
Operations Adjust using the [Dyn. Ra.] item or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen.
Effects The more the dynamic range, the more specific the information and the lower the
contrast with more noise.

Audio
Description This function is used to adjust the output audio in the spectrum map.
Operations Rotate the <Volume> knob on the left of the touch panel to adjust the volume.
Press the <Volume> knob to open or shut down the volume.
Effects Utilizing the output audio helps to identify the feature and the status of flow.

PW Steer
Description This function is used to adjust the angles for the sampling line.
Operations Press the <Angle/Steer> knob on the control panel to switch to “Steer adjustment”.
Rotate the knob to adjust.
Effects This feature is used to steer the direction of the beam so as to change the angle
between the beam and flow direction with immobility of the linear probe.
The values of steer angles vary according to the probe.
Impacts The PW Steer function is available only for linear probes.

Time Mark
Description To show the time mark in M mode image.
Operation Turn on or off the function through [Time Mark] item in the menu in the upper left
corner of the screen.
Effects When time mark is displayed on the PW mode image, it's much easier to identify
the cardiac cycles and detect more details.
Impacts The function is available in real-time imaging, freeze or cine review status.

5-24 Image Optimization

5.7 Color M Mode
Color M mode provides information about color flow or tissue on the M mode images to indicate
the cardiac motion state. It is highly sensitive to the flow or tissue movement.
The Color M mode includes Color Flow M mode and Color Tissue M mode.
CM mode is not available for linear probes.

5.7.1 Enter Color M Mode

 Color Flow M Mode
 In B + M mode, press <Color> on the control panel to enter the sampling line adjustment
status, and press <M> again.
 In B + Color, B + Color + PW or B + Color + CW mode, press <M> twice on the control
panel.
 Color Tissue M Mode (TVM)
 In B + TVI/TVD, or B + TVI + TVD mode, press <M> twice on the control panel.
 In Color Flow M mode, press <TDI> on the control panel, press user-defined key for TDI
on the control panel (Assign a key as user-defined TDI: the setting path is "[Setup]→
[System] →[Key Config]", see “12.1.6 Key Configuration” chapter for details) or touch [TDI]
on the touch screen to enter the sampling line adjustment status, and press <M> again.

5.7.2 Exit Color M Mode

 Press <Color> or <M> on the control panel to exit Color M mode.
 Or, press <B> on the control panel to return to B mode.

5.7.3 Color M Mode Image Parameters

 In Color Flow M mode, the parameters that can be adjusted are the same as those in B, M and
Color modes. See the relevant B, Color and M mode sections for details.
 In Color Tissue M mode, the parameters that can be adjusted are the same as those in B, M
and TVI modes. See the relevant B, M and TVI mode sections for details.
 In Color M mode scanning, the image parameter area in the top-right corner of the screen
displays the real-time parameter values.
 ROI Adjustment
The ROI determines the size and position of the color flow or color tissue displayed in the
Color M mode image.
 Press <Set> to switch the status among ROI position adjustment, ROI size adjustment,
the position of the sampling line adjustment and the sampling gate adjustment.
 Set the ROI position by moving the trackball.
 Or, set the ROI size by moving the trackball.
 Or, set the position of the sampling line by moving the trackball. Press <Update>, then
press <set> repeatedly and moving the trackball to adjust the position and size of the
sampling gate.

Image Optimization 5-25

  Press <Update> on the control panel to switch between the real-time mode and freeze mode.

5.8 Anatomical M Mode

Anatomical M Mode and Color Anatomical M mode images are
CAUTION: provided for reference only, not for confirming diagnoses. Compare
the image with those of other machines, or make diagnoses using
non-ultrasound methods.
For an image in the traditional M mode, the M-mark line goes along the beams transmitted from
the probe. Thus it is difficult to obtain a good plane for difficult-to-image patients who cannot be
moved easily. However, in the Anatomical M mode, you can manipulate the M-mark line and move
it to any position at desired angles. The system supports anatomical M scanning (including Free
Xros M mode and Free Xros CM mode) in 2D imaging modes (B, Color, Power and TVI mode).
 Shortcut key setting
You can preset a user-defined key for entering Free Xros M mode: [Setup] (F10) → [System]
→ [Key Config]. See “12.1.6 Key Configuration” for details.
Free Xros M imaging and Free Xros CM imaging are options.

5.8.1 Free Xros M Imaging (Anatomical M-Mode)

5.8.1.1 Basic Procedures for Free Xros M Imaging
1. In real-time 2D mode or M mode, adjust the probe and image to obtain the desired plane.
Or select the desired 2D cine files.
2. Click [Free Xros M] on the touch screen of the B mode tab to enter Free Xros M mode, or
press the user-defined key.
3. Adjust the M-mark (single or multiple) line to obtain optimized images and necessary
information.
 In Dual-split or Quad-split mode, it is the currently activated window that enters the Free Xros
M mode.
Free Xros M imaging is supported on frozen B images, B+M images and B+Power/Color/TVI
images.

5.8.1.2 Free Xros M Image Parameters

 During Free Xros M mode imaging, the image optimizing menus for B mode and Free Xros M
mode are displayed on the touch screen at the same time. You can switch between the 2
modes by clicking the mode tabs.
 Parameters consistent with those in M mode are not to be introduced. See the relevant M
mode section, while Free Xros M mode special items will be introduced in the following.

Display/Hide the M-mark Line

Description There are 3 M-mark lines available, each with “A”, “B” or “C” at the one end as
identification and an arrow at the other end to mark the direction.
M-mark Line Perform the selection using the [Show A], [Show B] or [Show C] item on the touch
Selection screen or the mapping-menu, and the corresponding image will be displayed on
the screen once the related item is selected.
Display Touch [Display Cur.] or [Display All] on the touch screen or the mapping-menu to
current select whether to display the image of the current M-mark line or all.

5-26 Image Optimization

Impacts When there is only one M-mark line on the screen, it cannot be hidden.

Switching between the M-mark Lines

Description To switch between the M-mark lines in Free Xros M mode.
Operations Press <Set> to switch between the M-mark lines and press <Cursor> to show the
cursor.
The activated M-mark line will be green and the inactivated one will be white.

Adjusting the M-mark Line

Description To adjust the position and angle of the M-mark line.
Operations  Position Adjustment
When the M-mark line is activated, move the trackball left and right to adjust the
position. The direction is recognized by the arrow at the end of the line.
 Angle Adjustment
When the M-mark line is activated, move the trackball to adjust the fulcrum of the
line, and adjust using the [Angle/Steer] deflector rod on the control panel.
The adjusting angle range is 0-360°, in increments of 1°.

5.8.1.3 Exit Free Xros M

In Free Xros M mode, touch [Free Xros M] or press B or the user-defined Free Xros M key to exit
Free Xros M mode.

5.8.2 Free Xros CM (Curved Anatomical M-Mode)

Free Xros CM images are provided for reference only, not for
CAUTION: confirming diagnoses. Compare the image with those of other
machines, or make diagnoses using non-ultrasound methods.

In Free Xros CM mode, the distance/time curve is generated from the sample line manually
depicted anywhere on the image. Free Xros CM mode can be entered using TVI and TEI modes.
Only the phased probe supports Free Xros CM.

5.8.2.1 Basic Procedures for Free Xros CM

1. In 2D real-time imaging mode, adjust the probe and image to get the desired image, then fix
the probe.
2. Press [TDI] or the user-defined key to enter TDI imaging and acquire the necessary images.
3. Press the user-defined key for Free Xros CM or touch [Free Xros CM] on the touch screen to
enter Free Xros CM mode.
4. Roll the trackball to define the start point of the sample line on the 2D image.
The cursor displays as , and can only be moved within the 2D image.
5. Press <Set> to fix the start point. The digital number “1” is marked beside the point.

Image Optimization 5-27

 6. Define the next point using the trackball and <Set> key (touch [Undo] to cancel the current
point and activate the preview point). The system updates the time-motion curve in real time.
The sample line is displayed in green, and each point is marked with a number in sequence.
7. Repeat Step 6 to finish the sample line.
8. Double-click the <Set> key to end editing. The sample line is displayed in white.
9. Adjust the image parameters to optimize the image, obtain the relevant tissue image for data
analysis, then save the image if necessary.
10. Press the user-defined key again or <B > to exit Free Xros CM mode.

Sample Line Modification

1. To enter curve (sample line) modification status:
For a completed sample line, set [Edit] to “On” and the sample line is editable.
2. Anchor the cursor to a certain point, press the <Set> key to activate the point, then roll the
trackball to drag the point for a desired sample line.
3. Double-click the <Set> key to end editing. The sample line is displayed in white.

Delete a Sample Line

Touch [Delete] to delete the selected line. You can re-create a new sample line.
Tip:
The free Xros M mode and Free Xros CM mode parameters are independent of each other, but
their functions are the same. Free Xros CM parameters are not to be introduced. See the relevant
M mode and Free Xros M mode sections.

5-28 Image Optimization

5.9 TDI
TDI mode is intended to provide information about low-velocity and high-amplitude tissue motion,
specifically for cardiac movement.
4 types of TDI mode are available:
 Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI): this imaging mode is used to detect tissue movement with
direction and speed information. In general, the warm color indicates movement toward
the probe, while the cool color indicates movement away from the probe.
 Tissue Energy Imaging (TEI): this imaging mode reflects the status of cardiac movement
by displaying the intensity of tissue. The brighter the color the less the intensity.
 Tissue Velocity Doppler Imaging (TVD): this imaging mode provides quantifiable direction
and velocity information about the tissue.
 Tissue Velocity M Imaging (TVM): this function assists in observing the cardiac motion
through a direct angle. TVM mode is also called Color Tissue M mode which has been
introduced in the Color M mode chapter. See “5.7 Color M Mode” for details.
TDI imaging and TDI QA are options. Cardiology Package should be configured first.
Only the phased probe support the TDI function.

5.9.1 Basic Procedures for TDI Imaging

 Press user-defined key for TDI on the control panel in real-time scanning to enter the modes
(Assign a key as user-defined TDI: the setting path is "[Setup]→ [System] →[Key Config]", see
“12.1.6 Key Configuration” chapter for details), or touch [TDI] on the touch screen directly:
 In B or B+Color mode: to enter TVI Mode, TVI mode parameters will be displayed on
the touch screen.
 In Power mode: to enter TEI Mode, TEI mode parameters will be displayed on the
touch screen.
 In PW mode: after pressing the [TDI], press <PW> or <Update> to enter TVD Mode,
TVD mode parameters will be displayed on the touch screen.
 In M mode: after pressing the [TDI], press <M> or <Update> to enter TVM Mode, TVM
mode parameters will be displayed on the touch screen.
 Switching between the TDI sub-modes
In TDI mode, press <Color>, <Power>, <M> or <PW> to switch between the modes.
 Exit TDI
 Press the user-defined key to exit TDI mode and enter general imaging modes.
 Or, press <B> on the control panel to return to B mode.

5.9.2 TDI Image Parameters

 In TDI mode scanning, the image parameter area in the top-right corner of the screen displays
the real-time parameter values as follows:
 TVI/TEI
Parameter F G PRF WF
Meaning Frequency Gain PRF Wall Filter
 TVD
Parameter F G PRF WF SVD SV Angle
Meaning Frequency Gain PRF Wall Filter SV Position SV Size Angle value

Image Optimization 5-29

 5.9.3 TDI Image Optimization
In each TDI mode, the parameters that can be adjusted are similar to those in the color flow modes
(Color, PW, and Power). See the relevant sections for details. The following introduces the specific
items in TDI mode.

Tissue State
Description This function is used for fast image optimization.
Operations Adjust using the [Tissue State] item or mapping-menu item on the touch screen.
3 levels are provided: L, M, H.

5.9.4 TDI Quantitative Analysis (QA)

TDI Quantitative Analysis results are provided for reference only, not
CAUTION: for confirming diagnoses. Compare the results with those of other
machines, or make diagnoses using non-ultrasound methods.

TDI QA is applied for TVI original data analysis, for evaluating the velocity change of the same
cardiac muscle with cardiac cycles.
The system provides 3 kinds of curves for quantitative analysis:
 Speed – Time curve;
 Strain – Time curve;
 Strain Rate – Time curve.
Strain: Deformation and displacement of the tissue within the specified time.
Strain Speed of the deformation, as myocardial variability will result in velocity gradient. Strain
rate: rate is commonly used to evaluate how fast the tissue is deforming.
TDI QA Workflow:
1. Perform image scanning on cardiac muscle, freeze the image and select a range of images for
analysis, or select a desired cine loop from the stored images.
Tip:
 Images from the current scan session (already in freeze mode) or from a saved image
loop can be used for TDI QA.
 TDI QA is only available if the user has selected an image loop. If the user has selected a
saved still image (just one frame), the TDI QA function is not available.
2. Touch [TDI QA] on the TVI touch screen page to activate the TDI QA function, or press the
user-defined key for TDI QA directly.
3. Mark out the part of interest.
4. Select the quantitative analysis curve: touch [Speed] / [Strain Rate] / [Strain] to select.
5. Save the curved image, export the data and perform parameter analysis.
6. Touch [Exit] to exit the TDI QA function.

5-30 Image Optimization

5.9.4.1 TDI QA Screen Description

1 2

TDI QA Screen (using the Speed – Time curve as an example)

1 - TVI Cineloop window
Sample area: indicates the sampling position of the analysis curve. The sample area is color-
coded, 8 (maximum) sample areas can be indicated.
2 - B Cineloop window
Tip:
 The images in the TVI cineloop window and B cineloop window are the frozen image of
the same moment. Roll the trackball to review the images in the two cineloop windows.
 Sample areas are linked in the TVI cineloop window and B cineloop window.
3 - Displays the analysis curve
 The Y-axis represents the speed (unit: cm/s). [In the Strain Rate – Time curve, the Y-axis
represents the strain (%). In the Strain – Time curve, the Y-axis represents the strain rate
(1/s).]
 The X-axis represents the time (unit: s).
 Frame marker: a white line perpendicular to the X-axis which can be moved horizontally
left to right (and right to left) by rolling the trackball.
 Click the checkbox beside the ROI to set whether to hide or display the QA curve.
 You can get the current X/Y-axis value by moving the cursor onto one point on the curve. If
you press <Set> now, the frame marker will move to that spot.
4 - Displays the ECG trace (no ECG trace displayed here).

5.9.4.2 Basic TDI QA Procedures

Setting the ROI
This function is used for setting the TDI QA target.
Up to eight ROIs can be saved on the reference image, with the corresponding eight traces plotted
simultaneously on the graph. Each ROI display has a different color, and its corresponding trace
data is plotted with the same color.

Image Optimization 5-31

 There are two different methods for determining the shapes of the sample area: Standard ROI and
Freehand ROI.

ROI types:
 Standard ROI: if selected, the ROI is drawn automatically with its shape determined by
“Standard Height/Width/Angle”.
 Ellipse ROI: if selected, the ROI is drawn by the trackball.

 Standard ROI
1. Touch [Standard ROI] on the touch screen.
2. Browse the image to a desired frame.
3. When the trackball positions the cursor over the reference image(s), an elliptical ROI is
automatically generated and displays on the reference image(s).
4. When scanning with an elliptical ROI, press <Set> to fix the ROI position and freeze its
corresponding trace on the plot.
The average intensity value inside the ellipse is calculated for every image in the image analysis
range and plotted in the image display area.
The last generated or selected ellipse is considered to be the active ROI, and its trace plot
automatically updates as the user repositions it on the reference image.
A new active ROI is generated whose position is manipulated by the trackball and whose analysis
curve traces will be plotted as before, while the previous ROI and trace remain fixed at the points
they were saved at.
Press <Clear> to delete last ROI.
 Ellipse ROI
1. Touch [Ellipse ROI] on the touch screen. When the cursor appears in the image review area
(TVI image review window or 2D image review window), it displays as a color-coded ellipse.
2. Browse the image to a desired frame.
3. Use the trackball to position the caliper on the reference image at the start point. Press <Set>
to fix the start point.
4. Trace the outline of the desired ROI by moving the cursor with the trackball.
5. Press the <Set> key, and roll the trackball to create the ROI. When a suitable ROI has been
drawn, confirm the ROI by double-clicking the <Set> key. Press the <Clear> key to cancel the
drawing.

5-32 Image Optimization

 Delete an ROI
Press the <Clear> key to clear the last ROI. Touch [Delete All] on the touch screen to clear all
ROIs.
The corresponding traces for the deleted ROIs are erased from the plot.
Press <Clear> to delete the last added ellipse ROI.

 Standard Height/Standard Width/Standard Angle

Use the touch screen selections [Std. Height], [Std. Width], [Std. Angle] to adjust the height,
width and tilt angle of the standard ROI for the current or following ROIs.

 Strain Distance
Sampling distance for calculating deformation. Use the knob under [Strain Dist.] on the touch
screen to select the corresponding value for the Strain – Time curve or Strain Rate – Time
curve.

ROI tracking
Touch [ROI Tracking] to be On to start tracking.
This function provides a motion-compensated ROI as precise time-intensity information can be
acquired using active tracking.
Tip:
 Elliptical ROIs can be positioned in any way that keeps their center within the image
boundaries. If part of the ROI is outside the image boundary, only data from within the
image boundary is used for calculating the mean intensity value.
 When the user repositions an ROI, the old trace data is erased from the plot and the trace
data for the new position re-plotted.

X Scale
Rotate the knob under [X Scale] on the touch screen to choose a different value. The X scale
display will be changed. This function can be used to track detailed tissue information.

Smooth
Use this function to smooth the curve. The system provides 7 levels of smooth effect.

Export/Save Trace Data

1. Click [Export] on the touch screen.
2. Select the drive and enter the file name in the displayed window.
Select [OK] to save the data and return to the QA Analysis screen.
 All displayed ROI traces are saved in the exported file.
 The parameters are included in the trace file if the user has fixed a ROI.
 After exporting, a .BMP format image is displayed in the thumbnail area in the lower part
of the screen.
 Only data from the user-selected image range is included in the exported trace file.

5.10 3D/4D
NOTE: 3D/4D imaging is largely environment-dependent, so the images obtained are provided
for reference only, not for confirming diagnoses.

Image Optimization 5-33

 5.10.1 Overview
Only probes D6-2E, D7-2E, D6-2NE, DE11-3E, SD8-1E and DE10-3E support 3D/4D imaging.
Ultrasound data based on three-dimensional imaging methods can be used to image any structure
where a view cannot be achieved with the standard 2D-mode and to improve the understanding of
complex structures.
 Terms
 3D image Volume Rendering (VR): the image displayed to represent the volume data.
 4D: continuous-sweep volume acquisition.
 View point: a position for viewing volume data/3D image.
 MultiPlaner Rendering (MPR): the three sectional planes of the volume acquisition. As
shown in the figure below, the XY-paralleled plane is the C-section, the XZ-paralleled
plane is the B-section, and the YZ-paralleled plane is the A-section. The probe is moved
along the X-axis.
 ROI (Region of Interest): a volume box used to determine the height and width of
scanning volume.
 VOI (Volume of Interest): a volume box used to display the 3D image (VR) by adjusting
the region of interest in MPR.

View point

2 3
1 4 X

6
7
5 8

 ROI and VOI

After the system enters 3D/4D imaging, a B image with ROI displays on the screen. A line
(shown in the following figure) shows that the upper edge position of the VOI is inside the ROI.

5-34 Image Optimization

  ROI size and position
Roll the trackball to change the ROI size and position. Press the <Set> key to toggle
between setting the size (dotted line) and position (solid line).
 Curved VOI adjustment
Roll the trackball to change the curved VOI position. Press the <Set> key to switch
between the changing ROI and curved VOI states.
This function changes the curved shape of the nearest VOI section and facilitates
observation of the volume data of interest.
When a triangle of control point is displayed on the curved VOI, it can be adjusted both in
acquisition preparation status, and in the A, B and C sections of review/4D imaging status.
The orientation and shape (line or dot) of curved VOI vary depending on the view direction:
View Curved VOI
U/D At the upper part of curved VOI
D/U At the lower part of curved VOI
L/R At the left part of curved VOI
R/L At the right part of curved VOI
F/B Displays as a dot
B/F Displays as a dot
 About the probes
A 2D imaging probe can be applied for Smart 3D imaging. However, to realize Static 3D
imaging, 4D imaging, STIC, iPage+, SCV+, Color 3D, Smart Volume, Smart FLC, Smart Planes
CNS, Smart Face, or Niche, a volume probe should be selected.
 MPR
The principle of 3D imaging is to render a 3D image from multiple 2D image information. The
following describes the spatial relationship of 3 MPRs (A, B and C) and the 3D image (VR).
In the quad display format view, the screen displays 3 MPRs (A, B and C) and the 3D image.

Image Optimization 5-35

 A window B window

C window 3D window (VR)

 On the touch screen, the current window’s icon is highlighted, as shown below. Window A is
the currently activated window.

A, B and C sectional images correspond to the following sections of the 3D image.

 Section A: corresponds to the 2D image in B mode. Section A is the sagittal section in fetal
face-up posture, as shown in Figure A above.
 Section B: is the horizontal section in fetal face-up posture, as shown in Figure B above.
 Section C: is the coronal section in fetal face-up posture, as shown in Figure C above.

5-36 Image Optimization

 Tip: the upper part of the 3D image in the 3D window corresponds to the orientation mark on
the probe. If the fetal posture is head down (toward the mother’s feet), and the orientation
mark is toward the mother’s head, then the fetus posture is head down in the 3D image. The
3D image can be rotated by touching [180°] on the touch screen to show the fetus head-up.
Ultrasound images are provided for reference only, not for confirming
CAUTION: diagnoses. Use caution to avoid misdiagnosis.
 Free View (Free View Imaging)
With this function, the probe scanning direction can be controlled just by changing the probe
scanning angle. The image of interest can be easily found without any actual probe position
and direction change. This not only reduces the operations, but most importantly, it decreases
patient discomfort resulting from moving the probe.
When the intra-cavity 4D probe is activated, the parameter [Free View] can be adjusted on the
B image touch screen for adjusting the probe angle.
Range: -45°~+45°, in increments of 5°.

 Wire cage
When viewing a 3D/4D image on the display monitor, it is sometimes difficult to recognize the
orientation. To help, the system displays a three-dimensional drawing to illustrate the
orientation. The blue plane shows the image acquisition where started, while the red plane
shows the image acquisition where ended. A yellow plane in the wire cage shows the position
of the MPR. See the image below:

Wire Cage

5.10.2 Note Before Use

5.10.2.1 3D/4D Image Quality Conditions
NOTE: In accordance with the ALARA (As Low As Reasonably Achievable) principle, try to
shorten the sweeping time after a good 3D image is obtained.
The quality of images rendered in 3D/4D mode is closely related to the fetal condition, angle of a B
tangent plane and scanning technique (only for Smart 3D). The following description uses fetal
face imaging as an example. Imaging of other parts is the same.
 Fetal Condition
(1) Gestational age
Fetuses of 24~30 weeks old are the most suitable for 3D imaging.
(2) Fetal body posture
Recommended: cephalic face up (Figure a) or face to the side (Figure b);
NOT recommended: cephalic face down (Figure c).

Image Optimization 5-37

 (3) Amniotic fluid (AF) isolation
The desired region is adequately isolated by amniotic fluid.
The region to be imaged is not obscured by limbs or umbilical cord.
(4) The fetus keeps still. If there is fetal movement, it is necessary to rescan.
 Angle of a B tangent plane
The optimum tangent plane to the fetal face 3D/4D imaging is the sagittal section of the face.
To ensure high image quality, scan the maximum face area and maintain edge continuity.
 Image quality in B mode (2D image quality)
Before entering 3D/4D capture, optimize the B mode image to ensure:
 High contrast between the desired region and the surrounding AF.
 Clear boundary of the desired region.
 Low noise of the AF area.
 Scanning technique (only for Smart 3D)
 Stability: the body, arm and wrist must move smoothly, otherwise the restructured 3D
image distorts.
 Slowness: move or rotate the probe slowly.
 Evenness: move or rotate the probe at a steady speed or rate.
NOTE: 1. A region with a qualified image in B mode may not be optimal for 3D/4D imaging.
E.g., adequate AF isolation for one MPR does not mean the whole desired region is
isolated by AF.
2. Practice is needed for a high success rate of qualified 3D/4D imaging.
3. Even with good fetal condition, acquiring a suitable 3D/4D image may require more
than one scanning.

5.10.3 Static 3D
Static 3D provides single frame image acquisition of 3D images. During scanning, the probe
performs the scanning automatically.

5.10.3.1 Basic Procedures for Static 3D Imaging

To perform Static 3D imaging:
1. Select the appropriate probe and exam mode. Make sure there is sufficient gel on the probe
for scanning.
2. Obtain a 2D image.
Make sure there is:
 High contrast between the desired region and the surrounding AF (amniotic fluid).
 Clear boundary of the desired region.
 Low noise of the AF area.

3. Press to enter Static 3D acquisition preparation mode, and define the ROI as well as the
curved VOI.
To adjust the ROI:
 Under acquisition preparation status: roll the trackball to change the ROI size, ROI
position and curved VOI, press the <Set> key to toggle between setting the ROI position,
ROI size and curved VOI.
 Tap [Flip VOI] to flip VOI. Tap [Reset VOI] to reset the angle of VOI to the original status.
 Enter touch screen mapping mode, see “3.8.4 Touch Screen Operation” for details.

5-38 Image Optimization

 Draw a circle around the interested region, then the system will position the ROI to cover
the region. You can adjust ROI size and position if necessary.
ROI

Draw a circle
here

ROI cover this

area

Touch the cross cursor on the VOI curve and move the cursor with finger to adjust VOI
curve.

For setting the ROI, be sure to:

 Set the ROI on the 2D image with the largest section area of the fetal face.
 Set the ROI a little larger than the fetal head.
NOTE: When defining an ROI, try to eliminate useless data so as to reduce the volume data
and shorten the time for image storing, processing and rendering.
4. Select a render mode on the touch screen and set parameters such as [Angle] and [Image
Quality] on the touch screen accordingly.
5. Press <Update> on the control panel to start the 3D image acquisition.
The system enters 3D image viewing status when the acquisition is completed.
In image viewing status, you can perform VOI setting, image editing and other operations. For
details, see “5.10.3.3 Static 3D Image Viewing.”
6. Exit Static 3D.

Image Optimization 5-39

 Press <B> or to enter B mode.

5.10.3.2 Static 3D Acquisition Preparation

Description of parameters:
Type Parameter Description
Function: to set the range for imaging.
Angle
Range: 10-80°.
Function: to adjust the image quality by changing the line
Parameter
density. Image quality can affect the imaging speed: the better
adjusting Quality the image quality, the longer the time.
Range: Low2, Low1, Mid, High1, High2
Mix Set the Mix ratio of main render to sub render.
Function: set Surface as the 3D image rendering mode.
This is useful for surface imaging, such as fetus face, hand or
Surface foot.
Tip: you may have to adjust the threshold to obtain a clear
body boundary.
Function: set Max as the 3D image rendering mode. Displays
Max the maximum echo intensity in the observation direction.
This is useful for viewing bony structures.
Function: set Min as the 3D image rendering mode. Displays
Render Mode Min the minimum echo intensity in the observation direction.
This is useful for viewing vessels and hollow structures.
Function: set X-ray as the 3D image rendering mode. Displays
the average value of all gray values in the ROI.
X-Ray
X Ray: used for imaging tissues with different internal
structures or tissues with tumors.
Function: add the light rendering effect based on the general
rendering effect.
iLive
iLive cannot be selected as sub render mode. When it is set
as main render mode, the sub render mode is disabled.
Based on the movements of the fetus, rebuilt and show the anatomical structure
STIC within a physical movement by using the interconnection between the time and
the space.

5.10.3.3 Static 3D Image Viewing

Enter/Exit Image Viewing
 To enter image viewing:
The system enters image viewing when image acquisition is complete.
 Exit
To return to 3D/4D image acquisition preparation status, press <Update> or <Freeze>.

5-40 Image Optimization

Activate MPR
Touch [A], [B], [C] or [VR] to activate MPR or 3D image (VR).

MPR Viewing
In the actual display, different colors for the window box and the section line are used to identify
the MPR A, B and C.
 Window A is blue, and the lines (representing MPR A) displayed in the other two windows
are also blue.
 Window B is yellow, and the lines (representing MPR B) displayed in the other two
windows are also yellow.
 Window C is orange, and the lines (representing MPR C) displayed in the other two
windows are also orange.
The positions of the other two MPRs are indicated in the selected plane. You can roll the trackball
to change the position.

Sectional A Sectional B Sectional C

MPR Only

Touch on the touch screen to display MPR only. The adjustable image parameters are
changed to MPR parameters automatically.
Only A, B and C MPR are displayed, and VR is not displayed.
The MPR Only function is available in image acquisition status.

Image Optimization 5-41

 Asymmetric

Touch on the touch screen to display MPR along with VR. A larger VR image along with 3
small MPR images will be displayed.

View Direction
The Region of Interest (ROI), also referred to as the Render Box in rendering, contains the section
of the volume you want to render. Therefore, objects that are not inside the box are not included in
the render process and are cut out (this is important in surface mode to allow a free line of sight).
This may or may not be the entire VOI.
You can adjust the view direction of the ROI.

a b

c d

e f
View Direction
a. Up/Down b. Down/Up
c. Left/Right d. Right/Left
e. Front/Back f. Back/Front

5-42 Image Optimization

Touch [Up/Down], [Left/Right] or [Front/Back] on the second page of the touch screen to select the
direction of the above Figure a, c and e.
Touch [Flip] on the touch screen to view in the opposite direction to the current direction, as shown
in Figures b, d and e.

Adjust VOI
 VOI On
The VR image displays VOI information.
1. In image viewing status, touch [VOI] to turn it to “On.”
2. Select the desired window by touching [A], [B] or [C] or [VR].
3. Roll the trackball to adjust the VOI position, size and curved VOI, and press <Set> to switch
between the adjusting status. Or rotate the <4D> knob on the control panel to adjust the
relative position of MPRs so as to slice through the VR.
 VOI Off
The VR image displays ROI information.
Touch [VOI] to turn it to “Off.” The ROI image is displayed on the screen. Roll the trackball to
observe the MPR.
 Accept VOI
1. This function is usually used for MPR observation and to determine the relative position of the
MPR to the VR.
2. Touch [Accept VOI] on the touch screen.
3. Select the desired MPR by touching [A], [B] or [C] or [VR].
4. Roll the trackball to view the current active MPR. The other two MPRs change correspondingly.
Or rotate the <4D> knob to adjust the relative position of MPRs so as to slice through the VR.
In Accept VOI status, when the VR is active or the MPR which is perpendicular to the view
direction is active, the center point of the VR displays. Adjust the position using the trackball.

Image Rendering Parameters

In image viewing status, render the image by adjusting the relevant parameters.
Render setting parameters description:

Touch on the touch screen to select VR or MPR parameter adjustments.

 When [VR] is highlighted in green, parameter adjustment is performed on the VR image.
 When [MPR] is highlighted in green, parameter adjustment is performed on the MPR.
Adjustable parameters are as follows:
Parameter Description
Function: to set the threshold for 3D image rendering. 3D image is rendered
on the signal above thresholds by eliminating noise via the Threshold
parameter. Lower threshold can eliminate lower range noises and echo,
Threshold which will contribute to a clearer and smoother image.
Range: 0% to 100%.
Available only in Surface rendering mode.

Image Optimization 5-43

 Parameter Description
Function: to adjust the transparency value for 3D image rendering. It implies
the transparency of the light. The higher the value is, the tougher the surface
becomes.
Opacity Range: 0% to 100%.
The lower the number is, the more transparent the gray scale information will
be.
Available only in Surface rendering mode.
Function: to set the smoothness of 3D image.
Range: 0 to 10. 0 refers to no smooth effect; 1-10 provides 10 effects in
Smooth incremental order.
Tip: insufficient smoothness can result in a fuzzy image; however, too much
smoothness will lead to image distortion.
Function: to set the brightness of image.
Range: 0%-100%, in increments of 2%.0% represents the minimum
Brightness
brightness, while 100% represents the maximum.
NOTE: the adjustment for 3D (VR) and MPR.
Function: set the contrast scale of the image (contrast).
As long as the contrast becomes larger, the bright spot and dark spot on the
Contrast image change as well.
Range: 0%-100%, in increments of 2%.
NOTE: the adjustment for 3D (VR) and MPR
Function: enable/disable tint map. The color of image change according the
Tint tint value.
Selection: OFF, 1-8.
Function: enable/disable gray map. The color of image change according the
gray scale value.
Gray Map
Adjusting level: tap [MPR]. Rotate [Gray Map] knob. The adjusting range: 1-
8.
To quickly rotate the VR.
VR Orientation
Selection: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°.
Function: The 3D adaptive filtering is used to enhance the spatial continuity
of tissue structure, and restrain speckle noise to increase image contrast, so
as to optimize volume image data.
3D iClear Selection: OFF, 1-7.
Select VR imgae. Adjust 3D iClear to optimize VR image.
Select MPR imgae. Adjust 3D iClear to optimize MPR image.
Optimize the signal of the face area to reduce the noise of the AF area and
improve the signal-noise ratio of the face area, make the face more fullness
Face+ to easily obtain the image of fetal face.
Range: 1-3.
Function: Optimize the signal-noise ratio and the contrast of VR image.
VR Refine
Selection: OFF, 1-7.

5-44 Image Optimization

 Parameter Description
Function: Reduce the noise and keep the boundary of the image more
MagiClean clearly.
Selection: only enabled in rendering mode Off, Low, Mid, High and Max.
Function: Superimpose the tint map basic on the VR image to improve the
Depth VR stereoscopic sensation and the contrast of the image.
Selection: Off, Black, Cyna, Blue, Rose
Function: Improve the transparency in iLive rendering mode to observe the
tissue, such as cyst.
Adjust method: Click [Hyaline] under iLive render mode, the merging ratio of
Hyaline two render modes between Hyaline and iLive is 100%; or, select [Hyaline]
and adjust hyaline range.
Effect: Adjust the merging ratio of two render modes between Hyaline and
iLive
Function: adjust the rendering thickness of the plane.
Thickness Adjusting level: tap [MPR]. Rotate [Thickness] knob. The adjusting range: 0-
30mm.

 Reset Curve
Parameter Description
Reset Ori. To reset the volume rotation, shifting and zooming to its original status.
Reset Curve To reset the curve to its original status.
Reset All To reset the volume to its original orientation and original parameters.
 Render Mode
Parameter Description
Function: set Surface as the VR rendering mode.
This is useful for surface imaging, such as fetus face, hand or
Surface foot.
Tip: you may have to adjust the threshold to obtain a clear
body boundary.
Function: set Max as the VR rendering mode. Displays the
Max maximum echo intensity in the observation direction.
Gray/Inversion This is useful for viewing bony structures.
Function: set Min as the VR rendering mode. Displays the
Min minimum echo intensity in the observation direction.
This is useful for viewing vessels and hollow structures.
Function: set X-Ray as the VR rendering mode. Displays the
average value of all gray values in the ROI.
X-Ray
X Ray: used for imaging tissues with different internal
structures or tissues with tumors.

Image Optimization 5-45

 Parameter Description
iLive brings you a better imaging experience by adding
lighting rendering effect to the traditional way, allowing human
iLive tissue texture to be revealed more clearly.
iLive cannot be selected as sub render mode. When it is set
as main render mode, the sub render mode is disabled.
The above five rendering methods can be applied to both gray and inversion
modes.
Where inversion means to invert the grayscale of the image, so as to
enhance observation for low-echo regions, applicable for vessels, cysts, etc.
When the function is turned on, the rendering mode parameters change to
the corresponding inverse parameters.

Rotate an Image
The system supports the following rotation modes:
 Axial rotation
 Auto rotation
 Axial rotation
Axial rotation rotates the currently activated image around the X-, Y- or Z-axis.
 Procedures
a) Select the current image.
b) Rotate the corresponding knobs to make the image rotate:
 To rotate along the X-axis: rotate the <M> button on the control panel clockwise and
the image rotates right along the X-axis. Rotate the button counter-clockwise and the
image rotates to the left.
 To rotate along the Y-axis: rotate the <PW> button on the control panel clockwise and
the image rotates right along the Y-axis. Rotate the button counter-clockwise and the
image rotates to the left.
 To rotate along the Z-axis: rotate the <Color> button on the control panel clockwise
and the image rotates right along the Z-axis. Rotate the button counter-clockwise and
the image rotates to the left.
 Or, enter the touch screen mapping mode and hide the tool bar. Rotate the image by
touching the image window and move slowly.
 To rotate along the X-axis: swipe from top to bottom and the image rotates right along
the X-axis. Swipe from bottom to top and the image rotates to the left.
 To rotate along the Y-axis: swipe from left to right and the image rotates right along
the Y-axis. Swipe right to left and the image rotates to the left.
 Auto rotation
(1) In 3D viewing mode, touch the [Auto Rot.] in the [Tools] tab on the touch screen. The
system enters the auto rotation preparation state.
(2) Touch [Left/Right] or [Up/Down] to set the auto rotation direction.
(3) Set the Start position and End position:
Start position: roll the trackball to view at a certain position. Press the trackball “Set Start”
function key according to the trackball hint area.
End position: roll the trackball to view at a certain position. Press the trackball “Set End”
function key according to the trackball hint area.

5-46 Image Optimization

 (4) Set the rotation mode: touch for single direction rotation, and touch for
bidirectional rotation.
(5) Touch [Speed] to set the rotation speed.

(6) Touch to activate rotation.

(7) Touch [Step] to set the rotate step.
NOTE: You can view the back of the VR by rotating it 180°. The back view image may not be as
vivid as the front. (Here we call the initial view of the VR the “front”). It is recommended
to re-capture rather than rotate the VR if a certain desired region is obscured in the VR.

Inversion
Function: vessel shape is correct with the capture target. The vessel wall is smooth and clear.

Surface Enhancement
 Description: This function is to make the edge structure of the image and surface details clearer, so
as to enhance the overall contrast.
 Operation: Touch [Surf. ENH] to adjust the enhancement level.
 Effect: The higher the level is, the clearer the edge structure of the image is.
When the level is higher than 0 and [Move Light] is highlighter, image close to the light source
is clearer, and image away from the light source is darker.

Move the light

 This function is to adjust the position of the light source as VR is considered. The image
becomes clearer as keeping closer to the light.
 Adjustment: roll the trackball and change the light position to make fine adjustments after
tapping [Move Light].

Image Zooming
To adjust the zoom factor of VR. The sectional images will be zoomed in/out accordingly.
 Operation
Set the VR window as the current window.
 Rotate the <Zoom> knob to increase or decrease the magnification factor.
 Under touch screen mapping mode, zoom the image by pinching the two fingers on the
touch screen.

Sync
This function switches the view direction perpendicular to the current active plane, so as to get a
better view of VR.
In the following image, the current active plane is MPR A. After performing Sync on Figure A, you
can see the same fetal face profile in VR.

Image Optimization 5-47

 Figure A

Figure B

Comments and Body Marks

 Function:
Add comments and body marks to the MPR and VR.
 Operation:
The operation is the same as adding comments and body marks in B image mode.

5-48 Image Optimization

Image Editing
 Function
Image editing is a more elaborate function than VOI adjusting for optimizing the 3D image by
clipping (removing) the obscured part of the region of interest.
Tip:
 In image editing status, no image parameters can be changed. A cutting cursor is
displayed or an eraser cursor , and the system enters “Accept VOI” status.
 The editing function is available only on VR.
 Procedures
1. Enter image editing status by touching the [Edit] tab.
2. Select an edit/erase tool:
 Polygon
a) Press <Set> to position the start point, roll the trackball to set a region, and press
<Set> to trace the region.
b) When the start point and end point coincide, the region is selected, or press <Set>
twice to finish tracing.
c) Move the cursor to the region you want to cut and press <Set> again to cut.
 Contour
a) Press <Set> to position the start point, and roll the trackball to trace the region.
b) When the start point and end point coincide, the region is selected, or press <Set>
twice to finish tracing.
c) Move the cursor to the region you want to cut and press <Set> again to cut.
 Rectangle
a) Press <Set> to fix the rectangle's position, roll the trackball to change the size, and
press <Set> again to finish drawing the rectangle
b) Move the cursor to the region you want to cut and press <Set> again to cut.
 Line
a) Press <Set> to position the start point and the system will display a reference line.
Roll the trackball to set the line orientation and press <Set> to start drawing. Press
<Set> when ends are required. Press <Set> twice to finish drawing.
b) Move the cursor to the region you want to cut and press <Set> again to cut.
 Soft/ hard eraser
Press <Set> to position the start point and roll the trackball to select the region. Press
<Set> when ends are required. You can repeat the step to erase all parts blocking the
interesting region.
 rotate the knob under [Eraser Diam.] to adjust eraser diameter.
 To undo the last cutting, touch [Undo] on the touch screen.
 To undo all cuttings, touch [Undo All].

The image cutting parameters are described as follows:

Type Parameters Description
Contour Allows you to trace the portion of the image you want to cut.
Displays a box which can be used to define the portion of the
Edit Type Rect.
image you want to cut.
Applies to softer or smoother boundary within a small range of
Soft eraser
the image.

Image Optimization 5-49

 Type Parameters Description
Applies to a distinct boundary of within a wider range of the
Hard eraser
image.
Polygon Allows you to trace a polygon on the image you want to cut.
Line Use a multi-point line to trace the boundary quickly.
As the eraser erases the image by means of sphere, you can
adjust the size so as to adjust the erased area and depth.
Eraser Diam.
The eraser sphere center has a more distinct effect of clearing
compared to other parts.
Edit Depth Depth Reserved.

Other Undo To undo the last cut only.

Operations Undo All To undo all cuts since you entered image edit mode.
 Section image (MPR) measurement.
2D related measurements can be performed on MPR. For details, see [Advanced Volume].
Measurement is not available in acquisition preparation status.

5.10.3.4 Image Saving and Reviewing in Static 3D

 Image saving
 In 3D viewing mode, press the single image Save key (Save Image to hard drive) to save
the current image to the patient information management system in the set format and
image size.
 Save Cine: in 3D viewing mode, press the user-defined Save key (Save Cine
(Retrospective) to hard drive) to save a CIN-format clip to the hard drive.
 Image review
Open an image file to enter the image review mode. In this mode, you can perform the same
operations as in VR viewing mode.

5.10.3.5 Color Static 3D (Color 3D)

The system also supports the color Static 3D flow image function. For details, see
“5.10.10 Color 3D.”

5.10.4 4D
4D provides continuous, high-volume acquisition of 3D images. During scanning, the probe
performs the scanning automatically.
4D image acquisition operations are similar to those of Static 3D. The only difference is that in
static 3D mode, only a single frame 3D image is captured, while in 4D mode, continuous, high-
volume acquisition of 3D images is provided.
4D imaging is an option.

5.10.4.1 Basic Procedures for 4D Imaging

1. Select the appropriate 4D-compatible probe and exam mode. Make sure there is sufficient gel
on the probe for scanning.
2. Obtain a 2D image as described in the Static 3D imaging procedure.

3. Press to enter 4D imaging preparation status. Define the ROI as well as the curved
VOI. For details, see “5.10.3.1 Basic Procedures for Static 3D Imaging.”

5-50 Image Optimization

4. Select a render mode, and set parameters.
5. Press <Update> on the control panel to enter the 4D image real-time display status.
6. Press <Freeze> on the control panel to freeze the image. Perform image cutting, rotation,
annotation and image saving if necessary. For detailed operations, see “5.10.3.3 Static 3D
Image Viewing.”
7. Exit 4D.
Press <Update> to return to 4D image acquisition preparation,

or, press <B> or the key to enter B mode.

5.10.4.2 4D Acquisition Preparation

The parameters are the same as those for Static 3D. For details, see “5.10.3.2 Static 3D
Acquisition Preparation.”

5.10.4.3 4D Real-time Display

In 4D real-time display status, operations are similar to those in Static 3D. For details, see the
corresponding section in Static 3D.

5.10.4.4 4D Image Saving

 In 3D viewing mode, press the single image Save key (Save Image to hard drive) to save the
current image to the patient information management system in the set format and image size.
 Save Cine: in 3D viewing mode, press the user-defined Save key (Save Cine (Retrospective)
to hard drive) to save a CIN-format clip to the hard drive.
Tip: After freezing a 4D image, press <Cine> to switch between cine auto-play mode and manual
mode.

5.10.4.5 3D/4D Fast Switching

In 4D real-time imaging mode, press to quickly switch to VR viewing status, where you can
obtain the same image of a better quality.

In 3D imaging viewing mode, press to quickly switch to 4D image real-time imaging

status, where you can obtain the same image in dynamic mode.

5.10.5 Smart 3D
The operator manually moves the probe to change its position/angle when performing the scan.
After scanning, the system carries out image rendering automatically, then displays a frame of the
3D image.
Smart 3D is an option.

5.10.5.1 Basic Procedures for Smart 3D Imaging

NOTE: In Smart 3D image scanning, if the probe orientation mark is oriented to the operator’s
finger, perform the scan from right to left in linear scan, or rotate the probe from left to
right in rocked scanning. Otherwise, the VR direction will be wrong.
To perform Smart 3D imaging:

Image Optimization 5-51

 1. Select the appropriate probe (non-4D probe) and exam mode. Make sure there is sufficient gel
on the probe for scanning.
2. Obtain a 2D image. Optimize the image as described in the Static imaging procedure.

3. Press to enter the Smart 3D imaging preparation status, and define the ROI as well as
the curved VOI.
4. Select a render mode.
5. Select an acquisition method, and set the corresponding parameters on the touch screen.
Rocked mode: set [Angle] parameter.
Linear mode: set [Distance] parameter.
6. Press <Update> on the control panel to start the 3D image acquisition.
The system enters the 3D image viewing status when the acquisition is complete. Or, end the
acquisition by pressing <Freeze> or <Update> on the control panel.
In image viewing status, operations such as VOI setting and image editing can be performed. For
details, see “5.10.3.3 Static 3D Image Viewing.”
7. Exit Smart 3D.
Press <Update> or <Freeze> to return to Smart 3D image acquisition preparation. Or, press

<B> or to enter B mode.

5.10.5.2 Smart 3D Acquisition Preparation

In Smart 3D mode, you need to set the scan method in addition to the other items in Static 3D
mode. The other parameters are the same as those for Static 3D. For details, see “5.10.3.2 Static
3D Acquisition Preparation.”
 Method
Capture images using Linear scan or Rocked scan.
 Linear scanning
Move the probe across the surface. See the following figure.

 Rocked scanning
Rotate the probe once from the left to the right side (or from the right to the left) to include
the entire desired region. See the figure.

5-52 Image Optimization

 Description of parameters:
Parameter Description
Function: select the image acquisition method.
Selection: Rocked, Linear.
Linear mode: during the sweep, the probe must be kept parallel. The scanning
speed should be constant.
Method Rocked mode: in this mode, the probe must be moved to a position where you can
clearly see a middle cut of the object you want to scan and render. Tilt the probe to
about 30 degrees until the object you want to scan disappears. Start the acquisition
and tilt the probe over a distance of around 60 degrees until the object disappears
again. During the sweep, the probe may not be moved parallel, just tilted.
Tip: the speed is related to scanning distance or angle.
Function: to set the distance the probe covered from one end to the other end during
Distance a linear sweep.
Range: 10-200 mm, in increments of 10 mm.
Function: to set the angle the probe covered during a fan sweep.
Angle
Range: 10-80°, in increments of 1°.
Acquiring
Function: to set the acquiring time of the Smart 3D acquisition.
Time

5.10.5.3 Smart 3D Image Viewing

In VR viewing, the system supports the following functions:
 Render setting.
 B-mode parameter adjustment.
 Setting the display format.
 Viewing MPR.
 Image zooming.
 Rotation.
 Image editing.
 VR parameter adjustment.
 Scanning plane and probe movement
Move the probe across the body surface.
The arrow in the figure below indicates the movement of the probe (you can move the probe in
the opposite direction to the arrow.).

Image Optimization 5-53

 5.10.5.4 Image Saving and Reviewing in Smart 3D
 Image saving
 In 3D viewing mode, press the single image Save key (Save Image to hard drive) to save
the current image to the patient information management system in the set format and
image size.
 Save Cine: in 3D viewing mode, press the user-defined Save key (Save Cine
(Retrospective) to hard drive) to save a CIN-format clip to the hard drive.
 Image review
Open an image file to enter the image review mode. In this mode, you can perform the same
operations as in VR viewing mode.

5.10.5.5 Color Smart 3D

The system also supports the color Smart 3D flow image function. For details, see
“5.10.10 Color 3D.”

5.10.6 STIC (Spatio-Temporal Image Correlation)

The STIC function provides sectional images of high spatial resolution as well as good time
resolution, which is mainly used in fetal heart observation and cardiac hemodynamic exams.
STIC is an option, and it is not available in Smart 3D mode.
Acquired images are post-processed to calculate a Volume Cine sequence representing one
complete heart cycle.
In order to achieve a good result, try to adjust the size of the volume box and the sweep angle to
be as small as possible. The longer the acquisition time, the better the spatial resolution will be.
The user must ensure minimal movement of the participating persons (e.g., mother and fetus), and
that the probe is held absolutely still throughout the acquisition period.
Movement will lead to acquisition failure. If the user (trained operator) clearly recognizes a
disturbance during the acquisition period, the acquisition must be canceled.
One or more of the following items in the data set indicate a disturbance during acquisition:
 Sudden discontinuities in the reference image B
These are due to movement of the mother, the fetus or fetal arrhythmia during acquisition.
 Sudden discontinuities in the color display
Movement of the mother, the fetus or fetal arrhythmia affects the color flow in the same way it
affects the gray image.
 Fetal heart rate far too low or far too high
After acquisition the estimated fetal heart rate is displayed. If the value does not correspond to
the estimations based on other diagnostic methods, the acquisition failed and must be
repeated.
 Asynchronous movement in different parts of the image.
E.g., the left part of the image is contracting while the right part is expanding.
 Color “moves” through the image in a certain direction.
This item is caused by a failure in detecting the heart rate due to a low acquisition frame rate.
Use a higher acquisition frame rate for better results.
1. In all of the above cases the data set must be discarded and the
CAUTION: acquisition must be repeated.
2. STIC fetal cardio acquisition cannot be performed if there is severe
fetal arrhythmia.

5-54 Image Optimization

 Diagnoses made only by assessing this 3D/4D acquisition are not
WARNING: permitted. Every diagnostic finding must also be evaluated in 2D.

NOTE: The user must ensure that none of the participating persons (mother, fetus, and
user) move during the acquisition. Movement will lead to acquisition failure. If the
user recognizes a movement during the scan, the acquisition must be canceled.

5.10.6.1 Basic Procedures for STIC

1. Obtain a feasible 2D image (fetus heart).
To observe a small structure, zoom in on the part of interest (Spot zooming is usually applied
for good image quality).

2. Press or to enter 3D/4D acquisition preparation mode.

3. Touch [STIC] to enter STIC acquisition preparation mode.
4. Set the acquisition and display the related parameters.
 Select the parameter package.
 Set the acquisition time and angle according to the target size and the motion conditions.
For fetuses aged 20-30 weeks, the acquisition time range is: 10~12.5 secs, and the angle
range is: 10-20°.
If the gestation age is more than 20-30 weeks, the acquisition time should be about 15
secs, and the angle should be about 30°.
 Adjust the size and position of the sample box so the interested region is contained within
the sample box.
However, the box should be small enough to contain only the heart, not the whole thorax.
NOTE: In order to achieve a good result, try to adjust the volume box and the sweep angle
to be as small as possible. The longer the acquisition time, the better the spatial
resolution will be.
5. Place the sample box over the region of interest.
6. Press <Update> to begin image acquisition.
 Keep the probe still. Volume acquisition proceeds automatically and the acquired images
are displayed.
 To avoid external interference to the image, ensure that there is minimal movement of the
mother.
 In case of movement of the mother or the fetus, or the probe position changes, cancel the
current acquisition and begin a new acquisition.
After the calculation, the estimated heart rate is shown on the screen.
7. Judge whether the estimated heart rate displayed is reasonable. If the result is not reasonable,
touch [Reject All] to perform the acquisition again. Touch [Accept HR] to accept the result and
go to image review, or touch [Reject HR] to reject the HR but save the volume data.
Operations in review mode are the same as those in 4D cine review mode. See the details in the
4D chapter.
Tip: After STIC acquisition, press <Cine> to switch between cine auto play mode and manual
mode.

Image Optimization 5-55

 5.10.6.2 Operation Controls
Controls consistent with those in 3D/4D mode are not to be introduced here. Only STIC mode
special controls will be introduced here.
 Acquisition Time
The time required for a complete acquisition.
Range: 7.5~17.5 secs.
 Angle
The range from acquisition beginning to acquisition end.
Range: 10~85°.

5.10.6.3 Color STIC 3D

The system also supports the color STIC 3D flow image function. For details, see
“5.10.10 Color 3D.”

5.10.7 3D Layout
The function compiles the 3 MPRs together according to their relative positions, to provide a much
clearer interior anatomical structure.
This function is provided by the [Niche] option, and does not support Smart 3D image data.

Niche
1. Touch the [3D Layout] tab in the [Tools] tab on the touch screen, then the [Niche] button is
highlighted.
2. Touch [A]/[B]/[C]/[Niche] on the touch screen to select the reference plane as Plane A, Plane B,
Plane C or Niche.
3. Set the view direction for niche display mode using the touch screen: from the front of the
reference image or from the back.
4. Roll the trackball to view sectional images as necessary. Rotate <M>, <PW>, <Color> to
perform axial rotation or rotate the <4D> knob to adjust the nearest VOI section (cut plane)
position.
Click [Reset Ori.] to reset the rotation, the center point position, and the position of the MPR.

3Slice
1. Touch the [3D Layout] tab on the touch screen, then touch [3Slice].
2. Touch [A]/[B]/[C]/[3Slice] on the touch screen to select the reference plane.
3. Roll the trackball to view sectional images as necessary. Rotate <M>, <PW>, <Color> to
perform axial rotation or rotate the <4D> knob to adjust the nearest VOI section (cut plane)
position.
Click [Reset Ori.] to reset the rotation, the center point position, and the position of the MPR.

5.10.8 iPage+
iPage+ is iPage+SCV function. iPage (Multi-Slice Imaging) is a “Visualization” mode for displaying
sectional images. The data is presented as slices through the data set, which are parallel to each
other. When SCV (Slice Contras View) function is turned on, the system expands the parallel
section images into a slice region with a specified thickness, and draws this region with 3D
rendering effect to enhance the image.
NOTE: iPage+ imaging is an option, and it is not available in Smart 3D mode.

5-56 Image Optimization

5.10.8.1 Operating Procedures
 iPage operation
1. Acquire necessary 3D/4D data.
 Single-frame VR:
 STIC/4D mode: freeze the system, and then roll the trackball to select the image.
 Static 3D: a frame of image is acquired after the acquisition is finished automatically.
 Multi-frame 3D images: acquire multiple 3D images in 4D imaging mode.
2. Perform operations like rotation, VOI adjusting to the image to find the interested region.
3. Tap [iPage+] on touch screen.
4. Check A/B/C sectional planes, and select the reference image.
5. Confirm if the slices displayed are the target planes, if not, re-select the reference image again.
6. Observe the interested structure through multiple slices.
Select the proper image layout and space according to the size of the target structure.
To observe the details or the tiny part of the interested region, do image zooming please.
7. Rotate the 3D image to observe the slices of other orientations. Repeat step 6 if necessary.
 If the target orientation and region can’t be observed even after image rotation, tap [Reset
Ori.] to reset the 3D image.
8. Do operations like comment to the interested region.
9. Save images as necessary.
 iPage+SCV operation
Adjust the parameter [Thickness] in iPage+ screen when SCV imaging is needed.

5.10.8.2 Basic Screen & Operation

Image Optimization 5-57

 <1> A plane (the current <2> B plane <3> C plane
reference image)
<4> Central slice line (Current <5> Slice line <6> Space between two slice
active slice) lines
<7> Y-axis <8> X-axis <9> Slice position (to the central
slice)
<10> Slice order number <11> Central slice <12> Active slice be highlighted in
mark green

 Layout
The system supports several types of displaying layout: 2*2, 3*3, 4*4 and 5*5, touch the
corresponding icon on the touch screen to select, and the selection [Slice Number] changes
accordingly.
 Reference image
Tap [A], [B], or [C] to select the reference image.
 Slice and slice line
 Central slice: the central slice line corresponding plane are the central slice, which is
marked with a green “*” at the upper left corner of the image.

 Tap to place the slice lines vertically, and touch to place the slice lines
horizontally.
 Active slice: the green slice line corresponding plane is the active slice, which is marked
with a green box. The default active slice is the central slice.
 Slice order number: indicating the order of the slices, the order of central slice is “0”, the
slices before the central slice are marked with negative integral numbers, and the slices
after the central slice are marked with positive integral numbers.
 Slice position (to the central slice): displayed at the upper left corner of each image,
indicating the position of each image (such as -6mm, -3mm, 3mm, 6mm).
 Coordinate axis: indicated on the A, B, C three reference images, match together with the
central slice line, and will move accordingly with the central slice line.
 Slice shifting
Roll the trackball to shift the crossing point of central axis up/down, left/right, and the slice lines
will shift accordingly with the crossing point.
Rotate the knob under [Range Pos] on the touch screen to fine-tune slice lines horizontally.
 Slice position
Rotate the knob under [Slice position] to move the active slice line (green) either forward or
backward within the range, then the corresponding slice will be highlighted in green.
 Spacing
The value is displayed at the upper right side of the slice, unit: mm. Adjust it through rotating
the knob under [Spacing].
 Slices number
Change slices number as necessary using the knob under [Slices Number] on the touch
screen.
 Thickness
Rotate the knob under [Thickness] to adjust the SCV thickness. When the thickness value is
larger than zero, the SCV function is on. (NOTE: thickness cannot be larger than Spacing)

5-58 Image Optimization

 Figures below are the effect before and after the SCV function is turned on. You can see the
body structure within the range of the thickness is added to the image after the SCV function is
on.

Before

After
 Image rotation
Rotate <M>, <PW>, <C> to perform axial rotation or rotate <4D> knob to adjust the nearest
VOI section (cut plane) position.
For details, refer to descriptions in Static 3D.

Image Optimization 5-59

  Image zooming
Same as Static 3D image zooming.
 Hide/show reference image
The system displays 3 standard sectional images (A plane, B plane, C plane) on the left side

indicating the position of the slice lines; tap to hide the 3 reference images, and then
slices are displayed on the whole image area.
 Quick switch to single display
Select a certain slice, double click <Set> to see the slice full screen, and double click <Set>
again to return to the original display format.
 Reset Ori.
Tap [Reset Ori.] to reset the orientation and zoom status of the image.
 Comment & Body Mark
Operations are the same as those in the other modes.
 Measurement
Measurement can be done on any slice when it is in the single format display.

5.10.9 SCV+
SCV+ is SCV (Slice Contrast View) +CMPR (Curved MPR).
SCV imaging can reduce speckle noise and improve contrast resolution as well as enhance signal-noise
ratio, which helps in discovering diffuse pathology in organs.
The curved MPR function allows straightening of a curved surface/anatomy. In clinical application,
this is usually used for imaging fetal spine, as illustrated below.
NOTE: SCV+ imaging is an option, and it is not available in Smart 3D mode.

5.10.9.1 Basic Procedures

 SCV operation
1. Acquire necessary 3D/4D data.
2. Tap [SCV+] tab on the touch screen to enter SCV imaging, and the system displays three
section images in A, B and C window.
3. Rotate the knob under [Thickness] on the touch screen to adjust imaging thickness.
4. Save images as necessary.
 SCV+CMPR operation
1. Enter SCV+.
2. Tap [A Plane], [B Plane] or [C Plane] on touch screen to select current window.
3. Tap [CMPR] on touch screen to turn on the CMPR function. Window A on main screen
displays the current window and three other windows are blank. Select reference section,
perform rotation and shifting operations to adjust image.
4. Tap [1], [2], or [3] button in Active Quadrant on touch screen.
5. Select trace options: tap [Line], [Trace] or [Spline] on the touch screen.
6. Draw on the reference image. You can draw three curves at most and the CMPR imaging for
the curve are displayed in the selected [1], [2] or [3] window respectively as shown in figure
below.

5-60 Image Optimization

7. Perform rotation and shifting operation to reference line.
8. Save images as necessary.

5.10.9.2 Operation Controls

SCV
 Current Quadrant
Tap [A], [B] and [C] to select current active section image.
 Reset
Click [All] in Reset field to reset parameters, orientation and zooming status.

CMPR
 Trace Options
 Line
1. Tap [Line] on the touch screen.
2. Rotate the trackball to place the cursor and press right <Set> key to fix the starting point,
rotate the trackball to extend the line and press right <Set> key again to finish drawing; or you
can press left <Set> key to reset starting point.
3. After line is finished, press left <Set> key to change line position.
Tap [Reset Curve] to cancel current drawing.
 Trace
1. Tap [Trace] on the touch screen.
2. Rotate the trackball to place the cursor and press right <Set> key to fix the starting point, move
the cursor along the target to trace the outline, and press right <Set> again to finish tracing.
During tracing, press left <Set> to cancel a series of tracing, or you can roll the trackball
backwards to delete latest tracing.
3. After tracing, press left <Set> key to change tracing outline position.
Tap [Reset Curve] to cancel current drawing.
 Spline
1. Tap [Spline] on the touch screen.
2. Rotate the trackball to place the cursor and press right <Set> key to fix the starting point, move
the cursor along the area of interest and press right <Set> to anchor several reference points;
or press left <Set> to cancel a series of lines.
3. Press <Set> twice to set the end point of the spline.
4. After tracing, press left <Set> key to change tracing outline position.

Image Optimization 5-61

 Tap [Reset Curve] to cancel current drawing.

Other Operations
 Single image zoom
Press <3D> to view single SCV image.
 Zoom in
Same as these in 3D/4D mode.
 Rotation
Rotate <M>, <PW>, <C> to perform X/Y/Z rotation or rotate <4D> knob to adjust the nearest VOI
section (cut plane) position.
 Comment and Body Mark
Same as these in other modes.
 Section image (MPR) measurement.
2D related measurement can be performed on MPR. For details, please refer to [Advanced
Volume].

5.10.10 Color 3D
Color 3D imaging provides more visualized flow information, especially in heart and kidney
applications, which is useful when observing cardiovascular diseases.
Color 3D is an option.

5.10.10.1 Basic Procedures for Color 3D

1. Enter color 3D image acquisition preparation status:
(1) Obtain a feasible Power/Color image with the volume probe.

(2) Press to enter 3D/4D image acquisition preparation status.

2. Set the acquisition, display the related parameters, and select the acquisition mode. See
“5.10.3.1 Basic Procedures for Static 3D Imaging” for details.
3. Press <Update> to begin image acquisition.
4. After the acquisition is complete, the system enters image view status. Here you can perform
operations such as image edit and storage.
5. Save the image as required.
The Color 3D feature is available in Smart 3D, Static 3D and STIC modes.

5.10.10.2 Operation Controls

Parameter Description
Function: you can choose to display only color images or grayscale images,
Display or to mix them.
Range: VR, MPR, B, C, B&C.
Function: to determine the color information displayed on grayscale images.
Priority
Range: 1-100.
Function: to eliminate color noise and motion items.
Threshold Range: 0%-100%.
Affects MPR as well as VR.

5-62 Image Optimization

 Parameter Description
Function: to set the transparency value for VR rendering.
Opacity
Range: 0%-100%.
Function: to smooth the Color image and erase items by time averaging.
Smooth Range: 0-10.
Affects MPR as well as VR.
Function: to adjust the mix percentage of grayscale information and color
Mix information. When the display format is 2D&C, you can adjust this parameter.
Range: 0-100%.
Image Zooming Same as in 3D/4D mode.
Comments & Body
The operations are the same as those in the other modes.
Marks
2D related measurements can be performed on MPR. For details, see
MPR [Advanced Volume].
Measurement
Tip: You cannot perform measurement in acquisition preparation status.

5.10.11 Smart Volume

The system provides a fast volume calculation method, using computer technology to define and
enclose a boundary of the target within the ROI area (the computer technology allows the
ultrasound system to fit an ellipsoid that can be most approximate to the target) and then
calculating this volume. It can be used to measure the volume of the mass, gestational sac,
bladder or gall bladder.
Smart Volume is an option, and is not available for Smart 3D image.

The Smart Volume result is provided for reference only, not for
CAUTION: confirming diagnoses.

5.10.11.1 Basic Procedure for Smart Volume

1. Acquire the necessary 3D/4D data.
2. Touch the [Smart-V] tab on the touch screen to enter Smart Volume. The system is in “Edit
VOI” status (the [Edit VOI] button is highlighted in green).
3. Set the VOI position and size, and touch [Calc] (after touching the button, the button is
highlighted in green to indicate the status).
4. The system starts to calculate.
5. Auto-calculation is completed:
 There are green solid curves enclosing the target region in each MPR image (A, B, C)
window.
 The 3D image (VR) displays the image of the target region in red.
 The parameter area in the top right screen displays the calculation result.
NOTE: To ensure the accuracy of the result, ensure that the VOI position and size setting
has entirely enclosed the target and is approximate to the target before using the
Smart Volume function.

Image Optimization 5-63

 5.10.11.2 Results Display

After calculating, the following result will be displayed in the top-right part of the screen.
Where L, W and H represent 3 diameter lengths of the fitting ellipsoid.
V represents the calculated volume value.

5.10.11.3 Operation Controls

Edit the VOI (Volume of Interest)
Adjusting the VOI box size and position selects the volume data needed for calculation.
(1) Touch [Edit VOI] on the touch screen to turn it on (green highlighted status).
(2) Select the desired MPR image by touching [A], [B] or [C].
(3) Roll the trackball to adjust the VOI position and size, and press <Set> to switch between
the adjusting statuses. Or, rotate the <4D> knob on the control panel to adjust the section
image position.

Accept VOI
After touching [Calc] to be on, the system starts calculation.

Reset Curve
Parameter Description
Reset Ori. To reset the volume rotation, shifting and zooming to its original status.
Reset Curve /
Reset All /

Zoom
Same as for 3D/4D image zooming.

Comments and Body Marks

The operations are the same as those in the other modes.

MPR measurement.
2D related measurements can be performed on MPRs. For details, see [Advanced Volume].

5.10.12 iLive
iLive brings you a better imaging experience by adding a light rendering effect to the traditional
method. It supports the point lighting mode, parallel lighting mode as well as the torch lighting
mode, allowing human tissue texture to be revealed more clearly.
iLive is an option, and is available under Smart 3D, Static 3D and 4D modes. To use the iLive
function, you must configure the Smart 3D module or the 4D module.

5-64 Image Optimization

To Activate iLive
1. Enter 3D/4D image viewing status, or double-click the saved 3D/4D cine file in the iStation or
Review screen.
2. Tap [iLive] on the touch screen to turn the function on, and adjust the parameters.
Imaging using iLive
1. Select the imaging mode:

Use the ordinary probe and press to enter Smart 3D.

Or, use 4D probe and press or to enter 4D mode or Static 3D mode.

2. Select the render mode to be iLive by touching the touch screen, and set the related
parameters (quality and angle, etc.).
3. Press <Update> to begin acquisition.
4. The system finishes acquisition and enters the image viewing screen.
In image review status, you can perform operations such as VOI setting, image editing,
comment adding, body mark adding, etc.

5. Or press <B> or / to exit the mode.

5.10.12.1 Operation Controls

Adjustable parameters for iLive are on the touch screen.

Shading
Adjusts the effect of shadowing and scattering. When the selected level is 0, the rendered image
will be bright and sharp, and the shadow border will be clear while the area of the shadow will be

Image Optimization 5-65

 relatively small. As the level increases, the rendered image will become warmer but the details
remain the same. Also, the shadow border will be smoother while the shadow area will be large
Light source adjustment
This function adjusts the position of the light source toward the VR image.
Select the direction by touching the buttons under the “Light Position” box.

At the front At the back

On the left On the right

At the
bottom left At the top right

You can also make fine adjustments by tapping [Move Light] and rolling the trackball to adjust.
Grad View
After this function is activated, VR details will be revealed and enhanced.
Other operation controls and adjusting methods are similar to those in 3D/4D mode.

Lighting Mode
Basic Procedures
1. Tap “ ” on the [iLive] to enter the iLive settings interface.
2. Tap the desired lighting mode.
a) If necessary, tap “ ” on the lighting mode to adjust parameters for the selected lighting
mode.
b) After parameter settings, tap [Exit XXX] to exit the lighting mode settings.
c) Tap [Refresh] to refresh the thumbnails on the iLive settings interface.
3. Tap [Return] to apply the selected lighting mode.
Operation Controls for Lighting Mode Settings
Parameter Description
VL Saturation Adjust the saturation for light 1/2/3.
VL Hue Adjust the color for light 1/2/3.
Adjust the distance for light 1/2/3 when the light source is set
to torch or point.
VL Distance
The larger the distance, the more the illuminated part on the
surrounding area of the image; vice versa.
Adjust the angle for light 1/2/3 when the light source is set to
torch.
VL Angle
The larger the angle, the larger the scope of light beam, and
the larger the illuminated area; vice versa.

5-66 Image Optimization

 Parameter Description
Reset Classic/
IntPoint/
ExtPoint/
Reset the lighting mode to the original status.
Parallel/ Torch/
3-Light/ User 1/
User 2
Copy the lighting mode to customized lighting mode “User 1”
Copy to
or “User 2”

Other Operations
Zoom
Same as in 3D/4D mode.
Rotation
Roll the trackball to view sectional images as necessary. Rotate <M>, <PW>, <C> to perform axial
rotation or rotate the <4D> knob to adjust the nearest VOI section (cut plane) position.
Comments and Body Marks
Same as in other modes.

5.10.13 Smart FLC (Smart Follicles Calculation)

CAUTION: Smart FLC result is provided for reference only, not for confirming a diagnosis.

NOTE: Smart FLC is an optional function, and it is not available in Smart 3D mode.

5.10.13.1 Basic Procedures for Smart FLC

1. Acquire necessary 3D/4D data and freeze.
2. Tap [Smart FLC] tab on the touch screen to enter Smart FLC, and the system is in the “Edit
ROI” status ([Edit ROI] button is highlighted in green);
3. Set the position and size of the ROI box.
4. Tap [Calc] on the touch screen.
5. Auto calculation is finished:
 Section image (A, B, C) is enclosed with colored lines and the color corresponds to the
follicle in VR window.
 3D image (VR);
 Results on the right of the screen are displayed in a table.
V: Volume
d1, d2, d3: diameters of the follicle
MD: Follicle Diam

Image Optimization 5-67

 NOTE: To ensure the correctness of the results, please select an image with clear follicle
boundary when entering smart FLC.

5.10.13.2 Operation Controls

Edit ROI
Same as the operation in ROI editing in Smart-V.

Edit/ Undo
Tap [Edit] on touch screen to turn on the editing function. It supports dividing, merging, adding and
deleting of the follicle.
Tap [Undo], [Redo] or [Undo All] on touch screen to undo, redo or cancel previous editing.

Zoom
Same as those in 3D/4D mode.

Annotation and Body Mark

Same as those in other modes.

Measurement
2D related measurement can be performed on MPR. For details, please refer to [Advanced
Volume].

Save the image

The Smart FLC supports saving single-frame image only, does not support saving multi-frame cine
file.

5.10.14 Smart Planes CNS

The doctor finds fetus’s sagittal view by judgments on image features, and then makes an
observation. The fetus’s s sagittal view is hard to be detected or cannot be detected sometimes
because of the fetus's move inside.

5-68 Image Optimization

Taking the key anatomical tissues and organs's features from 3D data of fetus’s intracranial, Smart
Planes CNS is a mode-wise technology, which detects the middle of the fetus’s sagittal view,
transverse plane of thalami, transverse plane of lateral ventricles and transverse plane of
cerebellum. It helps the doctors find the sagittal view rapidly and is easy for doctors accessing the
anatomical structure on sagittal view. (such as corpus callosum, cerebellar vermis, etc).
NOTE:
Smart Planes CNS is an option, which does not support Smart 3D mode.

5.10.14.1 Basic Procedures for Smart Planes CNS

1. Acquire necessary 3D data.
2. Tap [S-Planes CNS]. There are four views detected by the system, which includes TCP, TTP,
MSP and TVP.

3. Adjust the brightness, 3D iClear and the thickness to obtain the image.
4. Tap [MSP]. There are A/B/C images appearing on the screen. The sagittal plane of the fetus
appears on window C.
Rotate A, B or C plane respectively, or rotate <4D> to adjust each plane.

Image Optimization 5-69

 NOTE: To ensure the correctness of the result, please make sure the cerebral midline on the
anatomical plane is displayed clearly and ROI enclose the whole cranial region.
5. Tap [Accept] to accept the edit to the MSP. The system recalculates the TCP, TTP and TVP
according to MSP’s position. The position and the angle for TCP, TTP and TVP appear on
MSP plane.
6. Tap [TCP]/[TTP]/[TVP] to select the plane, and rotate <M>, <PW> or <C> knob to rotate the
image plane along with X/Y/Z axis. The angle value appears on the right of the image.
7. Rotate the reference line on the MSP plane. See Chapter 5.10.14.2 Other Operations for
details.
8. Tap [Auto Measure]. Tap [Edit] to edit the measurements. See Chapter 5.10.14.2 Other
Operations for details.
9. Click [Auto Comment], the system adds the orientation and the organ comments to the desired
area according to the active ultrasound image. See Chapter 5.10.14.2 Other Operations for
details.
10. Tap [Accept Result] to save the measurements to the report.
11. Add the comment and body mark on the plane. Perform the measurement, and save the
single frame/multi-frame image.

5.10.14.2 Other Operations

Parameter adjusting
 Brightness
Description Adjusting the brightness of the images.
Operation Rotate [Brightness] to adjust the parameter.
The adjusting range is: 0-100% in increment of 2%.
 Thickness
Operation Rotate [Thickness] to adjust the parameter.
The adjusting range is: 0-30 in increment of 1.
Impacts The bigger the value is, the more the thickness information
appears.

5-70 Image Optimization

  3D iClear
Operation Tap [3D iClear] to adjust the parameter.
The adjusting range is: 1-7 in increment of 1.
Impacts The bigger the value of iClear is, the less the noise becomes.

Auto Comment
The system adds the orientation and the organ comments to the desired area according to the active
ultrasound image.
1. Acquire 3D data. Tap [S-Planes CNS] to enter the automatic detection of the mode.
2. Click [Auto Comment]. The comments appear on the image automatically.
Each of them is:
 The orientation comments describe the location of the plane, referring to A (anterior), P
(posterior), L (Left), R (right), U (up), D (down).
 Organ comments describe the position of the organ, referring to CSP (cavum septum
pellucidum), T (thalamus), CH (cerebellar hemisphere), CV (cerebellar vermis), CM
(cisterna magna), LV (lateral ventricles).

3. Rotate [Font Size] knob to adjust the font size of the comment.
4. See “9.1 Comments” for adding, moving or deleting the comments.
5. Save the image.
6. Click [Auto Comment] again to clean them.

Axis Rotation
1. Acquire 3D data. Tap [S-Planes CNS] to enter the automatic detection of the mode.
2. Tap [TCP]/[TTP]/[TVP] to select the plane, and rotate <M>, <PW> or <C> knob to rotate the
image plane along with X/Y/Z axis. The angle value appears on the right of the image.
NOTE: it supports the rotation to the saved image.

Reference line rotating

1. Acquire 3D data. Tap [S-Planes CNS] to enter the automatic detection of the mode.

Image Optimization 5-71

 2. Press <Cursor> to show the cursor. Move the cursor over the red line of the MSP plane. Press
left <Set> to select the red reference line after the cursor becomes hand-shaped. Then, the
red reference line becomes dotted line.
3. Move the trackball left or downwards. The reference line rotates anticlockwise along the center.
TCP image rotates clockwise along the Y-axis, and the value of Y-axis becomes bigger.
4. Move the trackball right or downwards. The reference line rotates clockwise along the center.
TCP image rotates anticlockwise along the Y-axis, and the value of Y-axis becomes smaller.
5. The operations to green reference line and blue reference line are the same.TTP rotates along
Y-axis when green reference line rotating. TVP rotates along Y-axis when blue reference line
rotating.

MSP editing
1. Acquire 3D data. Tap [S-Planes CNS] to enter the automatic detection of the mode.
2. Tap [MSP]. There are A, B and C views appearing on the screen, in which C plane refers to MSP,
and A and B planes refer to MPR plane.
3. Rotate A, B or C plane respectively, or rotate <4D> to adjust each plane.
4. Tap [Accept] to accept the edit to the MSP. The system recalculates the TCP, TTP and TVP
according to MSP’s position. The position and the angle for TCP, TTP and TVP appear on MSP
plane.
5. Click [Cancel] to cancel the editing result.

Automatic Measurement
There are 6 measurements:
TCP supports the measurements on TCD, cerebral fossa pool;
TTP supports the measurements on BPD, OFD, HC;
TVP plane supports the measurement on LVW.
1. Acquire 3D data. Tap [S-Planes CNS] to enter the automatic detection of the mode.
2. Tap [Auto Measure] to show the caliper and the measurement number. The measurement results
appear on the right of the screen.

NOTE The automatic measurement results appear only for these having the same
characteristics on the planes.
3. Tap [Edit] to edit the measurements. The measurements on the right of the screen update in
real time.

5-72 Image Optimization

 a) Tap [Edit] to modify the measurements. The caliper becomes green.
Or, press <Set> to activate the caliper (becoming green).
b) Move the trackball and press <Update> to modify the length and the position of the
caliper.
c) Press <Set> to confirm the caliper. The caliper becomes white. [Edit] is off.
NOTE:
Once the automatic measurements are completed, the operations to axial rotation, reference line
rotation, parameter adjustment, MSP editing, zooming/panning, dual/quad-split display will remove
the measurement results.

Reset
 All planes
Acquire 3D data. Tap [S-Planes CNS] to enter the automatic detection of the mode. Reset the
following operations:
 Tap [All Planes] to reset the planes. The position and the angle to TCP, TTP, TVP,
MSP and reference line return to the initial condition.
 Tap [All Planes] to reset the planes. The position to TCP, TTP, TVP, MSP and
reference line returns to the last MSP condition. The angle to CP, TTP, TVP, MSP and
reference line returns to 0°.
 Current plane
Acquire 3D data. Tap [S-Planes CNS] to enter the automatic detection of the mode. Reset the
following operations:
 Tap [Current Plane] to reset the plane. The position of the current plane returns to the
initial condition. The angle of the current plane returns to 0°.
 Tap [Current Plane] to reset the current plane. The position and the angle to the
current plane returns to the last MSP condition.

Other related Operations

 Zooming/panning adjustment
Same as these in 3D/4D mode.
 Measurement, comments, and body mark
Same as these in other modes.
 Hiding the reference
Tap to hide or show the reference line.
 Hiding the measurement
Tap to hide or show the measurement.
 Switching between the single and quad-split display

Press and between the single and quad-split display.

5.10.15 Smart Face

NOTE: Smart Face is only used for obtaining fetal face features, not for confirming a
diagnosis.

This feature allows the system to recognize fetal face and remove the shading obstacle data
automatically, then display the face in a recommended viewing angle.
Note:
Tips: 4D module and OB package should be installed first.

Image Optimization 5-73

 Smart Face is an option.

Basic Procedures
1. Acquire Static 3D image or frozen 4D single-frame image of fetal face.
2. Tap [SmartFace] to enter the function and the system adjust fetal face angle (fetal head facing
up) automatically and remove the shading obstacle data.

Parameter adjusting
Parameters under Smart Face are similar to those under Static 3D mode.
 FaceContact
Description The higher the value, the more adjacent the VR image is to the fetal face,
and the more obstacles cleared.
The lower the value, the further the VR image is to the fetal face, and the
less obstacles cleared.
Operation Rotate [FaceContact] to adjust the parameter.
The adjusting range is: -15-15 in increment of 1.
 VR Orientation
Description Rotate the image quickly.
Operation Adjust in VR Orientation: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°.

5.11 Contrast Imaging

2D contrast imaging is used in conjunction with ultrasound contrast agents to enhance imaging of
blood flow and microcirculation. Injected contrast agents re-emit incident acoustic energy at a
harmonic frequency much more efficient than the surrounding tissue. Blood containing the contrast
agent stands out brightly against a dark background of normal tissue.
Contrast imaging is an option.
The C5-2E, C5-1E, SC6-1E probes support contrast imaging.

1. Set MI index by instructions in the contrast agent accompanied

Caution: manual.
2. Read contrast agent accompanied manual carefully before using
contrast function.

NOTE: Make sure to finish parameter setting before injecting the agent into the patient to avoid
affecting image consistency. This is because the acting time of the agent is limited.
The applied contrast agency should be compliant with the relevant local regulations.

5.11.1 Basic Procedures for Contrast Imaging

To perform a successful contrast imaging, you should start with an optimized 2D image and have
the target region in mind. To perform a contrast imaging:
1. Select an appropriate probe, and perform 2D imaging to obtain the target image, and then fix
the probe.

5-74 Image Optimization

2. Tap [Contrast] on the touch screen or press user-defined key for contrast imaging (Assign a
key as user-defined contrast imaging: the setting path is "[Setup] → [System] → [Key Config]",
see “12.1.6 Key Configuration” chapter for details) to enter the contrast imaging mode.
3. Adjust the acoustic power experientially to obtain a good image.
Touch [Dual Live] to be “On” to activate the dual live function. Observe the tissue image to find
the target view.
4. Inject the contrast agent, and set [Timer 1] at “ON” to start the contrast timing. When the timer
begins to work, the time will be displayed on the screen.
5. Observe the image, use the touch screen button of [Pro Capture] and [Retro Capture] or the
user-defined key (usually “Save1” and “Save2”) to save the images. Press <Freeze> to end
the live capture.
Perform several live captures if there are more than one interested sections.
6. At the end of a contrast imaging, set [Timer 1] as “OFF” to exit the timing function. Perform
procedures 3-5 if necessary.
For every single contrast imaging procedure, use [Timer 2] for timing.
If necessary, activate destruction function by touching [Destruct] as “ON” to destruct the micro-
bubbles left by the last contrast imaging; or to observe the reinfusion effect in a continuous
agent injecting process.
7. Exit contrast imaging.
Tap [Contrast] on the touch screen or press user-defined key to exit the contrast imaging
mode; or, press <B> button to return to B mode.

5.11.2 Contrast Image Parameters

5.11.2.1 Parameter Area Display
When entering contrast imaging mode, the screen displays the contrast image, and if [Dual Live]
item on the touch screen is “ON”, both the contrast image (marked with “ ”) and tissue image
(marked with “ ”) are displayed (the two window position can be changed). Parameter area
displays as follows:
Type Parameter Description
FCH Contrast frequency.
D Depth.
G Gain.
Contrast FR Frame rate.
DR Dynamic Range.
iTouch iTouch status
iClear iClear level
G Gain
DR Dynamic Range.
Tissue
iTouch iTouch status
iClear iClear level
Zoom Z Magnification factor

Image Optimization 5-75

 Type Parameter Description
Real time:
In real time mode, the time displayed is the elapsed time.
Timing (If timer is
“ON”) In freeze mode, the timer stops working, the elapsed time
Freeze:
is displayed.

5.11.2.2 Image Optimization

To adjust contrast image as well as tissue image, touch the corresponding tab on the touch screen
first.
Parameters in Contrast mode are similar to those in B mode; please refer to B chapter for details,
special Contrast imaging parameters are introduced in the following.

5.11.2.3 Timer
The two timers are used to record total time of contrast imaging and single time of one contrast
exam.
After the image is frozen, Timer 1 is still timing, and after unfreezing the image, the corresponding
time can be seen.
Timer 2 stops timing when one contrast exam is frozen, and after unfreezing the image, the Timer
2 is off.

NOTE: The starting time displayed may be inconsistent with the actual one due to system error
or some other man-made mistakes; please check the agent-injecting time.
Set [Timer 1] as “ON” to start the timing at the moment you inject the contrast agent. Here, the
screen displays the times at the lower right corner.
 The time begins at 0.
 In live mode, there displays the elapsed time. For example, , it means the elapsed
time is 8s.
 Freeze the image during the timing, the timer stops working, and there displays the elapsed
time. For example, , it means the elapsed time between begin timing and freeze the
image is 9s.
 Set [Timer 1] or [Timer 2] as “OFF”, the timer discontinues its work.

5.11.2.4 Micro-bubble Destruction

Function: destruct the micro-bubbles left by the last contrast imaging; or to observe the reinfusion
effect in a continuous agent injecting process.
 Entering: touch [Destruct] on the touch screen to enable the micro-bubble destruction function.
 Parameters: set the parameters through the touch screen/menu.
 DestructAP: adjust the destruct acoustic power by the touch screen/menu item.
 DestructTime: adjust the destruct time by the touch screen/menu item.
Use the contrast imaging according to the residual level of the micro-
Caution: bubbles, using contrast imaging continuously may result in human harm.

5.11.2.5 Dual Live

In live mode or freeze mode, set touch screen item [DualLive] as “ON” to enable dual live function.
Both the contrast image (marked with “ ”) and tissue image (marked with “ ”) are displayed

5-76 Image Optimization

(the position can be changed). Meanwhile, you can switch to [Contrast] or [Tissue] page to adjust
the corresponding parameters.
Tips:
 In dual live mode, the screen displays the contrast image and tissue image
 In freeze mode, there displays only one cine review progress bar as the contrast image
and tissue image are reviewed synchronously.
 Image position
Click [CEUSPos] on the touch screen to adjust the position of the contrast image. The image
displays at the left side of the screen.

5.11.2.6 Mix Map

This function is to mix the contrast image with the tissue image, so that interested contrast regions
can be located.
Touch [Mix] to select different mixing mode, and select different maps by knobs under [Gray
Map]/[Tint Map]/[Mix Map] on the touch screen.
 When dual live function is on, you can see the mixed effect on the contrast image.
 When dual live function is off, you can see the mixed effect on the full screen image.
Select the map through the [Mix Map] item.

5.11.2.7 iTouch
On contrast status, you can also get a better image effect by using iTouch function.
 Press <iTouch> on the control panel to turn on the function.
The symbol of iTouch will be displayed in the image parameter area in the upper right corner of the
screen once press <iTouch>.
Select different levels of iTouch effect through [iTouch] on the touch screen.
 Long press the <iTouch> key to exit the function.

5.11.2.8 Image Saving

 Live capture
In live mode, you can save the interested images by touching [Pro Capture] and [Retro
Capture].
 Cine saving
In live mode, press the <Freeze> key on the control panel to enter cine review status.

5.11.3 Left Ventricular Opacification

Basic Procedures for LVO:
1. Acquire ECG signal；

2. Press or tap an appropriate probe for quick switch in the touch screen to open
Probe/Exam Mode selecting dialogue box;
3. Select an appropriate probe and LVO exam mode;
4. Workflow of LVO is similar to abdomen contrast imaging.

5.11.4 Measurement, Comment and Body Mark

The system supports image measurement, comment and body mark functions. For the details,
please refer to the relevant sections.

Image Optimization 5-77

 5.11.5 Micro Flow Enhancement
MFE superimposes and processes multiple frames of contrast image during the cycle; it indicates
tiny vessel structures in detail by recording and imaging microbubbles.

MFE switch
During real-time scanning, touch [MFE] on the touch screen to start MFE imaging (MFE key is
highlighted in green).
Tips: MFE imaging is available only for real-time imaging or cine file of auto review mode. If an
MFE cine is reviewed manually, MFE effect cannot be displayed.

MFE Period
Rotate the knob under [MFE Period] on the touch screen to select different imaging period suitable
for current flow. Where, MAX is the maximum superimposing effect.
NOTE: In MFE status, patient should lie down and hold breath, and transducer should be kept
still.

5.11.6 Contrast Imaging QA

Contrast Imaging QA images are provided for reference only, not for
CAUTION: confirming a diagnosis.

Contrast Imaging QA adopts time-intensity analysis to obtain perfusion quantification information of

velocity flow. This is usually performed on both suspected tissue and normal tissue to get specific
information of the suspected tissue.
1. Perform image scanning, freeze the image and select a range of images for analysis; or select
a desired cine loop from the stored images.
 Images from the current scan session (already in freeze mode) or from a saved image
loop can be used.
2. Clicking the “Tissue” or “Contrast”. Touch [Contrast QA] on the touch screen page to activate
the function.
3. Mark out the interested part (ROI).
If necessary, perform curve fitting on the time-intensity curve.
4. Analyze the parameters of the curve, or perform B measurement.
5. Save the curved image, export the data and do parameter analysis.
6. Click [Exit] on the touch screen to exit the contrast imaging QA.

5-78 Image Optimization

5.11.6.1 Contrast QA Screen

1 2

(For reference only)

1---Contrast cineloop window
Sample area: indicates sampling position of the analysis curve. The sample area is color-
coded, 8 (maximum) sample areas can be indicated.
2---B Cineloop window
 Sample areas are linked in the contrast cineloop window and B cineloop window.
3---Time-intensity curve
 Y axis represents the intensity (unit: dB), while X axis represents the time (unit: s).
 Frame marker: a white line that is perpendicular to the X axis, can be moved horizontally
left to right (right to left) by rolling the trackball.
 Click the check box beside the ROI to set if to hide or to display the QA curve.

5.11.6.2 Basic Operations of Contrast QA

QA Analysis Image Range
The system set the starting time and ending time of the cine to be first frame and last frame of QA
analysis range.

Setting ROI
This function is used for setting the target.
Up to eight ROIs can be saved on the reference image, with the corresponding eight traces plotted
simultaneously on the graph. Each ROI display has a different color, and its corresponding trace
data is plotted using that same color.
There are two different methods for determining the shapes of the sample area: Standard ROI and
Freehand ROI.
 Trace ROI
1. Touch [Trace ROI] on the touch screen.
2. Review the image to a desired frame.

Image Optimization 5-79

 3. Rotate the trackball to position the image display cursor over the reference image(s).
4. Press the <Set> key to fix the starting point.
5. Press the <Set> key, and roll the trackball to depict the ROI. When a suitable ROI has been
drawn, confirm the ROI by double clicking <Set> key, press <Clear> key to cancel the last
point.
The system automatically links the start point to the end point by drawing a straight line
between them.

 Ellipse ROI
1. Touch [Ellipse ROI] on the touch screen, when the cursor is evolved in the image review area,
it displays as a color-coded ellipse.
2. Review the image to a desired frame.
3. Use the trackball to position the caliper on the reference image at the start point. Press <Set>
to fix the start point.
4. Trace the outline of the desired ROI by moving the cursor with the trackball.
5. Press the <Set> key to fix the end point, and roll the trackball to depict the ROI. When a
suitable ROI has been drawn, confirm the ROI by double pressing <Set> key, press <Clear>
key to cancel the last point.
 Delete ROI
Press <Clear> key to clear out the last ROI; touch [Delete All] on the touch screen to clear out
all ROIs.
The corresponding traces for the deleted ROIs are erased from the plot.

Motion Tracking
Click [Motion Tracking] (the button is highlighted) on the touch screen to turn on the function.
This function provides a motion compensated ROI as precise time-intensity information can be
acquired using active tracking. It can enhance the calculation accuracy as reducing the impact of
probe or patient respiratory movement.
Tips: Elliptical ROIs can be positioned in any manner that keeps their center within the image
boundaries. In the case that part of the ROI is outside the image boundary, only data from within
the image boundary is used for calculating the mean intensity value.

X Scale
Rotate the knob under [X Scale] on the touch screen to choose different value, so that the X scale
display manner will be changed. This function can be used to track detailed tissue information.

Export/Save Trace Data

1. Touch [Export] on the touch screen.
2. Select the drive and enter the file name in the displayed window.
3. Select [OK] to save the data and return to the QA Analysis screen.
 All displayed ROI traces are saved in the exported file.
 The parameters are included in the trace file if the user has fixed a ROI.
 After the exporting is succeeded, a .BMP format image is displayed in the thumbnail area
at the lower part of the screen.
 Only data from the user selected image range is included in the exported trace file.

Curve Fitting
The system can calculate characteristic parameters according to curve fitting formula and data,
display fit curve for time-intensity curve, and perform data analysis on time-intensity curve for data
table.

5-80 Image Optimization

  Touch [Fit Curve] on the touch screen to turn on the function, where color of the fitted
curve is consistent with color of the current ROI curve.
 Touch [Raw Curve] to hide/display raw curve, when the button is highlighted in green, raw
curve is displayed.
 Touch [Table Display] to check parameters.
Parameters calculated include the following:
 GOF (Goodness of Fit): to calculate the fit degree of the curve; range: 0-1, where 1 means
the fit curve fits the raw curve perfectly.
 BI (Base Intensity): basic intensity of no contrast agent perfusion status.
 AT (Arrival Time): time point where contrast intensity appears, generally, the actual time
value is 110% higher than the base intensity.
 TTP (Time To Peak): time when the contrast intensity reaches peak value.
 PI (Peak Intensity): contrast peak intensity.
 AS (Ascending Slope): ascending slope of contrast, the slope between the start point of
lesion perfusion to the peak.
 DT/2: time when the intensity is half the value of the peak intensity.
 DS (Descending Slope): descending slope of the curve.
 AUC (Area Under Curve): to calculate the area under the time-intensity curves during
contrast.

NOTE: If the contrast signal inside the selected ROI does not meet the requirements of gamma
fitting condition, that is the bulleting injection, curve fitting may not be available.

Set Fit Range

You can set range for the fit curve. After the range is set, the system displays fit curve within the
range only. Roll the trackball to the time-intensity curve to move the frame marker position.
 Set starting point of the fit curve: roll the trackball to select the starting time and click [Set
Fit Start] on the soft menu.
 Set end of the fit curve: roll the trackball to select the end time and click [Set Fit End] on
the soft menu.

5.12 iScape View (Real-time Panoramic

Imaging)
The iScape panoramic imaging feature extends your field of view by piecing together multiple B
images into a single, extended B image. Use this feature, for example, to view a complete hand or
thyroid.
When scanning, move the probe linearly and acquire a series of B images. The system pieces
these images together into a single, extended B image in real time. The system also supports out-
and-back image piecing.
After obtaining the extended image, you can rotate it, move it linearly, magnify it, add comments or
body marks, or perform measurements on the extended image.
The system provides a color iScape function, so you can get more information from extended
images.
iScape imaging is an option.

Image Optimization 5-81

 1. iScape panoramic imaging constructs an extended image from
CAUTION: individual image frames. The quality of the resulting image is user-
dependent and requires operator skill and additional practice to become
fully proficient. Therefore, the measurement results can be inaccurate.
Exercise caution when you perform measurements in iScape mode.
A smooth and even speed will help produce optimal image results.
2. Color iScape images are provided for reference only, not for
confirming diagnoses.
Tip:
 iScape is an optional module, the function is available only if the module has been
installed on the ultrasound system.
 Displaying the biopsy guideline is not allowed in iScape mode.

5.12.1 Basic Procedures for iScape Imaging

To perform iScape imaging:
1. Connect an appropriate iScape-compatible probe. Make sure there is enough coupling gel
along the scan path.
2. Set the user-defined key for iScape via the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Key Config]. Press
the user-defined key for iScape or touch [iScape View] on the touch screen directly:
3. Optimize the B mode (Power mode) image:
In the acquisition preparation status, touch the [B] ([Power]) page tab to select B mode (color)
image optimization. Perform measurement or add comments/body marks to the image if
necessary. Tip: in iScape mode, [FOV] is limited to “W.”
4. Image acquisition:
Click the [iScape] page tab to enter the iScape acquisition preparation status. Click [Start
Capture] or press <Update> on the control panel to begin the acquisition. For details, see
“5.12.2 Image Acquisition.”
The system enters image viewing status when the acquisition is completed. You can perform
operations such as parameter adjusting. For details, see “5.12.3 iScape Viewing.”
5. Exit iScape:
 Press <Freeze> or <Update>, or touch [Recapture] on the touch screen to enter image
acquisition status.
 Press the <B> button to return to B mode.

5.12.2 Image Acquisition

To create an iScape image, start with an optimized 2D (color) image. The 2D image serves as the
mid-line for the resulting iScape image.
1. Press the <Update> key or touch [Start Capture] on the touch screen to start the iScape image
capture.
2. Scan slowly to obtain a single extended field of view image. You can also erase and retrace if
the image is not satisfactory.
3. End image capture:
To end the image capture:
 Click [Stop Capture] on the touch screen, or,
 Press the <Update> key, or,
 Wait until the acquisition completes automatically.
After the acquisition is completed, the panoramic image will be displayed and the system
enters iScape viewing mode.

5-82 Image Optimization

Tip:
 During image acquisition, none of the parameters are adjustable, and functions such as
measurement, comments and body marks are not available.
 ROI: a green box on the image indicating the boundary between the merged images and
the unfinished images.
 Tip on the probe speed: During image slicing, the system gives feedback on the probe's
moving speed in the form of colors and words. The meanings are as follows:
Status ROI Color Tip
Speed too low Blue Moving speed of the probe is too low.
Appropriate Green None.
Speed too high Red Moving speed of the probe is too high.
Guidance and precautions for even movement:
 Make sure there is enough coupling gel along the scan path.
 Always move the probe slowly and steadily.
 Continuous contact is required throughout the length of the extended image. Do not lift the
probe from the skin's surface.
 Always keep the probe perpendicular to the skin's surface. Do not rock, rotate or tilt the
probe during the scan.
 The system accommodates a reasonable range of motion velocity. Do not make abrupt
changes in motion speed.
 Deeper scans generally require reduced acquisition speed.

5.12.3 iScape Viewing

After completing image acquisition, the system performs image splicing and then enters the iScape
viewing mode.
In iScape viewing mode, you can perform the following functions:
 Setting image parameters. For details, see “5.12.3.1 Adjusting Image Parameters.”
 Image zooming. For details, see “5.12.3.2 Image Zooming.”
 Image rotation. For details, see “5.12.3.3 Rotating the Image.”
 Measurement, comments and body marks. For details, see “5.12.3.4 Measurement,
Comments and Body Marks.”

5.12.3.1 Adjusting Image Parameters

In image viewing mode, you can adjust the following parameters:
 Image size
Touch [Actual Size] to display the image in its actual size.
Touch [Fit Size] to display the image in a size that fits the current window. This is the system's
default format.
 Tint map
Press the knob under [Tint Map] to activate the function, then change the effect by rotating the
knob.
 Ruler
Touch [Ruler] on the touch screen to hide or show the ruler around the image.
 Color Display (in Power iScape)
Touch [Color Disp.] on the touch screen to display or hide the color image.
 Color Map (in Power iScape)
Rotate the knob under [Color Map] on the touch screen to select the map, as in Power mode.

Image Optimization 5-83

 5.12.3.2 Image Zooming
Press <Zoom> button on the control panel to enter image zooming mode. Rotate the <Zoom>
button to zoom in/out on the panoramic image.
 Rotate the button clockwise to zoom in on the image.
 Rotate the button counter-clockwise to zoom out on the image.
 Roll the trackball to change the position of the magnified image.
 Press the <Zoom> key again to exit zoom mode.
 When the image displayed is bigger than the image area, the thumbnail is automatically
displayed.

5.12.3.3 Rotating the Image

For the convenience of image viewing, you can rotate the image by rotating the knob under
[Rotation] on the touch screen in increments of 5°.

5.12.3.4 Measurement, Comments and Body Marks

In iScape image viewing status, you can perform measurement, comments and body marks. The
operations are the same as in B mode.

NOTE: 1. The measurement accuracy for spliced images may be degraded - exercise caution
when measurements are performed on an iScape image.
2. If there is a trace during the retracing, do not perform measurement across the
trace.

5.12.3.5 Evaluate Image Quality

Many variables may affect the overall image quality. It is important to evaluate the image content
and quality before an image is used for diagnosis or measurements.

NOTE: iScape panoramic imaging is intended for use by well-trained ultrasound operators or
physicians. The operator must recognize image items that will produce a sub-optimal or
unreliable image.
The following items may produce a sub-optimal image. If the image quality does not meet the
following criteria, you must delete the image and repeat image acquisition.
 The image must be continuous (no part of an image moves suddenly or disappears.)
 No shadow or absent signal along the scan plane.
 Clear profile of anatomy through the entire scan plane without distortion.
 Skin line is continuous.
 The images are captured from the same plane.
 There are no large black areas in the image.

5.12.4 Cine Review

Click [Review Cine] on the touch screen in panoramic image viewing status to enter cine reviewing
mode. In cine reviewing mode, a green frame marker indicates the sequence of the currently
reviewed images in the panoramic image on the left-hand side of screen.
In cine review status:
 Roll the trackball to review the captured images frame by frame.
 Click [Auto Play] to start or end auto play.
 In auto play mode, press/rotate the corresponding knob to change the play speed. When
the speed is off, the system exits auto play mode.

5-84 Image Optimization

  Review to a certain image. Press the knob under [Set Begin] to set the start point. Review
to another image. Press the knob under [Set End] to set the end point. In auto play mode,
the review region is confined to the set start point and end point.
 Click [Return] on the touch screen to exit cine review mode. The panoramic image
displays.
 In cine review mode, press <Freeze> on the control panel to return to the acquisition
preparation status.

5.13 Elastography
Elastography images are provided for reference only, not for
CAUTION: confirming diagnoses.

5.13.1 Strain Elastography

It is produced based on the slight manual-pressure or human respiration in 2D real-time mode. The
tissue hardness of the mass can be determined by the image color and brightness. Besides, the
relative tissue hardness is displayed in quantitative manners.

Elastography imaging is an option.

The L12-3E, L14-6NE, L14-6WE, V11-3E, V11-3BE, L9-3E, DE11-3E, V11-3HE, L14-5WE, L20-5E
probes support the Elastography function.

5.13.1.1 Basic Procedure for Elastography

1. Perform a B scan to locate the region.
2. Touch [Elasto][StrainE] on the touch screen or press the user-defined key for Elastography
or StrainE on the control panel to enter the mode (Set the user-defined key for Elastography or
StrainE via the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Key Config]). Adjust the ROI according to the
actual situation.
 Select the probe according to the experience and actual situation.
 Adjust the image parameters to obtain the optimized image and necessary information.
 Adjust the ROI on the frozen image if necessary.
 Save the image or review the image if necessary.
 Perform measurement or add comments/body marks to the image if necessary.
3. Estimate the hardness of lesions according to the results.
4. Press <B> to return to B mode.
Tip: In Elasto imaging mode, image magnification is not available.

5.13.1.2 Enter/Exit
 Enter
Select [Elasto][StrainE] on the touch screen to enter the mode.
After entering the mode, the system displays two windows in real-time on the screen. The left
one is the 2D image, and the right one is the Elasto image.
 Exit
Press <B> on the control panel or touch [StrainE] on the touch screen to exit the mode.

Image Optimization 5-85

 5.13.1.3 Strain E Curve
The screen displays the pressure curve in real time:

The X-axis represents time and the Y-axis represents pressure.

ROI Adjustment
Description To adjust the width and position of the ROI in Elasto imaging.
Operation When the ROI box is solid line, roll the trackball to change its position.
When the ROI box is a dotted line, roll the trackball to change the size.
Press <Set> to switch between the solid line and the dotted line status.

Smooth
Description To adjust the smooth feature of the Elasto image.
Operation To adjust the image smoothness. Adjust using the [Smooth] item or the mapping-
menu item on the touch screen.
The bigger the value the stronger the effect.

Opacity
Description To adjust the opacity feature of the Elasto image.
Operation Rotate the knob under the [Opacity] item or adjust through the mapping-menu item
on the touch screen.
The bigger the value the stronger the effect.

Invert
Description To invert the E color bar and therefore invert the colors of benign and malignant
tissue.
Operation Touch [Invert] or the mapping-menu item on the touch screen.

Map
Description To select different maps for observation.
Operation Rotate the knob under the [Map] item on the touch screen or adjust through the
mapping-menu item to select the map.

Map Position
Description This feature is used to adjust the up/down position of the map.

Operations Tap [Map Position] on the touch screen to adjust the parameter.
Effects When the E Average function is enabled or disabled, the elasto curve is displayed
based on different statistical amounts.

5-86 Image Optimization

 Display Format
Description Adjust the display format of ultrasound image and the Elasto image.
Operation Tap [H 1:1], [V 1:1], [Full] on the touch screen to adjust.
The system provides 3 types of display format:
H 1:1: right and left display (the real-time ultrasound image appears on the left, and
the elasto image appears on the right);
V 1:1: up down display (the elasto image appears above, and the real-time
ultrasound image appears below).
Full: the elasto image only displayed.
Impacts Adjust according to the actual situation and obtain a desired analysis through
comparison.

Strain Scale
Description Adjust the strain scale of the strain bar in different situations.

Operations Rotate the knob under the [Strain Scale] item on the touch screen to adjust the
parameter.
Effects Under the same pressure, the bigger the value, the lower the strain bar.

5.13.1.4 Mass Measurement

Press <Measure> to enter measurement status.
You can measure shell thick, strain ratio, strain-hist, etc.
For details, see [Advanced Volume].

5.13.1.5 Cine Review

Press <Freeze> or open an elastography imaging cine file to enter cine review status.

5.14 Stress Echo

Stress Echo is an option.
The following probes support stress echo function: P4-2E/P7-3E/P10-4E/SP5-1E/P7-3TE.
Stress echo data are provided for reference only, not for confirming
CAUTION: diagnoses.

5.14.1 Overview
The Stress Echo feature allows you to capture and review cardiac loops for multiple-phase
(multiple-stage) Stress Echo protocols.
Stress Echo data consists of Stress Echo loops, wall motion scores, and all other information
pertaining to the Stress Echo portion of a patient examination.
A loop is a clip that displays the motion of an entire heart cycle, or from the beginning systole to
the end systole, as indicated by the R-wave of the ECG trace and determined by the QT – Time
Table.
The loops in a given protocol are acquired by stages (phases), according to stage configuration
(continuous (prospective) or retrospective (non-continuous)).

Image Optimization 5-87

  Loops in non-continuous stages are limited to a specified loop-per-view maximum (such
as four). View labels can only be selected in the configured order. Acquisition is
retrospective - when you press the <Save> key on the control panel, the system saves the
previously acquired images.
 Loops in continuous stages are limited by time rather than a maximum number of loops -
the system stops acquisition after two minutes. Acquisition is prospective - when you
select the stage label and then press the <Save> key on the control panel, the system
starts saving newly acquired images. In some protocols, the system will jump to Select
Mode after retrospective saving.
When images are saved, the system places a green checkmark to the right of the view or
continuous stage and then shifts the red mark to the next view or next stage.

5.14.2 Stress Echo Acquisition Procedure

To acquire Stress Echo loops, you must enable the ECG function.
1. Use the proper probe and cardiac-related exam mode, press the user-defined key for Stress
Echo (Set the user-defined key for Stress Echo via the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Key Config].)
or touch [Stress Echo] on the touch screen on the top left of the screen to enter stress echo
imaging.
2. The system displays the “Select Protocol” window with the protocol selections. Select the
desired protocol and then click [OK].
The system displays the real-time imaging screen.
If the Stress Echo manual ROI option is selected in the Maintenance dialog box ([Setup]->[Stress
Echo]->[Maintenance]), the system also displays a region of interest (ROI). If Acquire Mode is
set as Full-screen in Maintenance, then no ROI box is displayed. For details, see “5.14.5
Maintenance and Protocol.”

Saved
Acquired loops
phase/view

Current
stage/view

Hints

3. According to the help information in the bottom of the screen, if an ROI is displayed, adjust the
ROI size and position. Press <Update> key on the control panel to confirm the ROI.
Tip: When you confirm the ROI size by pressing <Update>, you cannot adjust the ROI size
during acquisition. You can only adjust the ROI position using the trackball.
4. Press the <Save> key on the control panel to start acquisition.
The system displays the Protocol window on the left of the screen, listing the phases for the
selected protocol along with the first phase views (phases are stages). The system selects the
first view for acquisition by default, indicating the selected view by placing a red mark to the right
of the view name.

5-88 Image Optimization

5. Proceed through each view in each stage according to the following instructions:
 Non-continuous stages:
 To save acquired images for the selected view, press the <Save> key on the control panel.
The system goes to the next view for acquisition by default, saved views are marked with
a green “√.”
 Rotate the knob under [Stages XXX] or [Views XXX] to select the stage and view for
image acquisition (or reacquisition). Press the <Save> key to start acquisition.
Tip: Views can be re-acquired until you click [End Acquisition].
 If the protocol contains continuous stages (for alternative workflows), then proceed through
each continuous stage according to the following instructions:
 To begin saving acquired images for the selected stage, press the <Save> key on the
control panel.
The system displays a percentage marker below the selected stage indicating the progress
of the continuous capture.
 To stop saving acquired images for the selected stage, rotate the knob under [Pause] on
the touch screen or press <Freeze> directly. The percentage stops increasing.
 Select [Continue] or press the <Freeze> key again to continue.
 To end the current acquisition, press <Save> on the control panel.
 To select another continuous stage, rotate the knob under [Stage XXX] on the touch
screen.
 Suspending is not allowed under continuous exam.
When acquisition is complete for each stage, the system advances to the next stage. If the stage
is non-continuous, the system displays the stage views. When image acquisition is completed for
all views and continuous stages, the system switch to Select Mode.
6. To start or restart the timer, click [Stage Timer]/[Exam Timer] on the soft menu to turn it on.
The Stage time is displayed to the right side of each stage in the protocol list, while the Exam
time is displayed in the left side of the screen.
Each saved image will be marked with two times T1 and T2. T1 refers to the total time of the
whole acquisition, while T2 indicates the time the acquisition lasted for a certain stage.
7. To review loops before ending acquisition, select [Review/WMS] on the menu. You can redisplay
the real-time imaging screen to continue acquisition by selecting [Acquire].
8. To end the acquisition and review the acquired images, click [End Acquisition].
NOTE: When the acquisition is ended, no stress echo image acquisition can be performed for
the same exam.

5.14.3 Selecting Preferred Stress Echo Loops (Select Mode)

The selected clips are used for analysis in the review mode and wall motion scoring mode. Select
Mode is used to select the best loops of the examination.
When the acquisition is ended, select mode is enabled automatically.
In Select Mode, you can select the representative loop (“preferred” loop) for each view.
To select “preferred” loops:
1. Use the <Update> key according to tips in the trackball hint area or select [Select] on the menu
to enter the Select Mode, or the system enters the Select Mode directly after the acquisition is
finished.
2. Select the loop. Use the buttons displayed during Select Mode to designate another loop or
another view for display.
 Use [Stage: XX] or [View: XX] on the soft menu to select the target stage/view.
 Single-click a clip to select the clip for current stage/view and zoom in the clip to the full-
screen.

Image Optimization 5-89

  Double-click a clip. The clip will be magnified.

 Touch , , or on the touch screen to display another loop in the current

view.
 Click buttons on the left side of the screen to view the cine files by frame.

3. Select the stage and view to display all loops for the view and then continue designating the
“preferred” loop for each displayed view until all views are completed.

Description of select mode controls:

Mode

Phase/view
Cine selection
controls

Other
controls

Touch screen controls:

Selection Description
Stages: XX Rotate the corresponding knob under the button to select a stage.
Views: XX Rotate the corresponding knob under the button to select a view.
Acquire/ To switch the mode status.
Select/
Review/WMS
1. Clip
/2. Clip
For selecting views in the selected stage.
/3. Clip
/4. Clip
Next four Clips.
Next
Previous four Clips.
Previous

5-90 Image Optimization

 Selection Description
Go to “first” Clips.
First
Go to “last” Clips.
Last
Play Click to play/stop cine play.
See previous frame of the cine file.
Prev frame
See next frame of the cine file.
Next frame
See first frame of the cine file.
First frame
See last frame of the cine file.
Last frame

/ Decreases or increases playback speed.

Text “On”/“Off” Function that turns the screen graphic text “On” or “Off.” The function is the
same as the Labels on/off icon at the top of the screen.
Information includes: name of level, name of view, heart rate, time stamp
acquisition, timers, frame slider, loop ID, clip control. For the cine without
distributed view, the name of level and name of view are displayed in “--”.
Apply edit all Clip edit applied to all clips taken.
Clip Length Specify the clip segments: systole, diastole, full cycle or user-defined.
Bookmark For continuous acquisition, when the bookmark is set to “On”, only the selected
loops for the current view can be displayed.
Delete Delete clips that are not selected. If selected, the system will delete all clips that
Unselected are not selected after the exam is ended.
Suspend exam Pauses the stress echo exam but does not end the stress echo exam.
When a stress echo exam is suspended, the user can perform image acquisition
of all other imaging modes, or perform operations such as measurement.
End SE exam End the stress echo exam.

5.14.4 Review/WMS Mode

Review/WMS mode is used by cardiologists to evaluate clips for cardiac wall motion abnormalities.
Different views from different stages are selected for comparison across a wide variety of
combinations. The most common workflow is to compare “same views” but at “different stages” of
the exam (e.g., PSLA view, Rest stage compared to PSLA view, Post-exercise stage).

5.14.4.1 Enter review mode

Select [Review/WMS] on the menu on the left side of the screen.
1. Select [Shuffle Mode] on the touch screen.
2. Select the label of the phase or view (for example, Rest or Long Axis) on the right part of the
screen.

Image Optimization 5-91

 The system displays all loops that represent the selected phase or view.
 To display phases for the selected view(s)
1. To include a phase or view for display, select the leftmost, gray box to the left of each required
phase and/or view.
The system inserts a checkmark into each selected gray box.
2. To exclude a phase or view from display, select the blue box to the left of each required phase
and/or view.

The system inserts a red X into each selected box, like .

3. Select [Display Selected] on the touch screen.
The system displays the selected phases for each selected view side by side.
 To display all views for a specific phase:
Select the phase label (for example, Rest).
 To display all phases for a specific view:
Select the view label (for example, PLAX).
The system displays all phases for the selected view.
 To display a loop in full-screen format:
1. Double-click the loop to display in full-screen format.
2. Double-click the loop again to display the loop in its initial size, select the loop again.
Description of review/WMS mode keys (keys with the same function as in select mode are not
described below):
Key Description
Perform side-by-side comparison of the same views at different stages (PLAX,
PSAX, A4C, A2C at “Rest” compared to PLAX, PSAX, A4C, A2C “Post-
Exercise”). Clips are synchronized.
Selection: On, Off
Under [Shuffle Mode] "Off” status, when you select one stage, all view loops
are displayed on the screen; when you select one view, all loops of the same
view in different stages will be displayed on the screen.
Shuffle
Set [Shuffle Mode] to “Off”, the system will select loops of first two views of the
first two stages to display automatically. If you choose [Shuffle Forward], then
loops of the next two views of the first stages will be displayed. If you click
[Shuffle Back], loops of the first two views in the 3rd and 4th stage will be
displayed.
In the meantime, if you choose one stage, loops of all views under this stage
will be displayed on the screen (4 at most), and choosing one view will lead to
loops of this view in different stages be displayed (4 at most).
Display Selected Displays loops of all the stages and views selected.

5-92 Image Optimization

 5.14.4.2 Wall Motion Scoring
The WMS-Report lists user-assigned wall motion scores and associated data.
The Wall Motion Score (WMS) measurement is an application prepared for assisting in stress echo
semi-quantitative evaluations of abnormalities with left ventricular wall motion or changes in wall
thickness. The left ventricle is divided into segments for scoring to evaluate the degree of
abnormality from the sum of the scores in each segment using the motion of the walls of the entire
left ventricle.
You can assign wall motion scores to specific portions within each view (representative loop). You
can also assign a normal wall motion score (WMS) to the currently selected view or to all displayed
views.
Two methods of chamber segment division, ASE 16 and ASE 17, are supported. In addition, each
segment has 3 kinds of scoring method: 4, 5 and 7 points. Select through the [Scoring] control on
the touch screen.
To assign a wall motion score (WMS):
1. Select a colored number in the bottom-right area of the screen.
The meanings and colors used in segments are listed in the table below.
Score Meaning Color
1 Normal Green
2 Hypokinesis Yellow
2.5 Severe Hypokinesis Khaki
3 Akinesis Blue
4 Dyskinesis Red
5 Aneurysm Purple
2. Roll the trackball to select the value and then click the target segments, then the segment is
assigned with a value.
3. Repeat step 2 to perform value assign for all segments.
 To assign a normal wall motion score (WMS) to all currently displayed loops:
Select [Set All Normal] on the touch screen.
 To assign a normal wall motion score (WMS) to the currently selected loop:
Select [Set Current Normal] on the touch screen.

5.14.5 Maintenance and Protocol

5.14.5.1 Maintenance
Select “<F10 Setup>->[Stress Echo]->[Maintenance]” to enter the screen.

Image Optimization 5-93

 Item Function Description
Acquire mode Set the type of ROI: manual ROI or full-screen.
Overlay Select the items to be labeled on each loop.
WMS score type Set the chamber segment division method.
To customize the length of systolic duration acquired for a specific heart
rate. If “Trigger” is selected as “R-R Systolic” in Protocol Editor, it will
QT-Time table
store the clip duration. You can add and remove entries in this table. You
can also load the factory defaults.
Heart rate Enter the heart rate.
Syst. duration Enter the systolic duration.
Load factory To reset the QT time table.

QT-Time Table Operation:

 To add an entry:
Enter a heart rate and the referring systolic duration and then click [Update].
 To delete an entry:
Select the required heart rate and systolic duration pair from the QT – Time Table and then click
[Delete].

5.14.5.2 Protocol Edit

You can create, edit and delete Stress Echo protocols using the Protocol Editor dialog box.
Access the Protocol Editor dialog box by clicking [Protocol] in [Setup]->[Stress Echo]->[Protocol],
or clicking [Edit] on the Select Protocol screen as shown in the figure below:

5-94 Image Optimization

 Item Function Description
Protocol name Enter the protocol name.
Trigger Set the trigger type.
WMS model Set the chamber segment division method.
Displays the acquired loop number as well as the total usable loop
Loop usage
number.
View Set the views for each stage.
Standard view Set the standard view.
Load Import a protocol.
Export Export a protocol.
New protocol Create a new protocol.
Copy protocol Create a new protocol with an existing one.
Load Load an existing protocol.
Save Save the changes to the protocol.
Delete protocol Delete the protocol.
New stage Create a stage for the current protocol.
Quit Remove the Protocol Editor dialog box.

Creating a Stress Echo Protocol

To create a stress echo protocol:
1. Click the [New Protocol] button to the right of the Protocol Editor dialog box.
2. Enter the protocol name in the Protocol Name box at the top.
3. For each view (all views display for each phase):
(a) Select “New View” in the View list.
(b) Select a standard view from the Standard View list. Or you can customize the view name.
4. For each phase in the protocol:
(a) Select “new” in the Stage list.
(b) Enter a phase name.

Image Optimization 5-95

 (c) Select “Auto Select”, the system jumps to Select Mode after retrospective acquisition.
(d) Select the required option from the Clip Capture drop-down list.
(e) Select the number of loops to acquire (per view in the selected phase) in the Loops list (for
non-continuous stages).
(f) Select the type: exercise or drug.
5. Click [Save] to save changes and quit.

Editing or Deleting a Stress Echo Protocol

 To delete a protocol:
Select the protocol or one of its component phases or views and then click [Delete].
 To Edit a Stress Echo Protocol:
1. Click an available protocol on the Select Protocol screen.
2. Click [Edit] to enter the Protocol Editor screen.
3. Edit the protocol as described in the create protocol.

5.14.6 Saving Stress Echo Data

Stress Echo data consists of Stress Echo loops, wall motion scores, and all other information
pertaining to the Stress Echo portion of a patient examination.
When the exam is ended, the system will save all images within the exam.

5.14.7 Exiting the Stress Echo Feature

To exit the Stress Echo feature:
Press the <End Exam> key on the control panel or click [End SE exam] on the screen.

5.14.8 Measurement and Report

Suspend the stress echo exam by selecting [Suspend Exam] on the soft menu. Press the
measurement related keys or buttons to enter cardiology measurement. For details, see the
[Advanced Volume].
Reports contain the entered indication, if any, and also any entered comments that are specific to
the report. You can include or exclude data from specific phase(s). You can preview and print the
report for the currently selected mode. You can also enable colored report printing in Maintenance.

 Entering Indications or Comments for the Reports

You can enter an indication for display in Stress Echo reports.
To enter an indication:
1. Press <Report> on the control panel to open the report.
2. Use the keyboard to enter text in the Indication dialog box and then click [OK].

5.15 Tissue Tracking Quantitative Analysis (QA)

Apart from the TDI imaging function, the system also provides a tissue tracking QA function for
myocardial movement evaluation.
Using the tissue tracking QA function, the ultrasound system will scan each pixel position by frame
within the cardiac cycle, then use the region matching method and auto-correlation searching
method to trace each spot and calculate the movement, so as to determine myocardial motion in a
more quantitative way.

5-96 Image Optimization

 Tissue Tracking Quantitative Analysis images are provided for
CAUTION: reference only, not for confirming diagnoses.
Tissue tracking feature is an option.
The Tissue Tracking QA function can only be used with the following probes matched with the
corresponding exam modes:
P4-2E/ P7-3E/P10-4E/SP5-1E: adult cardiac/cardiac-difficult (car-penetration)/pediatric
cardiac/neonatal cardiac

5.15.1 Basic Procedures for Tissue Tracking QA

1. Select a saved B mode cardiac cine file (a cin. format file which contains more than 1 cardiac
cycle (with 2 R waves) and ECG signal).
2. Touch [TT QA] on the touch screen to activate the function:
a) You can determine the image of interest by previewing the image
b) To find the image of interest, roll the trackball or rotate the knob under [Cycle] on the
touch screen to select.
Select the corresponding section name on the touch screen and press <Cursor> to show the
cursor. Use the cursor to set the reference point (for details, see chapter “5.15.4 Myocardial
Boundary Tracing”):
 Long axis section: use the “3-point” method or “Manual” method to set
 Short axis section: enter multiple points (at least 6 points) using the cursor manually to set.
3. After reference points are set, the system will display the boundary of the endocardium and
epicardium. Adjust the thickness if necessary.
If the traced result is poor, touch [Reload] on the touch screen to re-trace the reference points,
or make fine adjustments to the points using the cursor.
If the cycles are not adequate to provide the information, switch to another cycle to trace.
4. Touch [Start Tracking] on the touch screen to start the tracking function. Adjust the parameters
if necessary.
Touch [Edit] on the touch screen to display the free cursor. Roll the trackball and press <Set>
to re-select the trace reference points. Move the cursor to the exact boundary position and
press <Set> again to set the right place.
5. Touch [Accept & Compute] on the touch screen to calculate and display the curve. Adjust the
parameters if necessary.

6. Touch on the touch screen to turn to the other page. Touch [Bull’s Eye] to see the
result.
7. Touch [Data Export] on the touch screen to export analyzed data.
8. Touch [Exit] on the touch screen.

Image Optimization 5-97

 5.15.2 Tissue Tracking QA Screen Description

3
2

6
5
4

1 - Displays the image used to generate the trace curve

2 - Displays the ECG trace
3 - Displays the measurement and calculation results:
EDV: maximum value of the end diastolic volume during the trace.
EDA: maximum value of the end diastolic area (Left Ventricular) during the trace.
ESV: maximum value of the end systolic volume (Left Ventricular) during the trace.
ESA: maximum value of the end systolic area (Left Ventricular) during the trace.
FAC: Fractional Area Change = (EDA - ESA)/EDA.
This parameter is available in the short axis section.
EF: Ejection fraction.
This parameter is available in the long axis section.
HR: Heart rate.
GS Global strain.
GS_rate Global strain rate.
The system also displays the TPSD value on the Bull’s Eye graph:
Time to Peak Standard Deviation (TPSD):

Where the standardized value of time to peak data: (N is the number of time to
peak data) Average standardized value of time to peak data:

5-98 Image Optimization

4 - Display curve: Velocity/Displacement/Strain/Strain Rate. Each curve on the image is matched with
a certain segment in the cardiac segmentation model (6), identified by different colors.
The X-axis represents time (s);
Velocity curve
The Y-axis represents velocity (cm/s).
The X-axis represents time (s);
Displacement curve
The Y-axis represents displacement (mm).
The X-axis represents time (s);
Strain curve
The Y-axis represents deformation of the tissue (%).
The X-axis represents time (s);
Strain-rate curve
The Y-axis represents strain by time (s-1).
5 - Displays the corresponding time of AVO (aortic valve open)/AVC (aortic valve close)/MVO
(mitral valve open)/MVC (mitral valve close).
6 - Displays the cardiac segmentation model. Each segment name is illustrated beneath the model.
 In the figure, marks the peak position of the curve.
 Click on a segment in the cardiac segmentation model. The segment turns gray and its
corresponding curve no longer displays.
 You can get the current X/Y-axis value by moving the cursor onto one point on the curve. If you
press <Set> now, the frame marker will move to that spot.
 If the segment is filled with “XXX”, it means that this segment is not well tracked.

5.15.3 Select Image and Cardiac Cycle

You can select images with a better image quality to get a better analysis result.
 Switch cine files
1. Press <Review> on the control panel to enter review status
2. Double-click the target file
3. The system closes the currently displayed file and switches to the newly selected file.
 Switch cardiac cycles within the cine file
1. After a cine file with more than one cycle is opened, the system displays a thumbnail of each
cardiac cycle on the thumbnail area.
2. Press <Cursor> to acquire the cursor. Roll the trackball to position the cursor over the desired
image.
3. Double-click the file, the system will switch to the selected cycle.
Or rotate the knob under the [Cycle] item on the touch screen to select directly.

5.15.4 Myocardial Boundary Tracing

 The system provides two kinds of tracing methods for two kinds of sections:
 Long axis section (A4C, A2C, ALAX): the 3-point method and manual tracing method are
both available.
 3-point method
As shown in the following figure, after pressing <Set> to place 3 points clockwise on the
image, the system generates the trace automatically.

Image Optimization 5-99

  Manual trace method
Press <Set> and roll the trackball along the boundary to add the trace points gradually.
After the trace is finished, press <Set> twice to finish tracing.
At least 6 points should be determined by you before the system generates an automatic
trace.
 Short axis section (PSAX B, PSAX M, PSAX AP): only manual tracing is available.
 Retracing
If the current trace is not satisfactory, touch [Reload] on the touch screen to clear the trace and
start another tracing.
During the trace, press <Clear> to clear already-traced items.
 Make fine adjustments to the trace
You can make fine adjustments to the trace:
1. In tracing curve adjusting status, the cursor becomes .
2. Move the cursor to the editable point (inner dotted line of the curve) and press <Set>.
3. Roll the trackball to drag the curve to the desired position. Press <Set> again to set the point
in the new position.
4. Repeat steps 2-3 to complete all points that need adjustment.
In tracking status, touch [Edit] on the touch screen to enter the status.

5.15.5 Tissue Tracking Operations

Switch the operation controls
 [Start Tracking]: touch to start tracking.
 [Accept & Compute]: touch to start calculation and display the curve.
 [Exit]: touch to exit tissue tracking.
 [Parameter]: rotate to select the curve type.
 [Bull’s Eye]: touch to turn on/off bull’s eye and the peak data table.

View Selection
Before tracing, touch the corresponding button to select the view.

5-100 Image Optimization

 [A4C]: apical four-chamber view.
 [A2C]: apical two-chamber view.
 [ALAX]: apical long axis view.
 [PSAX B]: short axis base view.
 [PSAX M]: short axis mid view.
 [PSAX AP]: short axis apex view.

Parameter Adjustment
 [Thickness]: adjusts the tracing thickness, i.e., the distance between the endocardium wall and
the tracking points on the epicardium.
 [Tracking Points]: adjusts the number of points within the segment.
 [Cycle]: rotates clockwise to select the next cycle, and vice versa.
 [Smooth]: adjusts the smooth effect of the curve.
 [Display Effect]: turns on/off the arrow vector graphical display of the myocardial movement.
 [Velocity Scale]: adjust the scale length of the velocity.
 [Display Style]: display the endometrial, the epicardium, the myocardial or all.
 [Tracking Cycles]: Select the cycles to be tracked.
 [Average Cycles]: Obtain the average parameter curves of the tissue.
 [Cycle Select]: Select among different cycles.

Image display
According to the status of the current section, touch the appropriate button on the touch screen to
check the corresponding time.
 [AVO]: displays the aortic valve open time.
 [AVC]: displays the aortic valve close time.
 [MVO]: displays the mitral valve open time.
 [MVC]: displays the mitral valve close time.

5.15.6 Bull’s Eye

After tracking, the system displays a Bull’s Eye graph for judging the reverse movement or scope
of myocardium.
1. Touch [Bull’s Eye] on the touch screen to turn the function on:
You can acquire:
 Time to peak value and peak value of the 17 segments;
 Display measurement result EDV/ESV/EF/TPSD.
2. Rotate the knob under [Parameter] on the touch screen to see a bull’s eye graph for different
parameters.

Image Optimization 5-101

 “-” will display in the table to indicate those segments that are not well tracked.

5.15.7 Measurement/Comment
In tissue tracking QA mode, only the Time measurement is available. For details, see the
Operator’s Manual [Advanced Volume].
Comments and Body Mark operations are the same as in other modes.

5.15.8 Data Export

The system provides a data exporting function, so that you can export calculation results for
analysis (for instance, SPSS analysis).
Touch [Data Export] on the touch screen to export analyzed data for each segment in .csv format.

5-102 Image Optimization

6 Display & Cine Review

6.1 Splitting Display

The system supports dual-split and quad-split display format. However, only one window is active.

 Dual-split: press the key on the control panel to enter dual-split mode.

Under Dual-split mode, press <Freeze> to freeze the image and then use to switch
between the two images.
Press <B> on the control panel to exit.
Modes support dual-split display: B mode, Color mode, Power mode, PW mode, CW mode, M
mode and Color M mode.

 Quad-split: press the key on the control panel to enter the quad-split mode.

Under Quad-split mode, press <Freeze> to freeze the image and then use to switch
between the four images.
Press <B> on the control panel to exit.
Modes support quad-split display: B mode, Color mode and Power mode.
For the detailed display format, see the imaging mode chapters.

6.2 Image Magnification

NOTE: Zooming an image changes the frame rate which tends to change the thermal indices.
The position of the focal zones may also change, which may cause the peak intensity to
occur at a different location in the acoustic field. As a result, the MI may change.

6.2.1 Spot zoom

To use the function, use the knob on the control panel.

1. Press <Zoom> to enter the sample volume definition status.
2. Roll the trackball to change the box size and position. Press <Set> to toggle between setting the
size and position, or rotate the <Zoom> knob to adjust the size. After the sample volume is set,
press the <Zoom> key again to enter spot zoom status.
3. Rotate the <Zoom> knob or to change the magnification factor. Or enter the touch screen
mapping mode, and zoom the image by pinching two fingers on the touch screen. The image
magnification factor value will display in real time in the image parameter area. For example,
indicates that the magnification factor is 1.3.
4. Press <Zoom> again to exit spot zoom.

Display & Cine Review 6-103

 Tip: The size and position of the sample volume box change along with the scanning depth and
area.

6.2.2 Pan zoom

To use the function, use the knob on the control panel.

1. Rotate the <Zoom> knob to directly enter the pan zoom status. Or enter the touch screen
mapping mode, and zoom the image by pinching the two fingers on the touch screen. Image-in-
image is displayed.
2. Magnification factor adjustment: rotate the [Zoom] knob or pinch two fingers under mapping
mode to change the magnification factor. The image magnification factor value will display in real
time in the image parameter area. For example, indicates that the magnification factor is
1.3.
3. Shifting the image: roll the trackball or touch and translate the image.
4. Press <Zoom> to exit pan zoom.

6.2.3 iZoom (Full Screen View)

Function: to magnify the image in full screen.
Procedures:

1. Press on the control panel to zoom in on the image. The zoom area includes the image
area, parameter area, image banner, thumbnail area and so on.
2. Press the key again to zoom in on the image area only.
3. Press the key again to exit iZoom.

6.3 Freeze/Unfreeze the Image.

Press the <Freeze> key on the control panel to freeze a scanning image. In freeze mode, the
probe stops transmitting acoustic power, and all images and parameters are frozen.
Tip: After freezing an image, the system may enter cine review, measure, comment adding or body
mark mode, depending on what has been preset. (Setting path: [Setup] → [System] → [Image] →
“Freeze Config.”)
Press <Freeze> in freeze mode to unfreeze the image, and the system continues image scanning.

6.3.1 Imaging Mode Switching When Frozen

Imaging mode switching in freeze mode follows these principles:
 In splitting display B mode, press <Dual>/<Quad> to switch between the windows. Press
<Single> to exit splitting display mode and enter the image of the currently activated
window in full screen.
 In freeze mode, the system supports imaging mode switching between the sub-modes
(only for the activated window). For example, if the frozen image is in B+C+PW mode, the
system supports imaging mode switching between B+C+PW, B+C, B+PW and B by
pressing <Color> or <PW>.
 The imaging mode and parameters of an unfrozen image are the same as those before
freezing. The display format is the same as that before being unfrozen.

6-104 Display & Cine Review

6.3.2 Imaging Display Format Switching When Frozen
Image display format switching in freeze mode follows these principles:
 2D+PW (press <Freeze> in 2D+PW imaging mode)
If the imaging mode before freezing is 2D (frozen) + PW (real time) or 2D (real time) + PW
(frozen), then in freeze mode, you can switch between 2D (frozen) + PW (activated) or 2D
(activated) + PW (frozen) by pressing the <Update> key on the control panel.
 Dual/quad splitting display mode (press the <Freeze> key in dual/quad splitting display mode)
 When entering freeze mode, the default activated window is the real-time window before
freezing. Other image windows display the corresponding cine memories. If a certain cine
memory is empty, then no image is displayed.
 Press <Dual>/<Quad> to switch between dual-splitting and quad-splitting modes.
 Press <Single> on the control panel to enter the single display format, which displays the
currently activated window. In single display format, press <Dual>/<Quad> to return to
splitting display mode.
 Unfrozen: in splitting display status, when you unfreeze the image you can only unfreeze
the image in the activated window, other images remain frozen. In single-window display
status, the system displays the single image after being unfrozen.

6.4 Cine Review

After pressing the <Freeze> key, the system allows you to review and edit the images prior to the
image being frozen. This function is called cine review. The magnified images can also be
reviewed after the <Freeze> key is pressed, and the operating method is the same. You can
perform zoom, measurements, add comments and body marks on the images being reviewed.
The system supports manual review as well as automatic review. The default setup is Manual Cine,
but you can switch between Auto Cine and Manual Cine.
In addition, the system supports the images reviewed along with physiological waveforms, if the
detection of physiological waveforms is performed.
Cine Review images can be inadvertently combined in-between separate
CAUTION: patient scans. The Cine Review memory must be cleared at the end of the
current patient exam and before starting the next new patient exam by
pressing the <End Exam> key on the control panel.
Cine files stored in the system’s hard drive shall contain patient information,
to avoid the selection of an incorrect image file and potential misdiagnosis.

6.4.1 Entering/Exiting Cine Review

 To enter Cine Review:
 Enter “[Setup] → [System] → [Image] → “Freeze Config.” to set “Status after Freeze” to
“Cine.” The system enters manual cine review status once <Freeze> is pressed to freeze
the image.
 Open cine files in thumbnail, iStation or Review, the system enters automatic cine review
status.

 Under touch screen mapping mode, touch / or swipe the screen

leftwards/rightwards to review the cine file.
 To exit Cine Review:
Press <Freeze> or <B> and the system will return to image scanning and exit cine review.

Display & Cine Review 6-105

 6.4.2 Cine Review in 2D Mode
(B/B+Color/B+Power/B+TVI/B+TEI)
 Manual Cine Review:
After entering cine review in 2D mode, roll the trackball to review the cine images on the screen
one by one. Or under touch screen mapping mode, touch the touch screen and swipe left and
right to review the images.
If you roll the trackball to the left or swipe leftwards (under mapping mode), the review sequence
is reversed to the image-storing sequence, and the images are displayed in descending order. If
you roll the trackball to the right or swipe rightwards, the review sequence is the same as the
image-storing sequence, and the images are displayed in ascending order. When you review
images to the first or last frame, rolling the trackball further will display the last or first frame.
The cine progress bar at the bottom of the screen (as shown in the figure below):

Auto Review Region

Total frames

Start mark Current frame

Playback mark
End mark

 Auto Review
 Reviewing all
a) In manual cine review status, press the knob under [Auto Play] (not selecting “Stop”)
on the touch screen to activate auto cine review.
b) Reviewing speed: in auto cine review status, press the knob under [Auto Play] on the
touch screen to adjust the review speed or use the mapping menu. When the speed
is changed to 0, the system exits auto cine review.
c) In auto play status, set [Auto Play] to “Stop” or roll the trackball to exit auto play.
 Setting the Auto Review Region
You can set a segment of cine loop which can be reviewed automatically. After the auto review
region is set, the auto cine review can only be performed within this region; but the manual cine
review can be performed beyond this region. When the cine file is saved, only the images within
this region are saved.
a) Set the start frame: rotate the knob under [Start Frame] in the touch screen to
manually review the images for the frame you want to set as the start point; or
manually review the cine file by trackball and touch [Set Begin] on the touch screen to
set current frame to be the start point.
b) Set the end frame: rotate the knob under [End Frame] in the touch screen to manually
review the images for the frame you want to set as the end point; or manually review
the cine file by trackball and touch [Set End] on the touch screen to set current frame
to be end.
c) Press the knob under [Auto Play] on the touch screen or use the mapping menu. The
system plays the auto review region automatically.
d) Rotate the knob under [Auto Play] to increase/decrease the auto play speed or use
the mapping menu.

6-106 Display & Cine Review

 e) In auto cine review, pressing the knob under [Auto Play] on the touch screen or rolling
the trackball will stop the auto cine review and enter the manual cine review.
f) Click [Jump to First]/[Jump to Last] to review the first or last image.
Tip: you can perform cine review on each image window in the dual/quad splitting mode, and
set the auto review region for each window.

6.4.3 Cine Review in M/PW/CW/TVD Mode

Enter cine review in M/PW/CW/TVD mode and roll the trackball. The cine images are displayed on
the screen one by one.
Roll the trackball to the left. Or under touch screen mapping mode, swipe the touch screen
leftwards. The review progress slider moves to the left, the images move to the right and the earlier
stored images are displayed. Or, roll the trackball to the right (swipe rightwards). The review
progress slider moves to the right, the images move to the left and the recently stored images are
displayed. When you review images to the first or last frame, rolling the trackball further will display
the last or first frame.
The cine progress bar at the bottom of the screen (as shown in the figure below):
Auto Review Region Time played
Total time

Start mark
Playback mark

End mark

Cine review operations are the same as those in 2D mode.

Tips: when replaying the spectrum cine files, the audio is synchronous with image file when the
auto play speed is set 1.

6.4.4 Linked Cine Review

Linked cine review reviews images captured at the same moment.
 Dual live mode (B/Color/Power/TVI/TEI)
 B+M
 B/B Dual liveDuplex mode (B+PW/CW/TVD)
 Triplex mode, TVM or CM mode

Frame synchronization mark

Playback progress bar

The frame mark on the time mark of the M/PW image indicates the corresponding 2D image. In
statuses other than dual live status, you can only review images in the currently active window.

Display & Cine Review 6-107

 6.5 Image Compare
6.5.1 Image Compare under Review Mode
You can perform image compare through the path:
 Thumbnail area in the main screen;
 iStation screen (press <iStation> to enter);
 Review screen (press <Review> to enter).
1. In the above condition, press <Cursor> to show the cursor and click the target image file.

2. 3 buttons will appear to the right of the image, click to select the image for comparison
marked by .

If the wrong image has been chosen, click to cancel the selection of this image.
Tip: for B/B+COLOR/B+TVI/B+POWER/B+TEI mode image, you can select at most 4 images;
for PW/M/CW/TVD/Elasto single mode image, you can select at most 2 images.
3. Repeat the above steps to add other image files for comparison.

4. Click [Image Compare] (click in thumbnail status) to enter image compare mode.
5. Review images from different image windows. Press the <Dual> or <Quad> key to switch the
active image window.
The window with the highlighted “M” mark is the currently activated window.
6. Save the image if necessary.
7. Click [Return] on the screen or press <Freeze> to exit image compare.
Image compare of different exams for the same patient:
a) Select different exams in the iStation screen, then select [Review Image] in the menu
which appears to enter the Review screen.
b) In the Review screen, click [Exam History] to select the exam. Click to select the image to
be compared in different exams, and click [Compare].
You can select if cine files are synchronously replayed by the soft menu control: select [PlayMode:
XX] to [SyncPlay] to play all files synchronously or [ASyncPlay] to play asynchronously.

6.5.2 Frame Compare

1. Freeze the image in B/C mode. Touch [Frame Compare] on the touch screen to enter frame
compare mode.
2. Review the images of different image windows (cine replaying cannot be performed for single-
frame image files). Press the <Update> or <Dual> key to switch the active image window.
3. Save the image if necessary.
Measurements and adding comments and body marks are allowed.
4. Touch [Frame Compare] again to return to image frozen status. Press <Freeze> to enter real-
time imaging.
Tip: Cine compare can only be performed on single-format 2D images.

6.5.3 iCompare
1. Set the user-defined key through the path: [Setup]→ [System]→ [Key Config]. Select a key in
the Key Function field on the left side and select “iCompare” in the Advanced Feature page of
Function field on the right side.

6-108 Display & Cine Review

 2. In live mode or freeze mode, press the user-defined key for iCompare.
3. Select a single-frame image, multi-frame image, or screenshot in the iStation screen (press
<iStation> to enter), Review screen (press <Review> to enter), or thumbnail area in the main
screen.
4. Press the <Dual> key to switch between the left and right windows. Roll the trackball to review
the cine image on the screen one by one.
The window with the highlighted “M” mark is the current activated window.
When the left window is a screenshot, you cannot switch windows.
5. Save the image if it is necessary.
Measurements, adding comments and body marks are allowed.
6. Press <B>, <Single>, or the user-defined key to exit iCompare.
Tips: iCompare can only be performed on B, Color, Power, PW, CW, or M mode for
FRM/CIN/PNG/DCM files.

6.6 Cine Saving

 Live capture
Live capture refers to saving the images or cines in image scanning status. After storing them, the
system continues with image scanning.
Live capture can be divided into two types: retrospective and prospective.
 Retrospective saving saves specified images which were captured before the current
moment. Images stored in the cine memory are saved to the system's hard drive.
 Prospective saving saves specified images which are captured later than the current
moment. Images are saved to both the cine memory and the system's hard drive.
The live capture time can be set.
 In imaging mode, tap [Pro Capture] / [Retro Capture] ont the touch screen or press the
user-defined key for “Save Cine (Prospective)/(Retrospective)” on the control panel.
Tip:
 Press the save key again or <Freeze> to stop saving.
 When saving is complete, a thumbnail displays in the Thumbnail area.
 Frozen image storage
In frozen mode, tap [Pro Capture] / [Retro Capture] ont the touch screen or press the user-defined
key for “Save Cine (Prospective)/(Retrospective)” on the control panel.
After the cine is successfully saved, a thumbnail is displayed on the screen.
The live capture time can be set.

6.7 Setting Cine Length

 Live capture:
 Prospective Cine Length
Prospective cine duration: set the time that the user taps [Pro Capture] as the start time.
The system proceeds saving the cine.
Procedures:
With the ECG disabled: tap [Cine] tab, and rotate [Time (Pro)] knob to adjust it.
With the ECG enabled: tap [Cine] tab. Tap [Loop Type (Pro)] to choose the type of the
saving time and the cardiac cycles. Rotate [Time (Pro)] or [Cycle (Pro)] to adjust it.
 Retrospective Cine Length:

Display & Cine Review 6-109

 Retrospective cine duration: set the time that user taps [Retro Capture] when playing the
first frame of the image. It also refers to saving the cine or cycles retrospectively.
Procedures:
With the ECG disabled: tap [Cine] tab, and rotate [Time (Retro)] knob to adjust it.
With the ECG enabled: tap [Cine] tab. Tap [Loop Type (Retro)] to choose the type of the
saving time and the cardiac cycles. Rotate [Time (Retro)] or [Cycle (Retro)] to adjust it.
 Freeze storage setting:
Press <Freeze> to freeze the image. The system takes the time of pressing the
retrospective/prospective key as the first frame of the image. The system proceeds saving the
cine.
TIP: after being frozen, the cine length of the prospective keeps the same with the real-time
prospective.
NOTE: the system ends up saving if the cine length goes beyond the maximum value.

6-110 Display & Cine Review

7 Physiological Signal
A physiological input panel is available for this system. The physiological module consists of two
channels: ECG and DC IN. DC IN is capable of handling external ECG signals from other ECG
signal devices.
The scanned image displayed is synchronized with the ECG traces. So ECG signals can be used
as a time reference in an ultrasound exam (mainly in cardiology exams).
The ECG function is an option.

DO NOT use the physiological traces for diagnosis and

WARNING: monitoring.
To avoid electric shock, the following checks must be
performed prior to an operation:
The ECG electrode cable must not be cracked, frayed or show
any signs of damage or strain.
The ECG electrode cable must be correctly connected.
You must use the ECG leads provided with the physiological
module. Failure to do so may result in electric shock.
The ECG electrode cable must be connected to the system
first. Only after the cable is connected to the system can the
patient be connected to the ECG electrodes. Failure to follow
these instructions can subject the patient to electric shock.
DO NOT place the ECG electrodes directly in contact with the
patient’s heart. This can stop the patient’s heartbeat.
DO NOT apply the ECG electrodes if the voltage exceeds 15
volts. This could result in an electric shock.
Before using the high-frequency electric surgical unit, high-
frequency therapeutic equipment or defibrillator, be sure to
remove the ECG electrode from the patient in order to prevent
electric shock.
Conductive parts of electrodes and associated connectors for
ECG must not come into contact with other conductive parts
including earth/grounding.
Frequent trampling on or squeezing of the cables may result
in cable failure or fracture.
If an abnormality is detected in physio trace, check that the
ECG leads are properly connected to the system.

Physiological Signal 7-1

 7.1 ECG
7.1.1 ECG Operation Basic Procedures
1. Connect the device.
 Turn off the system power supply, and connect the ECG cable to the ECG port on the
physio panel of the machine.
 Turn on the system power supply.
Place the ECG electrodes on the patient’s body (as shown in the following figures).

Right Left Right Left

Red Yellow White Black

Black Green Green Red

IEC standard AHA standard

2. Touch [Physio] on the touch screen to enter physio operation status.

3. Switch the imaging modes and display formats. Adjust the parameters to obtain an optimized
image.
4. Parameter adjustment:
 On ECG touch screen page, touch [ECG] to be On (highlighted in green).
 Adjust the [Speed], [ECG Gain], [Position] and [Invert].
5. Trigger:
 Select the trigger mode, or switch on [Real & Trig], set the trigger time.
6. Freeze the image(s) and review the image(s).
7. Touch [Physio] to exit ECG mode, and remove the ECG electrodes from the patient.
If an external ECG is used as input for the ECG signal, touch [ECG source] to be “External”.

7.1.2 ECG Triggering

7.1.2.1 Overview
ECG triggering means that image scanning is activated at some time points of ECG signals, thus
obtaining B images at these time points. In most cases, the triggered images are 2D-mode images.
For single/dual trigger, when ECG triggering occurs, a mark appears on the ECG waveform,
indicating the time points when the B images are captured (corresponding to the delay time from R
curve started).

7-2 Physiological Signal

 Tips:
 The trigger mark is displayed in both freeze mode and live mode.
 The marks in Dual trigger are different in color.
 Trigger function is unavailable if the ECG trace is disappeared. Only the live 2D image can
be triggered.
 No delay time or time interval shall less than the time required to scan a single image.
 If the delay time is longer than a heart cycle, then the heart cycle between the delay time
is omitted, that is to say no trigger is occurred when R waveform is detected in the
duration.

7.1.2.2 Triggering Mode

There are three triggering modes available: Single, Dual and Timer.
 Single Trigger: when an R waveform is detected, the image will be triggered after delay
time T1. The value of T1 can be changed in triggering status.
 Dual Trigger: when an R waveform is detected, the image will be triggered respectively
after delay time T1 and T2. The value of T1 and T2 can be changed in triggering status.
 Timer Trigger: an image will be triggered after a certain interval. The time interval can be
changed in triggering status.
The image trigger operation is described as follows (Take single trigger as an example):
1. Select exam mode.
2. Touch [Trig Mode] on the touch screen to enable the trigger.
3. Select [Single].
4. Set the delay time on the soft menu according to actual situation.

7.1.2.3 Real & Trigger

Click [Real & Trigger] on the soft menu to enable or disable the real trigger function.
After the [Real & Trigger] is turned on, two images are displayed respectively in two windows, one
is triggered by ECG, and the other is non-triggered real time image.

Physiological Signal 7-3

8 Measurement
You can perform measurements on zoomed images, cine reviewing images, real-time images or
frozen images. For measurement details, see the [Advanced Volume].

Be sure to measure areas of interest from the most optimal

WARNING: image plane to avoid misdiagnosis arising from inaccurate
measurement values.
To obtain accurate Doppler flow measurement values, make
sure the transmitting beam is not perpendicular to the flow as
this may lead to false readings and potential misdiagnosis.

If an image is unfrozen or the mode is changed during a measurement,

CAUTION: the calipers and measurement data will be cleared from the screen.
Measurement data will be stored in the report.
If the system is turned off or <End Exam> is pressed during a
measurement, unsaved data will be lost.
In dual-B imaging mode, the measurement results of the merged image
can be inaccurate. Therefore, the results are provided for reference only,
not for confirming diagnoses.
You can create user-defined measurement tools using the UltraAssist tool and then import them
into the ultrasound system to carry out specific measurements.
For details about this feature, see the UltraAssist manual.

8.1 Basic Operations

 To enter/exit measurement
To enter: press <Caliper> on the control panel to enter general measurement. Press the
<Measure> key to enter application measurement.
To exit: press the <Caliper> key or the <Measure> key again.
 Measurement results and help information
The system displays and updates measurement results in the results window.
The help information concerning measurement and calculation is displayed in the Help
Information area at the bottom of the screen.

Measurement 8-1
 8.2 General Measurements
8.2.1 2D General Measurements
2D general measurements are general measurements on images in B, Color, Power or iScape
imaging modes. The measurements listed below can be performed:
Measurement
Function
Tools
Distance Measures the distance between two points of interest.
Measures the distance between the probe surface and the probing point
Depth
along the ultrasound beam.
Angle Measures the angle between two intersecting planes.
Area (Ellipse,
Trace, Cross, Measures the area and perimeter of a closed region.
Spline)
Volume (Ellipse),
Volume (Ellipse Measures the volume of a target.
distance)
Measures the length of two line segments which are perpendicular to each
Double Dist.
other.
Parallel Line Measures the distance between every two line segments of five parallel line
segments, namely, four distances in total.
Trace Length Measures the length of a curve.
Distance Ratio Measures the lengths of any two lines and calculates the ratio.
Area Ratio Measures the areas of any two regions and calculates the ratio.
Measures the grayscale distribution of ultrasonic echo signals in a closed
B histogram
region.
B profile Measures the grayscale distribution of ultrasonic echo signals across a line.
Color Velocity Measures the color flow-velocity (only in Color mode).
Volume Flow Measures the blood flow through a vascular cross section per unit time.
Strain Ratio Measures the strain ratio in the image.
Elasto ratio Measure the elastography ratio
Directional Ratio Measure the directional ratio
RAC Calculates the Relative Anisotropy Coefficient
Strain-Hist Displays the strain ratio using the histogram.
Elasto-Hist Display the elasto value of the ROI in a histogram
IMT Measure intima-media thickness

8.2.2 M General Measurements

M general measurements are general measurements on M-mode, CM-mode and AM-mode
images. The measurements listed below can be performed:

8-2 Measurement
 Measurement
Function
Tools
Distance Measures the vertical distance between two points.
Time Measures the time interval between any two points.
Measures the distance and time between two points and calculates the
Slope
slope.
Measures the time of n (n≤8) cardiac cycles and calculates the heart rate in
HR
M mode images.
Calculates the average velocity by measuring the distance and time
Velocity
between two points.

8.2.3 Doppler General Measurements

Doppler general measurements are general measurements on PW/CW-mode images. The
measurements listed below can be performed:
Measurement
Tools Function

Time Measures the time interval between any two points.

N intervals (n≤8) are measured to calculate a PW mode derived HR value in
HR
Beats Per Minute (BPM).
On Doppler mode images, velocity and PG (pressure gradient) of a point on
Velocity
the Doppler spectrum waveform are measured.
The velocity and time interval between two points are measured to calculate
Acceleration
the speed difference and acceleration.
On PW mode images, one or several Doppler waveforms are traced to
D Trace
obtain the speed and PG, etc.
Velocity and PG between two peaks on the Doppler spectrum are measured
PS/ED to calculate the RI (resistance index) and PS/ED (peak systolic/end
diastolic).
Volume Flow Measures the blood flow through a vascular cross section per unit time.
Ratio (Vel.) Measures the D velocity and calculates the ratio value for blood analysis.
Velocity Ratio Measure two D velocity values on one or two spectrum and calculate the
ratio to analyze the flow information.
VTI Ratio Measure two TVIs and the calculated ratio of the spectrum.

Measurement 8-3
 8.3 Application Measurements
 Abdomen measurements - used for measuring abdominal organs (liver, gall bladder, pancreas
and kidney, etc.) and large abdominal vessels.
 OB measurements - used for measuring fetal growth indices (including EFW) as well as GA
and EDD calculations. The fetus can be evaluated through growth graph analysis and the fetal
biophysical profile.
 Cardiac measurements - used for left ventricle function measurements and measuring main
artery and vein parameters, etc.
 Gynecology measurements - used for the uterus, ovary and follicles, etc.
 Small Part measurements - used for small parts such as the thyroid.
 Urology measurements - used for the prostate, seminal vesicle, renal, adrenal, micturated and
testicular volume.
 Pediatrics measurements - used for hip joint measurement.
 Vascular measurements - used for carotid, cerebral, upper and lower extremities vessels, etc.
 EM measurements - used for EM-related full functional measurements.
 Nerve measurements - used for nerve measurements.

8-4 Measurement
8.4 Measurement Accuracy
Table 1 2D Image Measurements

Parameter Range Error

Distance Full Screen Within ±3%

Area (ellipse, circle) Full Screen Within ±7%
Trace Area Full Screen Within ±7%
Circ Full Screen Within ±10%
Angle Full Screen Within ±3%
Volume Full Screen Within ±10 %
Table 2 Basic Time Motion Measurements

Parameter Range Error

Distance Full Screen Within ±3 %

Time Timeline Display Within ±2%
Heart Rate Timeline Display Within ±4%
10-200cm/s;
Velocity (PW
10-300cm/s (for When angle≤60º, ≤5%.
mode)
transcranial application).
10-200cm/s;
Velocity (CW When angle≤60º, ≤5%. (not including pencil
mode) 10-300cm/s (for probe)
transcranial application).

Table 3 iScape measurements

Parameter Range Error

Within ±5 % (for linear, wide-convex, and

Distance Full Screen phased probes)
Within ±10 % (for micro-convex probes)

Table 4 3D/4D image measurements

Parameter Range Error

Single window display: Within ±5% (not

Distance Section A/B/C
including Smart 3D mode)
Single window display: Within ±7% (not
Area (ellipse, circle) Section A/B/C
including Smart 3D mode)
Single window display: Within ±10%
Circ Section A/B/C
(not including Smart 3D mode)

Measurement 8-5
 Parameter Range Error

Single window display: Within ±5% (not

Angle Section A/B/C
including Smart 3D mode)
Within ±20% (not including Smart 3D
Volume Section A/B/C
mode)

NOTE: Within the selected field range, measurement accuracy is ensured within the range
mentioned above. The accuracy specifications are performed in the worst conditions, or
based on real system tests, regardless of acoustic speed error.

8-6 Measurement
9 Comments and Body Marks

9.1 Comments
Comments can be added to an ultrasound image to bring attention, notate or communicate
information observed during the examination. You can add comments to: zoomed images, cine
review images, real-time images, frozen images. You can type comments as characters, insert pre-
defined comments from the comments library; add voice comment, insert arrow markers or add the
trace.
Ensure that the entered comments are correct. Incorrect
WARNING: comments may lead to misdiagnosis!

9.1.1 Comments Basic Procedures

To enter a comment:
1. Enter comment status:

 Press , or,
 Press any alphanumeric key or the space bar to enter comment status, or,

 Press to enter arrow-adding status.

2. Position the cursor over the desired location for the comment,
3. Add a new comment to the image in accordance with the actual situation. You can modify,
move or delete a completed comment.
4. To exit comment status:

 In comment status, press , or

 In arrow-adding status, press , or,

 Press <ESC> or other operating mode keys to exit.

Comments and Body Marks 9-1

 9.1.2 Touch Screen Display in Comments
The system can be configured with comment text libraries including Abdomen, Cardiology, GYN
(Gynecology), OB (Obstetrics), Urology, SMP (Small Part), Vascular, PED (Pediatric), Nerve
Blocks and emergency medicine. In comments status, you can enter the comment text using the
screen menu or touch screen.
 To set the comment home location.
Roll the trackball to move the cursor to the desired comment location and touch [Set
Home] on the touch screen.
 Return the cursor to the set home location.
Press <Home> on the control panel or touch [Home] on the touch screen to return the
cursor to the set home location.
 Grab/Del.
Rotate the knob under the [Grab/Del.] button on the touch screen to select the entered
comment items. Press the knob to delete the selected item.
 Navigate through the comment libraries
To select the comment library, rotate/press the knob under the [Library] button on the
touch screen.
 Add/modify comment positions
Touch [RT/LT], [Sag/XS] or [Prox/Mid/Distal] to directly mark the position. Move the cursor
onto the comment item to be modified, touch [RT/LT], [Sag/XS] or [Prox/Mid/Distal] to
change the already-added comment position.
 Change Font Size/Arrow Size
To change the font size of comment text, rotate the knob under the [Font Size] button on
the touch screen to select from Small, Medium and Large.
To change the arrow size, rotate the knob under the [Arrow Size] button on the touch
screen to select from Small, Medium and Large.
 Comment display/hide
Touch [Hide]/[Display] on the touch screen to display or hide the comments.
 Page-turning
If there is more than one page of comment text for the current exam mode, you can
navigate to other pages by swiping the touch screen leftwards/rightwards.
 User-defined comments
You can customize comments if necessary, including adding/deleting comments and
adjusting the comment display on the touch screen menu.
 Trace
Touch [Trace] on the touch screen to enter trace commenting status.
 Tracing by trackball
Move the trackball to the desired starting point and press <Set>.
Roll the trackball to trace the curve: roll the trackball to the right to draw the curve and to
the left to cancel the curve.
Press <Set> to confirm the end; or the trace curve will close automatically if the cursor is
near the starting point.
 Trace on touch screen
Touch the touch screen to set the starting point and trace the curve, touch the touch
screen again to set the end.

9-2 Comments and Body Marks

9.1.3 Adding Comments
 Typing comment characters
1. To set the comment location:
Roll the trackball or press the direction keys on the keyboard to move the cursor to the desired
comment location.
2. To type alphanumeric characters:
You can enter characters using the keyboard.
 Type alphanumeric characters using the qwerty or soft keyboard (characters are
uppercase by default).
 In edit status (the characters are green in color), press <Enter> to move the cursor to the
new line. The cursor is aligned with the first line.
3. In edit status, press <Set> or <Enter> on the control panel to confirm the added character. The
color of the added character turns to yellow.
 Adding a Comment Text
1. In comment status, select the comment to be added.
You can add comment texts using the following methods:
 Roll the trackball to move the cursor over the desired comment text on the screen menu
and press <Set>. The system adds the selected comment text to the screen. Move the
trackball to confirm.
 Touch the desired comment text on the touch screen. The system adds the selected
comment text to the screen where the cursor is positioned. Edit the comment directly and
roll the trackball to confirm.
2. Exit comment edit status
In comment edit status, press the <Set> or <Enter> key, or roll the trackball to confirm the
added comment text and exit the edit status. The comment changes to yellow.

 Adding an arrow
You can add an arrow to a location you want to highlight.
To add an arrow:
(1) Press the <Arrow> key and an arrow will appear in the default position.
(2) Adjust the shape and position of the arrow:
 To position the arrow on the area of interest: roll the trackball to the desired position.
 To change the orientation of the arrow: rotate the <Angle> knob to change the arrow's
orientation (in increments of 15°).
 Adjust the arrow size: rotate the knob under the [Arrow Size] button on the touch
screen to change the size.
(3) Press <Set> or <Enter> to anchor the arrow's position. The arrow turns yellow. Repeat the
above steps to add more arrows.
(4) Press <Arrow> on the control panel to exit arrow comment status.

 Tracing
(1) In comment status, touch [Trace] on the touch screen to activate the trace function. The
current image is also displayed on the touch screen.
(2) Control Panel operation:
a) Roll the trackball to the desired position and press <Set> to confirm the start point.
b) Roll the trackball to move the cursor along the edge of the desired region and trace
the outline of the region.

Comments and Body Marks 9-3

  Rotate the <Angle> knob counter-clockwise to cancel 1 pixel of trace.
 Rotate the <Angle> knob clockwise to restore 1 pixel of trace.
 Short press <Clear> to clear last trace. Long press <Clear> to delete all tracing.
c) Press <Set> to finish tracing.
Touch screen operation:
a) Trace around the ROI by touching the touch screen image with your finger.
b) Remove your finger to finish tracing.
 [Clear]: touch to delete traces in reverse order one by one.
 [Clear All]: touch to delete all traces.
c) Click [Exit] to exit tracing.

9.1.4 Moving Comments

1. Select the comment to be moved.
2. Roll the trackball to move the comment to a new position.
3. Press the <Set> key to anchor the comment in the new position.

9.1.5 Modifying (Editing) Comments

 Modifying (Editing) characters
1. In comment status, move the cursor over the comments to be modified.
 Press the alphabetic keys to enter the character at the cursor position.
 Or, double press <Set> to enter comment editing status and use the direction keys to
move the cursor to the desired location to insert/delete characters. Either type characters
by pressing the corresponding keys or select the new comment text from the menu.
2. Press <Del.> to delete the comment character or text on the right side of the cursor. Press
<Backspace> to delete the comment character or text on the left side of the cursor.
3. Roll the trackball or press <Set> to confirm the modification and exit the edit status. The
comment turns to yellow.
If there are already comments on the screen, press the space bar to enter editing status.
 Modifying (Editing) Arrows
1. Move the cursor over the arrow that needs to be modified. After the cursor turns to , press
the <Set> key. The current arrow turns green, and there is a green frame around the arrow
indicating that the arrow can be edited. Move the cursor to change the arrow's position.
2. Rotate the <Angle> knob to modify the arrow's direction.
3. Press the <Set> or <Enter> key to complete the operation.

9-4 Comments and Body Marks

9.1.6 Deleting Comments
 Deleting Comment Characters, Texts or Arrows
1. Move the cursor to the comment to be deleted.
2. Press the <Set> key to select the comment.
3. Press the <Back>, <Del.> or <Clear> key to delete the comment.
Or, rotate the knob under [Grab/Del] on the touch screen to select the comment, then press the
knob to delete the comment.
 Deleting a recently-added character, text or arrow
In comment status, press <Clear> to delete the latest added/modified comment unit.
In comment status, enter letters by pressing the alphanumeric key on the keyboard and use
blank key to divide the letters. Press user-defined key for “Delete Word” to delete latest
added/modified comment unit (<F10> -> [System] -> [Key Config]).
 Delete letters one by one
In comment editing status, press <Back> to delete letters before cursor “|”.
In comment editing status, press <Del.> to delete letters after cursor “|”.
In comment status, enter letters by pressing the alphanumeric key on the keyboard. Press
user-defined key for “Delete Word” to delete letters before cursor “|” (<F10> -> [System] ->
[Key Config]).
 Delete All Comments
Press <Delete Text> key or long press <Clear> key to delete all the comments.
NOTE: When no object is selected, long pressing the <Clear> key will clear all comments and
all measurement calipers.
After powering off, the system will clear all comments on the image.

9.1.7 Comment Setting

See “12.4 Comment Preset” for comment preset.
 Comment Setting
Enter the “[Setup] → [System] → [Application]” screen to perform the following setting:
 You can preset whether to clear the comments when unfreezing the image or changing
the probe/exam.
 Set whether body marks are erased when the image is unfrozen.
 Set whether voice comments are enabled.

9.2 Voice Comments

The system supports adding voice comment to the frozen images.
NOTE: it only supports the vocal input from the wired microphone.

9.2.1 Voice Comment Panel

After the system enters the voice comment status, the voice comment panel will be displayed on the
lower left corner of the screen.

Comments and Body Marks 9-5

 Duration

Start/Stop
Recording Recording

9.2.2 Adding Voice Comments

1. To perform voice comments adding, the function should be enabled through the path:
[Preset][System][Application]. Check “Voice Comment Enabled”. Click [Save] to exit. The
voice comment panel appears on the left corner of the screen.

2. Connect the microphone to the mic port of the physic unit panel. The microphone icon appears
highlighted.

3. Acquire the necessary images and press <Freeze> to freeze the image.

4. Press <Freeze> after obtaining the image. Press <Cursor> and roll the trackball to move the

cursor onto the voice comment panel; click to start recording and the icon
becomes red.

5. After the voice recording ends, click he icon to end recording. Press the user-defined key
for saving the cine.
NOTE: in voice comment recording status, you can perform measurements, comments adding,
body marks adding, print tasks and DICOM tasks.
If you press <Freeze> during the recording course, the already recorded voice comment cannot be
saved.

9.2.3 Voice Comment Review

Click to open a cine file with voice comment, and during the cine review mode, voice comments are
played as well.
For details about opening a cine file, please see Chapter “6 Display & Cine Review”.

9.3 Body Mark

NOTE: After powering off, the system will clear all comments on the image.

The Body Mark (Pictogram) feature is used to indicate the patient's position during the exam as
well as the transducer position and orientation.

9-6 Comments and Body Marks

The system supports body marks for Abdomen, Cardiology, GYN, IVF, OB, Urology, Small Part,
Nerve, Emergency and Vascular applications. You can preset the system configured general body
marks for each exam mode. In addition, the system supports to import user-defined body marks.

9.3.1 Touch Screen Display in Body Mark

The body mark touch screen displays the settings for the current mode:
 Library
Rotate the knob under the [Library] button on the touch screen or press the knob to switch to
the body mark library. Corresponding body marks are shown on the left.
 Page-turning
If there is more than one page of body marks, rotate the knob under [Page] to turn the pages.
 Save Probe
If the probe mark direction and position is determined for the current body mark being added,
touch [Save Probe] to save the current probe mark direction and position for the body mark.

9.3.2 Adding Body Marks

1. Enter Body Mark status. Use the knob under [Library] to select the body mark category.
2. Adding Body Marks:
 Adding body marks using the trackball and <Set> key.
Move the cursor over the desired body mark to highlight your choice. Press <Set> to add
the body mark.
 Adding body marks using the touch screen.
Touch the desired body mark on the touch screen directly.
3. To adjust the probe position and orientation marker:
 Roll the trackball to position the probe marker.
 Rotate the <Angle/Steer> knob to adjust the orientation.
 Touch [Save Probe] to save the current probe mark direction and position for the body
mark.
4. Press <Set> to confirm the position and orientation of the probe marker and exit body mark
mode.

9.3.3 Moving Body Marks

You can move the body mark graphics to any desired position within the image area.
1. Press <Cursor> and roll the trackball to move the cursor over the body mark. The cursor then
changes to , indicating you can move the pictogram to a new position.
2. Press the <Set> key to select the body mark.
3. Roll the trackball to move the Body Mark graphic to the desired position.
4. Press <Set> to anchor and confirm the graphic's new position.
NOTE: In Dual B Mode, a body mark cannot be moved between the separate image windows.

9.3.4 Deleting Body Marks

1. Use the trackball to position the cursor over the body mark graphic and press <Set> to select.
2. Press <Clear> to delete the selected body mark.
NOTE: If no object is selected, long pressing the [Clear] key will clear all comments, body marks
and general measurements from the screen.

Comments and Body Marks 9-7

 9.3.5 Body Mark Setting
Returning to the preset or changing the exam/patient/mode/probe will clear the body marks.

9-8 Comments and Body Marks

10 Patient Data Management
An exam record consists of all the information and data for one exam.
An exam record consists of the following information:
 Patient basic information and exam data
 Image files
 Report
NOTE: 1. DO NOT use the internal hard drive for long-term image storage. Daily backup is
recommended. External storage media is recommended for archiving images.
2. The system's patient database space is limited. Back up or clear patient data
regularly.
3. Mindray is not responsible for lost data if you DO NOT follow the recommended
backup procedures.

10.1 Patient Information Management

10.1.1 Enter Patient Information
General patient information and exam information are entered using the Patient Info screen. For
details, see “4.1 Patient Information.”

10.2 Image File Management

You can store image files either in the patient database in the system, or to external memory
devices. For a saved image, you can perform operations such as reviewing, analyzing and
demonstrating images (iVision).

10.2.1 Memory Media

The system supports memory media including:
 System hard disk
 USB memory devices: USB flash drive, removable USB hard disk
 DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD-RW, CD-RW, CD-R

10.2.2 Image File Formats

The system supports two types of image file formats: system-relevant and PC-compatible.
 System-relevant formats:
 Single-frame image file (FRM)
Refers to single-frame static image files which cannot be compressed. You can add
measurements and comments on this type of file.
 Cine file (CIN)
System-defined multi-frame file format. You can perform manual or auto cine review, and
perform measurements or add comments for the reviewed images. After you open a stored
CIN file, the system automatically enters cine review status.

Patient Data Management 10-1

 The system can save FRM files as BMP, JPG, TIFF, PNG or DCM files, or save CIN files as AVI
or DCM files by Send To function in iStation screen. For details, please refer to “10.2.12 Sending
Image Files” chapter.
 PC-compatible formats:
 Screen file (BMP)
Single-frame file format, used to save the current screen, non-compressed format.
 JPG: single frame export format.
 TIFF: single frame export format.
 Multi-medium file (AVI)
Multi-frame export format.
 DICOM file (DCM)
DICOM standard file format, single-frame or multi-frame format, used to record patient
information and images, you can only open DCM files to view rather than to edit.

10.2.3 Image Storage Preset

 Set image size
You can set the image size via “[Setup] → [System] → [Image]”:

 Set cine saving length (clip length)

For details, see “6.7 Setting Cine Length.”
 Set send/print image after ending the exam
Open “[Setup] → [System] → [General]”, check “Sending/printing Image after End Exam” in the
Patient Management area. Then every time you press <End Exam>, the system will send
images of the exam to the connected default DICOM server.

10.2.4 Quickly Saving Images to the System

 To save a single-frame image to the system quickly:
 Operating procedure:
a) Set the user-defined key via the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Key Config]. Select a
key in the Key Function field on the left side, and select “Save Image” in the Output
page of the Function field on the right side.
b) Press the user-defined key to save the image.
 Format:
a) On the image screen, the image is saved with the default filename in the default file
directory in FRM format.
b) When a dialog box is displayed on the current screen, interface for the current
dialogue box is saved in BMP format.
Single-frame image is saved to the system by default name. The image thumbnail will
appear in the thumbnail area on the right side of the screen. When you move the cursor
over the thumbnail, its filename and suffix will be displayed.
 To save a cineloop image to the system quickly:
1. Set the user-defined key via the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Key Config]. Select a key in the
Key Function field on the left side, and select “Save Cine (Retrospective)” or “Save Cine
(Prospective)” in the Output page of the Function field on the right side.
2. Press the user-defined key to save the cine file in the default file directory in CIN format.

10-2 Patient Data Management

 The image thumbnail will appear in the thumbnail area on the bottom of the screen. When you
move the cursor over the thumbnail, its filename and suffix will be displayed.
You can set the clip saving length in the path: [Setup] → [System] → [General].

10.2.5 Quickly Saving Full Screen Images to the System

 Operating procedure:
1. Set the user-defined key via the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Key Config]. Select a key in the
Key Function field on the left side, and select “Save Screen” in the Output page of the Function
field on the right side.
2. Press the user-defined key to save the image in BMP format.
The image thumbnail will appear in the thumbnail area on the bottom side of the screen. When
you move the cursor over the thumbnail, its filename and suffix will be displayed.

10.2.6 Quickly Saving Images to USB Flash Drive

Use the user-defined key to quickly save the single-frame to USB flash drive.
The image file is stored in the directory: patient name + ID\exam type + exam time\image ID.
1. Set the user-defined key via the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Key Config].
Select a key in the Key Function field on the left side, and select “Send Image to USB disk”
in the Output page of the Function field on the right side. Click [Save] to exit setup.
2. Press the user-defined key to save the image to the USB flash drive.

10.2.7 Quickly Exporting Cine File to USB Flash Drive

Use the user-defined key to quickly save the cine file to USB flash Drive directly (without saving to
the hard disk).
The file is stored in the directory: X (USB flash drive name): patient name+ ID\exam type + exam
time \ image ID.
1. Set the user-defined key through the path: [Setup]→ [System]→ “Key Config”. Select a key in the
Key Function page on the left side and select “Send Cine to USB disk” in the Output page of
Function field on the right side. Click [Save] to exit preset page.
2. Scan and freeze the image
3. Press the user-defined key to save the cine to the USB flash drive.

10.2.8 Auxiliary Output Function

For the following three functions, the system provides auxiliary output function setting: “Save
Image”, "Save Cine (Retrospective)" and “Save Cine (Prospective)”. When the corresponding user-
defined key is pressed, the ultrasound system can perform multiple operations one by one as per
the preset.
 Save Image
 Send Image to DICOM Storage
 Send Image to DICOM Printer
 Send Image to USB disk
 Send Image to iStorage
 Send Image to Local Default Printer
 Save Cine (Retrospective)/(Prospective):
 Send Cine to DICOM Storage
 Send Cine to USB disk
 Send Cine to iStorage

Patient Data Management 10-3

 Setting method (take “Save Image” as an example, add the auxiliary functions “Send Image to
DICOM Storage” and “Send Image to USB disk”):
1. Set the user-defined key through the path: [Setup]→ [System]→ [Key Config]. Select a key in the
Key Function field on the left side and select “Save Image” in the Output page of Function field
on the right side.
2. Click [Add] in the middle part of the screen, then there will be “Function2: NULL” under the key
function in the Key Function Field on the left side, and at the same time, “Output” column on the
right side will show the available auxiliary functions for current key. Select “Send Image to
DICOM Storage” in the “Output” column on the right side. Then the Function2 on the left side
turns into “Send Image to DICOM Storage”.
3. Click [Add] again, then there will be “Function3: NULL” under the key function in the Key
Function Field on the left side. Select “Send Image to USB disk” in the “Output” column on the
right side. Then the Function 3 on the left side turns into “Send Image to USB disk”.
4. Click [Save] to confirm.
5. Scan and freeze the image
6. Press the user-defined key, then the system will perform three steps: 1. Save the image to the
local hard disk; 2. Send image to DICOM Storage server; 3. Send the image to USB disk.
Tips: repeat step 3 will continue adding auxiliary functions, you can add 6 functions at most.

10.2.9 Thumbnails
Stored images are displayed in the form of thumbnails on the screen:
 During image scanning, thumbnails of the current exam display in the bottom of the
screen.
 In the iStation screen, the thumbnails of the current selected patient display at the bottom
of the screen. When you move the cursor over a thumbnail, its name and format display.
 In the Review screen, the thumbnails refer to the images stored in the same exam. When
you move the cursor over a thumbnail, its name and format display.
 In the Review screen, open an image to enter the image analyzing status. All the
thumbnails belonging to the exam will be displayed on the bottom.

10.2.10 Image Review and Analysis

You can review and analyze stored images (only refer to images stored in the system default path).

10.2.10.1 Review an Image

You can review all images stored in an exam, and send, delete or analyze the stored images.
The cine file is played automatically in image review screen.
 To enter image review:
 During image scanning, saved image thumbnails display in the bottom of the screen.
Move the cursor over a thumbnail and press <Set> twice to open the image. If the stored
image is a cine file, double-click the thumbnail to enter the auto cine review.
 Press <Review> to enter the Review screen. Images of the current exam and the current
patient are displayed.
 Select a patient's exam in the iStation screen and press <Review> or double-click the
exam to enter the Review screen to review the images of the patient.

 Under touch screen mapping mode, touch icon on the toolbar to enter review
screen;
 If a saved image has been open from the main screen, under touch screen mapping mode,

touch and icon on the toolbar or swipe the touch screen to review the image.

10-4 Patient Data Management

 The Review screen is shown as follows:

 To exit Review:
 Click [Exit] on the Review screen
 Press <ESC> or press <Review> again.
Functions in the Review screen:
 Exam History:
You can select more than one exams of one patient in iStation screen to check the patient
exam history.
 Info
Click to enter the Patient Info screen, you can review or edit the currently-selected patient's
information.
 Report
Click to review or edit the currently-selected patient's report.
 Image operations
[Select All]: click to select all images in the thumbnail window.
[Deselect All]: after clicking [Select All], the button changes to [Deselect All]. Cancel all
selections by clicking [Deselect All].
[Send To]: click to send the selected image to another location, DICOM server,
MedTouch/MedSight devices, DVD recorder, printer, etc. Or select the image and click the
icon at the top right of the image.
[Delete]: click to delete the selected image.
[Image Compare]: image compare function. For details, see “6.5 Image Compare” chapter.

Patient Data Management 10-5

  Thumbnail Size
To change the thumbnail size.
 Other operations:
 [New Exam]: click to create a new exam for the selected patient and open the Patient
Info screen.
 [Activate Exam]: activate the currently-selected exam (already ended) and enter the
image scanning screen.
 [iStation]: click to enter the iStation screen.
 [Exit]: click to exit Review status and return to the main screen.

10.2.10.2 Image Analysis

In image analysis status, you can view, zoom, perform post-processing and measurements, add
comments and perform cine (multi-frame) review for a stored image (FRM or CIN format). The
operation steps are the same as those for real-time scanning. See the relevant sections for details.
 To enter image analysis:
 In image scanning or freeze status, double-click a thumbnail stored in this exam to enter
the image analysis status, or
 In image review status, double-click the selected thumbnail to open the image.
 To exit image analysis:
 Press <Freeze> to exit and enter real-time scanning status.
 Click [Return] to exit image analysis and enter review status.
In image analysis status, the selected image is displayed on the screen and the thumbnails of
the same exam are displayed on the thumbnail area. Turn pages and change the image
display format using the buttons below the thumbnail.
 Other operations
You can perform cine review operations in image analysis status. For details, see “6 Display &
Cine Review.”

10-6 Patient Data Management

10.2.11 iVision
The iVision function is used to demonstrate the stored images. Image files are played one by one
according to file names (including system-relevant and PC-compatible format images).
To perform image demonstration:
1. Enter the iVision screen:
Press the user-defined key for iVision (setting path: [Setup] → [System] → [Key Config])
2. Add the contents to be played and select demo mode.
3. Select an item in the list and click [Start] to begin the demonstration.
4. Click [Exit] or press <ESC> to exit iVision status.
The iVision screen is shown as follows:

 Demonstration item
Demonstration items are image files in formats supported by the system. You can add exam data
from the patient database or system-supported image files and folders to the demonstration list.
For files and folders in the demonstration list, the images in the directory and subdirectory are
played one by one, and the system will automatically skip files that cannot be opened.
 Demonstration catalog
There are two kinds of catalog: Demo Catalog and Customize Catalog.
 Demo Catalog: the demo catalog is a folder on the hard disk where the factory DEMO is
stored. The system plays the images in this folder when performing demonstrations.
The system supports importing, deleting or clearing the data in the demo catalog.
Click [Demo Manager] to operate:
[>]: to import data into the demo catalog.
[<]: to delete selected data.
[<<]: to delete all data.
 Customize Catalog: the catalog of the displayed images is saved here. The system plays
the images in the catalog when performing demonstrations.
Operate the catalog or the files using the buttons on the right:
[Add File]: to add files to the file list.

Patient Data Management 10-7

 [Add Catalog]: to add a catalog of files to the list.
[Delete]: to delete selected files or catalogs from the file list.
[Clear]: to clear all the files or catalogs in the file list.
[Export]: to export selected directories/files to external storage devices. Click [Export] to
bring up the Browse dialog box, select the path and click [OK].
 Demonstration mode
The system automatically plays all the image files in the list one by one.
The time interval between images played is the same and can be changed.
 Demo options
You can choose whether to repeat the demonstration or exit after a demonstration is complete.

10.2.12 Sending Image Files

NOTE: Data saved this way can only be reviewed on the PC and cannot be restored to the
ultrasound system. See “10.4.3 Patient Data View & Management” chapter for details
about data backup.

 On the image screen, select a stored image thumbnail and click (Send To) in the top-right
corner of the image. Or you can touch icon on the touch screen under touch screen
mapping mode (see “3.8.4 Touch Screen Operation” for details). The image can be sent to the
external device, DVD recorder, MedTouch/MedSight devices, DICOM storage server, DICOM
print server, system connected printer, etc.
 In the iStation screen, click , or, in the Review screen, click [Send To] to send patient data to
an external memory device. See the figure below.
See the figure below.

 For external memory devices (e.g., USB memory devices or DVD-RW) or iStorage:

10-8 Patient Data Management

 a) PC format transfer: JPG/AVI, BMP/AVI, TIFF/AVI, JPG/MP4, BMP/MP4, TIFF/MP4.
Where a single-frame image is exported as JPG, TIFF or BMP, and the cine file is
exported as AVI (windows), MP4(Mac OS).
b) DCM format transfer: DCM (including single-frame DCM and multi-frame DCM).
c) Cine zoom mode, compression mode, compression ratio, and Doppler audio can be
changed.
d) You can also select whether to export reports and select the report type.
e) To select to hide patient information.
 For DICOM servers, select the DICOM Storage or Print server.
 For video printers, send images to the video printer connected to the system. For
graph/text printers, send images to the default graph/text printer.
 For UltraView, send images to UltraView connected to the system.
 Used for UltraView required environment setting, should be used combined with off-line
software. For details, please refer to UltraView operator’s manual.
 Send the image to MedTouch/MedSight as necessary.
NOTE: The file sent to MedTouch/MedSigh is transferred into PNG format, and the cine file is
transferred into AVI or MP4 format.
If the transferred AVI file cannot be played normally on PC, please try to transfer the
multi-frame cine file in MP4 format or use a VLC media player.
You can select whether to hide patient info: if "Default Info" is selected, the patient
name is hide after backup; if "Custom Info" is selected, the system prompts a message
requiring you to input the customed patient name, which will be displayed after
backup.

10.3 Report Management

You can create user-defined report templates using the UltraAssist tool and then import them into
the ultrasound system to carry out specific measurements.
For details about this feature, see the UltraAssist manual.
 Report storage:
Exam reports are stored under the patient exam directory.
 Importing, exporting and sending reports
 Import/export reports via Backup
In the iStation screen, select patient data, then click or in the menu which appears to
import or export patient information, images and reports from or to an external memory device.
See the following figure:

Patient Data Management 10-9

 1) Select the destination.
2) Select whether to remove from local HD after Backup: if "Remove Exams" is selected, the
patient information and images are removed; if "Remove Images" is selected, only the
patient images are removed.
3) Select whether to hide patient info: if "Default Info" is selected, the patient name is hide
after backup; if "Custom Info" is selected, the system prompts a message requiring you to
input the customed patient name, which will be displayed after backup.
4) Select whether to encrypt backup exams for USB only: input the password and confirm
password in the field box, and then click [Backup]. A "Patient.7z" compressed package is
backed up to the USB device, and you need to input the password to open the package.
Notes: 1. If the password is forgotten, you cannot open the backup
package.
2. The password cannot be multi-language or Chinese
characters.
 Export reports via Send To
In the iStation or Review screen, click [Send Exam] in the menu which appears to send patient
data to an external memory device or iStorage. You can choose whether reports are exported
with images. See the figure below.

10-10 Patient Data Management

 To export reports:
(1) Check “Export Report” on the screen.
(2) Select the report type to be exported.
(3) Select whether to hide patient info: if "Default Info" is selected, the patient name is hide after
backup; if "Custom Info" is selected, the system prompts a message requiring you to input
the customed patient name, which will be displayed after backup.
(4) Click [OK] to confirm.
You can select the paper size for the report print in the path: [Setup] → [Print].
 Report printing
Use a connected graph/text printer to print a report.
For details on report-related operations, see [Advanced Volume].

Patient Data Management 10-11

 10.4 iStation - Patient Data Management
Patient data includes basic patient information, exam information, image files and reports. You can
search, view, backup, send, restore or delete patient data in iStation.
 To Enter iStation
 Press the <iStation> key on the control panel, or
 Click [iStation] in the Patient Info screen, or
 Click [iStation] in the Review screen.
The iStation screen is shown as follows:

10.4.1 Viewing Patient Information

 Data Source
Select the patient data's data source; the system patient database is the default.
 Patient list
Display patient information, exam mode, number of images and cines, exam state, whether
backed up or not.
 New Exam
After you select a patient data or exam in the iStation screen, click the [New Exam] to enter the
Patient Info screen where you can select the exam mode and click [OK] to begin a new exam.
 Select All/Deselect All
Click [Select All] to select all the patient data listed. The button changes to [Deselect All].
Cancel all the selections by clicking [Deselect All].

10.4.2 Searching a Patient

1. Select the data source:
Click [Data Source] to select the patient data's data source; the system patient database is the
default.
2. Set search conditions by Name, ID, DOB, Exam Date in the “Item” drop-down list.
3. Enter the keyword according to the “Item” selected.

10-12 Patient Data Management

4. When you select a patient in the patient list, images of this patient will be displayed at the bottom
of the screen.

10.4.3 Patient Data View & Management

Select the desired patient information in the list. The following menu appears:

 Review an Image
Select a patient exam, click [Review Image] to enter the Review screen.
 Patient Information
Select a patient exam, click [Patient Info] to check the patient information for this exam.
 Review Report
After selecting a patient exam, click [Review Report] to view the report of this exam for this
patient.
 Delete Exam
 Select an exam record, click [Delete Exam] to delete the record. You cannot delete patient
data which is being printed, exported or sent, or delete the current exam.
 To delete an image, select the image first and then click on the top right side. Or
touch on the toolbar on the touch screen in touch screen mapping status. See “3.8.4
Touch Screen Operation” for details
 Backup/Restore
You can back up the selected patient data to the system-supported media in order to view it on
the ultrasound system, or restore patient data to the system from an external media.
 [Backup Exam]: click to back up the selected patient data to the system-supported media.
 You can select whether to remove images or the whole exam record from the system.
 Original format: to back up the data in its original format.
 DICOM format: you can change the cine compression mode and JPEG compression
mode.
 [Restore Exam]: click to import patient data from an external media.

 Send Exams
The system supports sending data to external memory devices, print or iStorage. You can use
this function to export the exam data to external devices (in PC data or DICOMDIR data format)
and then import to PC or restore to the ultrasound system to review the data.
1. Select the patient record, click [Send Exam] in the menu to send exam data and images of the
selected record.

Patient Data Management 10-13

 2. Select target:
 DICOM: send data or images to the storage server or send images to DICOM printer.
 DICOMDIR: back up data in DICOMDIR format; change the cine zoom mode,
compression mode, and compression ratio.
 USB storage device or DVD-RW/DVD+RW drive: send exam to USB storage device or
DVD-RW/DVD+RW drive.
 Report format can be selected.
 Format transfer is available when sending images to USB device or disk. See
“10.2.12 Sending Image Files” for details.
 Print: send image to the connected printer to print.
Press <Ctrl> or <Shift> with the <Set> key on the control panel to select more than one
exam at a time.
 MedTouch/MedSight: send the exam to MedTouch/MedSight devices for review.
 New Exam
After you select a patient data or exam in the iStation screen, click the [New Exam] to enter the
Patient Info screen where you can select the exam mode and click [OK] to begin a new exam.
 Select All/Deselect All
Click [Select All] to select all the patient data listed. The button changes to [Deselect All]. Cancel
all the selections by clicking [Deselect All].
 Activate an Exam
After selecting an exam which has been performed within 24 hours, click [Activate Exam] to
activate the exam and load the basic patient information and measurement data to continue the
exam.
If you want to select patient data in an external memory database to start a new exam or recover
the exam, first allow the system to load the patient data to the system’s patient database.

 Continue an Exam
Select an exam that has been paused within 24 hours, click [Continue Exam] to activate the
exam and load the basic patient information and measurement data to continue the exam.

10-14 Patient Data Management

 If you want to select patient data in an external memory database, first allow the system to load
the patient data to the system’s patient database.

 Recycle bin
The recycle bin is used to store deleted patient data, exam data and images.

To recover deleted patient data, click in the bottom-right corner of the screen (when the
button is gray, the operation is unavailable) to enter the Patient Recycle Bin screen.
(1) Select items to be recovered in the list. Select operations:
 Click [Restore Items] to restore the item to iStation.
 Click [Delete] to delete the item permanently. The item can never be restored again.
 Click [Restore All Items] to restore all the items to iStation.
 Click [Empty Recycle Bin] to empty the recycle bin. All the items can never be restored
again.
(2) Click [Exit] to exit the Recycle Bin screen.
NOTE: If there are more than 200 records in recycle bin, the system will ask you to clear the bin
or not. Mindray recommends you clear the recycle bin regularly.

Patient Data Management 10-15

 10.5 iStorage
iStorage is used to save image files and measurement reports to the remote PC server.
Open “[Setup] → [Network]→[iStorage]” to set the iStorage settings (see “12.9.1 iStorage Preset”
chapter for details).
1. Enter the iStation screen. Select one (or more than one) patient data or image in the local data
source.
2. Click [Send Exam].
3. Select [iStorage] in the Send To dialog box and select the PC server on the right.
4. Select PC transfer format to send the report.
5. Click [OK] to start sending.
To use iStorage function, you need UltraAssist software in 2.0 version (with V1.0 network protocol);
consult Mindray service engineer for details.

10.6 Network Storage

Network storage is used to save image files and measurement reports to the remote PC server.
Open “[Setup]→[Network]→[Network Storage]” to set properties for network storage. (For details,
please refer to “12.9.5 Network Storage”)
1. Enter iStation; select one (or more than one) patient data or image in the local data source.
2. Click [Send Exam].
3. Select [Net Storage] in the Send To dialogue box, and select the PC server on the right side.
4. Select PC transfer format and check if to send report.
5. Click [OK] to start sending.

10.7 Print
10.7.1 Print Setting
For printer connection and driver installation, please refer to “3.7 Installing a Printer” chapter.
 Print Service Setting
1. Open [Setup] → [Print] and select an existing printer service from the list.
2. Select the printer type in the Property box.
3. Set printing properties.
4. Click [Save] to confirm the setting and exit the preset page.
 User-defined shortcut key for printing
To use the <Print> key on the system's control panel, you may need to:
1. Press the <F10 Setup> key to show the Setup menu. Click the [System] item to open the
[System] screen, and click the [Key Config] tab.
2. Click to select “Print” on the left. Click to select the desired print key on the right.
3. Click [Save] to exit the preset and make the settings effective. Press the <Print> key on the
control panel to print.
 Output settings:
Open [Setup] → [System] → [Output], then select the video output mode: PAL or NTSC.

10-16 Patient Data Management

Open [Setup] → [System] → [Output], then select the digital output mode: Full screen or stand
area.

10.7.2 Image Printing

Image printing is mainly achieved by video printer. For DICOM image printing, see the DICOM
chapter.
 Modify a print service:
(1) Select an existing printer service from the list.
(2) Select the printer model, then set the properties in the Property box.
(3) Click [Save] to complete.
 Image print
1. Select the desired image in the iStation or Review screen.
2. Click the icon on the top right side of the image, and select the printer in the dialog box which
appears.
3. Click [OK] to start printing.
See the accompanying printer manuals for more details.

10.7.3 Report Printing

Both reports and images can be printed on a graph/text printer.
1. Press <Report> to enter the report dialog box.
2. Select [Print] on the touch screen to print the report.
See the accompanying printer manuals for more details.

10.8 Back Up Files using the DVD Drive

The system supports writing data to CD/DVD using the DVD-RW/DVD+RW drive and reading data
from CD/DVD on the PC.
The system supports the following media: DVD+RW, DVD+R, CD-RW, CD-R, DVD-R and DVD-
RW.
 To write data to a CD/DVD:
(1) Put a CD/DVD in the tray.
(2) Select the data to be backed up. Select [Send Exam] or [Back up Exam] in the menu
which appears. Select the target drive in the Send To or Back Up Patient Record
dialog box.
(3) Click [OK] or [Back up] to begin writing when the symbol displays.
(4) After the writing process is complete, click to bring up the Disc Option dialog box, and
select [Eject] to eject the CD/DVD.
Tip:
 Writing data using “Send To” supports the PC format transfer function, while CD/DVD
writing using “Back Up” supports only system-relevant formats.
 The symbol indicates that the input CD/DVD is damaged or contains data in an
incorrect format.

You can check the data writing procedure in the patient task manager. For details, see “10.9
Patient Task Management.”

Patient Data Management 10-17

 During the backup process, if a CD/DVD is forcibly taken out or you
CAUTION: perform other operations, the backup process will fail or the system
may malfunction.

10.9 Patient Task Management

Click in the bottom-right corner of the screen to bring up the following dialog box:

The system supports following types of task management:

 Storage Task: displays the DICOM storage task.
 DICOM Print Task: displays the DICOM print task.
 Media Storage Task:
 DICOM media storage task (including disc and USB devices): in iStation screen, select the
target exam and click [Send Exam], then click DICOMDIR in the menu which appears.
 Back up task (system-relevant format): select the exam to be backed up in iStation and
click [Back Up Exam].
 Send to external devices (including disc and USB devices): select exam data or images in
the iStation or Review screen. Click [Send Exam] or for the image.
 iStorage task: in iStation screen, select the target exam and click [Send Exam], then click
iStorage in the menu which appears.
 MedTouch/MedSight storage task:
In iStation screen, send exam to MedTouch/MedTouch devices.
On review screen, iStation screen, thumbnail area, send the image(s) to
MedTouch/MedSight devices.
 Log upload: displays log uploading tasks.
 Print Task: displays image or report printing tasks.
In the Task Management dialog box, the patient ID, name, destination, progress, type, contents
and task created time are displayed.
You can perform the following operations:
 Click [Delete] to delete the task.
 Click [Retry] to retry the failed task.
 Click [Select All] to select all the tasks.

10-18 Patient Data Management

 Task Status

When there are tasks underway, the task management icon displays as . Click the icon to
check the process.

When tasks have failed, the task management icon displays as . Click the icon to check
the reason for the failure.

When the task management icon displays as , it means no task is underway or has failed.
 DICOM Service Setting
On the Storage Task and DICOM Print Task page, click [Service Setting] to enter the DICOM
service setting screen. For details, see the DICOM chapter.
 Troubleshooting
If a serious error occurs, such as network disconnection or operation timeout, the system can
try to reconnect the network. The interval time and maximum retries can be set as desired. For
details, see the DICOM chapter.

10.10 Administration
10.10.1 Access Control
The system supports two types of users: system administrator and operator.
Administrator
The system administrator can access all function modules, and view all patient data, such as
patient information, images and reports, etc. Only one administrator is configured by default.
The administrator can add or delete operators.
Operator
The operator can only access the function modules with assigned privileges (for details about
privilege assignment, please refer to "10.10.4 Local Privilege Management" and "10.10.5
LDAP Privilege Management"). The operator can only view exam information saved in the
system and operated by him or herself, such as patient information, images and reports, etc.
The operator cannot view exam data operated by others.

10.10.2 Enabling Access Control

The system administrator can preset the access controls, that is, whether an operator has the right
to access data in the system.
Access control only can be set by the system administrator.
Setting access control:
1. Open the “Access Control” page using the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Access Control].
2. If is selected, you must be authorized before accessing the data,
and you can configure password policy and LDAP, and change password. If unselected, you
can access all the data without authorization, and you cannot configure password policy and
LDAP, and change password.

3. If is selected, the administrator can edit privileges for emergency

users. If unselected, the administrator cannot edit privileges for emergency users.

10.10.3 System Login

If access control has been set by the system administrator, you can access data in the system only
after logging onto the system.
You must log in again after system restart or dormancy.

Patient Data Management 10-19

 Logging onto the system:
1. The following dialog box appears:

2. Select the login type (Local or LDAP), and user name in the drop-down list.
3. Enter the password and click [Login].
To change users:

1. To log out the current user and change to another user, click in the bottom-right corner of
the screen to bring up the following dialog box:

2. Click [Change User] to bring up the Login dialog box.

3. Select the login type, and user name in the drop-down list.
4. Enter the password and click [Login]
Lock the system

1. Click the in the bottom-right corner of the screen to bring up the dialog box.
2. Select [Lock Machine] and the system is locked. You must log on before using the system.

10.10.4 Local Privilege Management

The system administrator can add and delete users, and assign privileges, while the operator
cannot. The privileges can be assigned through the local system or LDAP server.

Adding a User/ assigning privilege

Turn on the access control function and log in to the system as Administrator before you add the
user.

10-20 Patient Data Management

1. Open the “Access Control” page using the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Access Control].
2. Click [Add] to bring up the dialog box.

3. Enter the user name and password, confirm password, and select or deselect the check box
from the privilege list. Users can only access the function module with assigned privilege.
4. Click [OK] to confirm the setting and exit the dialog box. The new user and the privilege will appear
in the User List.

Deleting a User
Turn on the access control function and log in to the system as Administrator before you delete the
user.
1. Open the “Access Control” page using the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Access Control].
2. Select the user to be deleted in the User List. Click [Delete] to delete the selected user.

Editing privilege
Turn on the access control function and log in to the system as Administrator before you edit
privileges.
1. Open the “Access Control” page using the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Access Control].

Patient Data Management 10-21

 2. Select a user, click [Edit Privilege] to enter the "Edit user privilege" dialog box, and select or
deselect the check box from the privilege list.

3. Click [OK] to confirm the editing and exit the dialog box. The edited privileges will appear in the
User List.

Modifying Passwords
The system administrator can modify all user passwords. The administrator password is empty by
factory default. You can set this password.
An operator can only modify his/her own password. There are two ways to modify passwords: on
the “Access Control” page or in the “Session Manage” dialog box.
“Access Control” page (administrators can modify the password)
1. Open the “Access Control” page using the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Access Control”].
2. Select the user name to be modified in User List. Click [Change Password] to open the dialog
box.

3. Enter both the previous and new passwords, and confirm the new password in the dialog box.
4. Click [OK] to exit.
Session Manage page (general operators and administrators can modify the password).

When the user has logged onto the system, is visible in the bottom-right corner of the
screen.

1. Click in the bottom-right corner to bring up the Session Manage dialog box where you can
see the current user’s information.
2. If you want to modify the current password, click [Change Password] to bring up the Change
Password dialog box.
3. Enter both the previous and new passwords, and confirm the new password in the dialog box.

10-22 Patient Data Management

4. Click [OK] to exit.

Configuring password policy

Turn on the access control function and log in to the system as Administrator before you configure
the password policy.
1. Open the “Access Control” page using the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Access Control]. Click
[Password Policy Config]:

Parameter Description Remark

Set the maximum time that a user can input the For example, assume
Lockout
wrong password. If you exceed the maximum that the "Lockout
Threshold
times, your account will be locked. Threshold" is set to 5,
Reset the "Reset Account
Account Lockout Threshold
Set the duration allowed for a user to after" is set to 60, and
Lockout
continuously input the wrong password. the "Lockout Duration"
Threshold
after is set to 60. That is, a

Patient Data Management 10-23

 Parameter Description Remark
user inputs the wrong
password for 5 times
within 60 minutes, the
account is locked, and
Lockout the user can log in to
Set the duration after an account is locked. the system only after
Duration
60 minutes. Other
users with unlocked
accounts can still log in
to the system normally.
Reset all
Reset all locked accounts. /
lockout
Enable strong password to improve security.
 If the strong password is enabled and you
log in to the system with the account that is
added before the strong password is
enabled, the system prompts a warning
message to inform you whether your
password conforms to the password policy.

Enable
strong The administrator can change password for /
password administrator or operator via [Setup] → [Access
Control].
 If the strong password is enabled and you
add a new user account, the system prompt
an error message to inform you that the
password is too weak:

Please modify the password according to the

error message.

Setting automatic machine locking time

Turn on the access control function and log in to the system as Administrator before you set the
automatic maching locking time. Deselect [ScreenSaver] or [Standby] via [Setup]-> [System]->
[General].
1. Open the “Access Control” page using the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Access Control].

10-24 Patient Data Management

2. Set the automatic machine locking time in the drop-down list beside "Auto Lock Machine".
3. Click [Save] to exit.
4. The system automatically locks the machine after exceeding the set time. In this case, you
can unlock the current account or change users.

10.10.5 LDAP Privilege Management

Turn on the access control function and log in to the system as Administrator before you edit
privileges for the LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) users.
1. Enter [Setup] → [System] → [Access Control] → [LDAP Config].

2. Enter the server address in the field box after accessing the network.
3. Click [Test LDAP server] to test whether the LDAP server is accessible. If the LDAP is
accessible, the system prompts the following message "Server test succeeded."
Parameter Description
It is automatically displayed after the
Root DN
server is successfully tested.
The default domain is the DC name in the
Root DN. For example, if DC=security1,
Default Domain
then input "security1" in the field box of
the "Default Domain"

Patient Data Management 10-25

 Parameter Description
Set days to keep the cached passwords
in the local system
Users can log in to the server even
without accessing the network within the
setting days.
Days to keep cached  Empty: the passwords are kept in the
password local system permanently.
 0: no passwords are kept in the local
system.
 >1: for example, if it is set to 5, the
passwords are kept in the local
system for 5 days.

Adding a user
1. Enter [Setup] → [System] → [Access Control] → [LDAP Config].
2. Enter the member name, and select or deselect privileges from the drop-down list of "Privilege".
3. Click [Add], and the new members and privileges will appear in the Member of filter list.

Deleting a user
1. Enter [Setup] → [System] → [Access Control] → [LDAP Config].
2. Select a member to be deleted, and click [Delete].

Modifying the member name or privileges

1. Enter [Setup] → [System] → [Access Control] → [LDAP Config].
2. Select a member to be modified, modify the member name, and select or deselect privileges
from the drop-down list of "Privilege".
3. Click [Modify], and the modified member name and privileges will appear in the Member of
filter list.

Logon test
1. Enter [Setup] → [System] → [Access Control] → [LDAP Config].
2. Enter the User name and password in the field boxes of the Authentication test area.
3. Click [Logon Test] to test whether the user is authenticated. After successful authentication, the
system prompts the following message:

10-26 Patient Data Management

User field name
1. Enter [Setup] → [System] → [Access Control] → [LDAP Config].
2. Select [Use user field name] to customize the user field name. After that, the members and
privileges cannot be edited.
3. Enter the user field name in the field box of the "User field name" (the user field names are
configured in the LDAP server. For details, please refer to the LDAP server manual).

10.10.6 User Field Name

The user field name corresponding to privileges are as follows:
Privilege User field name
iStation Access 1
Save Exam 2
Export Exam 4
Network Settings 8
Maintenance Menus 16
System Settings 32
Workflow Settings 64
Worklist Access 128

Note: the privilege items can be combined randomly. For example, if user A is assigned with all the
above 8 privileges, the user field name for user A is 1+2+4+8+16+32+64+128=255.

10.11 V-Access
The ultrasound system can be used to log on to a remote server to check or modify patient data on
the server.
1. Set the user-defined key via the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Key Config]. Select a key in the
Key Function field on the left side, and select “V Access” in the Other page of the Function
field on the right side.
2. Press the user-defined key to use the function.
3. The system brings up a dialog box for entering the IP address of the remote server.

Patient Data Management 10-27

 4. Enter the IP address and click [OK].
5. Log on with the server account and password.
6. Check the data transferred and carry out operations as necessary.

10-28 Patient Data Management

11 DICOM/HL7
NOTE: Before using DICOM, read the DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT electronic file
provided with the device.
The chapter is restricted to the preset, connection verification and DICOM services of the DICOM-
configured ultrasound machine, and does not include SCP configurations such as PACS/RIS/HIS.
The DICOM package is optional. For details, see “2.5.3 Options”.
This system supports the following DICOM functions:
 Verify Connectivity
 DICOM Storage
 DICOM Print
 DICOM Worklist
 MPPS (Modality Performed Procedure Step)
 Storage Commitment
 Query/Retrieve
 Structured Report
 DICOM Medium Storage (DICOMDIR Review)
 DICOM Task Management
DICOM Preset and Applications workflows are briefly described as follows:
1. DICOM preset (network property, DICOM local preset, server and service preset).
2. Verify connectivity (click [Verify] in corresponding screen).
3. Services application.
4. DICOM task management.
 Terms
Abbreviations Description
DICOM Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine
AE Application Entity
MPPS Modality Performed Procedure Step
PDU Protocol Data Unit
SCU Service Class User (DICOM client)
SCP Service Class Provider (DICOM server)
SOP Service-Object Pair

DICOM/HL7 11-1
 11.1 DICOM Preset
11.1.1 IP Preset
See “Appendix D Wireless LAN” for details.

11.1.2 DICOM Local Preset

1. Enter the DICOM local preset screen using the path: [Setup] → [DICOM/HL7].
2. Enter AE Title, Port and PDU according to the actual situation, then click [Save] to exit the
screen. Setting items are introduced in the following.

Name Description
AE Title Application Entity title.
Port DICOM communication port.
Maximum PDU data package size, ranging from 16384 to 65536. If the
PDU value is less than 16384 or greater than 65536, the system automatically
sets it to the value 32768.
DICOM TLS Port Set the TLS port.
Local
TLS Server
Import the encryption key/certificate.
Setting
After importing TLS certificates, and selecting Verify Certificate check
TLS Client box, the system verifies the effectiveness of the TLS function in the
Setting DICOM storage, print, and worklist services.
Import trusted certificates, or delete certificates.

Server Device Name of the device supporting DICOM services.

Setting IP Address IP address of the server.

11-2 DICOM/HL7
 Name Description
You can ping other machines after entering the correct IP address.
Ping
You can also select a server in the Device list to ping it.
Device List Displays the added device.
Set DICOM Provides server settings of DICOM service. For details, see the following
Service chapters.
Add Click to add servers to the Device List.
Delete Click to delete selected servers from the device list.
Set DICOM
Click to enter the Configure The Strategy screen.
Strategy
Log Level
For engineer use only.
Capture
 Set DICOM Strategy
TIP:
 The DICOM strategy must be configured by qualified personnel with good knowledge of
DICOM standards.
 The qualified personnel must ensure the validity of the DICOM strategy.
Perform the following procedure:
1. Click [Set DICOM Strategy].
2. Edit the DICOM strategy:
 Add: Enter strategy name and description, and click [Add] to add a new strategy. Then the
added strategy will be displayed in the Strategy List.
 Delete: Select a strategy from the Strategy List, and click [Delete].
 Update: Select a strategy from the Strategy List, enter strategy name or description again,
and click [Update].
3. Configure the item:
Select a strategy name from the Strategy List, and assign strategy items to the selected
strategy.
 Add: Set the function from the drop-list box, enter the parament 1 and parament 2, and
click [Add]. Then the added strategy item will be displayed in the Strategy Items List.
 Delete: Select a strategy item from the Strategy Items List, and click [Delete].
 Update: Select a strategy from the Strategy Items List, select the function or enter the
parament 1/2 again, and click [Update].
4. Import/Export strategy:
 Import: Click [Import], browse the desired strategy file and operate according to the
screen prompts.
The imported file type for DICOM strategy must be .xml.
 Export: Select a strategy from the Strategy List, click [Export], select the export path, and
type the file name.
E drive is default, and the file type is .xml.
 Server setting procedure:
1. Enter the server device name and IP address. Click [Ping] to check the connection.
2. Click [Add] to add the server to the device list. Its name and address are displayed in the list.

DICOM/HL7 11-3
 Tip:
The AE Title should be the same as the SCU AE Title preset in the server (PACS/RIS/HIS). For
example, if the AE Title of the server preset in the storage server is Storage, and the AE Title of the
accepted SCU is preset as Machine, then in the figure above, the AE Title of Local should be
Machine, and the AE Title of the storage server should be Storage.

11.1.3 Service Preset

The DICOM Service screen is used to set Storage, Print, Worklist, MPPS, Storage Commitment
and Query/Retrieve attributes.
When the system is configured with the DICOM basic function module, and installed with DICOM
Worklist, MPPS, DICOM structured reports and DICOM query/retrieve modules, the corresponding
preset can be found in the DICOM Service screen.
To open the DICOM Service screen:
1. Press the <F10 Setup> key to show the Setup menu.
2. Select [DICOM/HL7] and click [Set DICOM Service] to open the DICOM Service preset screen.

11.1.3.1 Storage Service Preset

1. On the DICOM Service screen, click the [Storage] page tab to enter the Storage page.
2. Select a device and enter the correct AE Title, port, etc.
3. Click [Add] to add the service to the Service List.

11-4 DICOM/HL7
DICOM storage preset items are described as follows:
Name Description
After setting the servers in the DICOM Preset screen, the
Device names will appear in the drop-down list. Select the name of
the storage server.
Service Name The default is xxx-Storage, user-changeable.
Application Entity title. It should be consistent with that of the
AE Title
storage server.
DICOM communication port, 104 is the default. The port
Port
should be consistent with that of the storage server port.
Set the maximum retries (0-9). The default value is 3. If the
Maximum Retries DICOM task sending to the server fails, the retry times
Configure
should be 3.
New
Service Interval Time(Sec) Interval time for the system to retry a connection.
Refers to the amount of time after which the system will stop
Timeout(Sec)
trying to establish a connection to the service.
Transport Layer Security. Select whether to encrypt the data
TLS
during network transportation.
Cine Zoom Mode Select the cine zoom mode during image file storage.
Select the compression mode: uncompressed, RLE (the
Compression Mode
image not compressed), JPEG and JPEG2000.
Select the JPEG compression ratio: lossless, low, medium
Compression Ratio
and high.

DICOM/HL7 11-5
 Name Description
Select the color mode.
If you choose the mixed or the grey, RLE/JPEG is
unavailable.
Color Mode The image uses 24 bit when sending the image from the
ultrasound device to the server; it depends on the image
when choosing the mixed. The image use 8 bit if the image
is captured in color mode or the image has the tint. All
images use 8 bit when choosing the grey.
Allow Multiframe If SCP supports this function, select it.
Set the frame range for transferring cine files to DCM multi-
Max Frame Rate
frame files. It is editable to the user.
Set the 3D/4D image transfer mode.
Set the transfer mode for the 3D/4D cine sending.
 Normal: use the way that 2D image adopts to send;
3D/4D
 Volume: use Enhanced US Volume Storage IOD to
send;
 Raw Date: used to obtain 3D/4D image for 4D Viewer.
SR Storage Option To enable or prevent structured report sending.
Select whether to encapsulate PDF format reports in DICOM
Encapsulated PDF standard.
It becomes available if SCP supports the function.
Doppler Audio Set to save the audio of PW mode.
If this is ticked, files of images that are saved in DCM format
Transducer Tracking through DICOM or DICOMDIR contain transducer serial
number information.
Set the storage mode for image and cine file:
Parallel file: save the current file, and is ready for the storage
Storage mode of the next file.
Parallel frame: send the current frame, and is ready for
sending the next frame.
Strategy Name Set the DICOM strategy.
Add Add the DICOM service to the service list.
Cancel Click to cancel parameter setting.
Select an item in the service list, change the parameters in
Update the above area, and click [Update] to update the item in the
service list.
Delete Click to delete the selected service from the service list.
Select an item in the service list. Click [Default] and you will
Default
Service List see “Y” in the Default column.
Click to verify that the two DICOM application entities are
Verify
properly connected.
Tip: RLE, JPEG and JPEG2000 are not supported by all SCPs. Refer to the SCP's DICOM
CONFORMANCE STATEMENT electronic file to check whether SCP supports it or not. Do not
select these compression modes if the storage server does not support them.

11-6 DICOM/HL7
  Images of PW/M/TVM/TVD mode (B image is not frozen) and images other than
PW/M/TVM/TVD mode: if “Max Frame rate” is not “Full” and the actual frame rate is larger
than the set value, the system will save the image files in a frame rate of the set value, and
transfer in a frame rate of B mode.
 Images of PW/M/TVM/TVD mode (B image is frozen), the system will save/transfer the
images files in frame rate of 6.

11.1.3.2 Print Service Preset

1. On the DICOM Service screen, click the [Print] page tab to enter the Print page.
2. Select a device and enter the correct AE Title, port, etc.
3. Click [Add] to add the service to the Service List.

DICOM print preset items are described as follows:

Name Description
After setting the servers in the DICOM Preset screen, the
Device names will appear in the drop-down list. Select the name of the
print server.
Configure Service Name The default is xxx-Print, user-changeable.
New
Service Application Entity title. It should be consistent with that of the
AE Title
print server.
DICOM communication port, 104 is the default. The port should
Port
be consistent with that of the print server port.

DICOM/HL7 11-7
 Name Description
Set the maximum retries (0-9). The default value is 3. If the
Maximum Retries DICOM task sending to the server fails, the retry times should
be 3.
Interval Time(Sec) Interval time for the system to retry a connection.
Timeout(Sec) Refers to timeout during association establishment.
Transport Layer Security. Select whether to encrypt the data
TLS
during network transportation.
See copies of printed files. You can select from 1 to 5, or
Copies
directly enter the number.
The system supports RGB (color printing) and
Settings MONOCHROME2 (black and white printing). Please select the
type the printer supports.
Film Orientation Select from between LANDSCAPE and PORTRAIT.
Priority Specify printing task priority from HIGH, MED and LOW.
Film Size Select film size from the selections listed in the drop-down list.
Specify the quantity of printed files, e.g., STANDARD\2, 3
Display Format
indicates 6 images are printed for each page.
Specify print medium: Paper, Clear Film, Blue Film. Select Blue
Medium Type Film or Clear Film for black and white printing; select Paper for
color printing.
Specify whether you want a trim box to be printed around each
Trim
image on the film: Yes or No.
Configuration Info Enter configuration information in the field.
Min Density Enter the minimum density of the film.
Print
Properties Max Density Enter the maximum density of the film.
Specify where the file is exposed: MAGAZINE (stored in the
Destination
magazine) or PROCESSOR (exposed in the processor).
Select how the printer magnifies an image to fit the film.
Replicate: interpolated pixels belong to duplicates of adjacent
pixels)
Bilinear: interpolated pixels are generated from bilinear
Magnification Type
interpolations between adjacent pixels
Cubic: interpolated pixels are generated from cubic
interpolations between adjacent pixels
None: without interpolation.
Transport Layer Security. Select whether to encrypt the data
TLS
during network transportation.
Add Add the DICOM service to the service list
Cancel Click to cancel parameter preset.
Select an item in the service list, change the parameters in the
Update above area, and click [Update] to update the item in the service
list.
Service Delete Click to delete the selected service from the service list.

11-8 DICOM/HL7
 Name Description
List Select an item in the service list. Click [Default] and you will see
Default
“Y” in the Default column.
Click to verify that the two DICOM application entities are
Verify
properly connected.

11.1.3.3 DICOM Worklist Preset

1. On the DICOM Service screen, click the [Worklist] page tab to enter the Worklist page.
2. Select a device and enter the correct AE Title, port, etc.
3. Click [Add] to add the service to the Service List.
The DICOM Worklist service parameters are similar to those described in DICOM Storage Preset.
See “11.1.3.1 Storage Service Preset” for details.

11.1.3.4 MPPS Preset

1. On the DICOM Service screen, click the [MPPS] page tab to enter the MPPS page.
2. Select a device and enter the correct AE Title, port, etc.
3. Click [Add] to add the service to the Service List.
The DICOM MPPS service parameters are similar to those described in DICOM Storage Preset.
See “11.1.3.1 Storage Service Preset” for details.

11.1.3.5 Storage Commitment Preset

1. On the DICOM Service screen, click the [Storage Commitment] page tab to enter the Storage
Commitment page.
2. Select a device and enter the correct AE Title, port, etc.
3. Click [Add] to add the service to the Service List.
A special setting item for the DICOM Storage Commitment service is the Associated Storage
Service, as described in the following. Other parameters are similar to those described in DICOM
Storage Preset. See “11.1.3.1 Storage Service Preset” for details.
Name Description
The associated storage server should be preset before storage
Associated Storage
commitment. Storage commitment can only be created after the
Service
exam is sent out.

11.1.3.6 Query/Retrieve Preset

1. On the DICOM Service screen, click the [Query/Retrieve] page tab to enter the Query/Retrieve
page.
2. Select a device and enter the correct AE Title, port, etc.
3. Click [Add] to add the service to the Service List.
4. Click [Exit] to confirm the preset and exit the page.
The DICOM Query/Retrieve service parameters are similar to those described in DICOM Storage
Preset. See “11.1.3.1 Storage Service Preset” for details.

DICOM/HL7 11-9
 11.1.3.7 HL7Query Preset
HL7 protocol, enacted by Health Level Seven organization in 1987, is a 7th layer (application layer)
based on the OSI model (Open System Interconnection) released by ISO (International Standard
Organization).HL7 is used to rule and manage communications between HIS/RIS system and
devices, as well as reduce the intercommunication cost.
The following HL7 protocol versions are supported in the ultrasound system: V2.3, V2.4, V2.5 and
V2.6.
1. On the DICOM Service screen, click the [HL7Query] page tab to enter the HL7Query preset
page.
2. Select a device and enter the correct AE Title, port, etc.
3. Click [Add] to add the service to the Service List.
Two special setting items for the HL7Query service are the Listen Port and Listen Mode, as
described in the following. “Verify” function is not available under HL7Query preset. Other
parameters are similar to those described in DICOM Storage Preset. See “11.1.3.1 Storage
Service Preset” for details.
Name Description
This function enables the ultrasound system to use the listen port for
Listen Mode
data receiving.
Port for ultrasound system to receive data after the listen mode
function is activated. Here, the port should be consistent with that of
Listen Port the Worklist server port.
For details of listen port setting, refer to settings in the server.

11.1.3.8 Other Settings

You can configure different type of DICOM services in different scenarios. See “12.1.9 Admin”
chapter for details.

11.2 Verify Connectivity

To verify connectivity (not essential), click the [Verify] button on the Storage, Print, Worklist, MPPS,
Storage Commitment and Query/Retrieve pages respectively.
If the verification is successful, the system displays “xxx Verify Succeed.” Otherwise, it displays
“xxx Verify Failed.”
If verification failed, possible causes may be:
 The ultrasound machine cannot communicate normally with the server. Check that the
cable is properly connected, or,
Check that the IP of the server is configured in the same segment as that of the
ultrasound machine, or,
Check that the network adapter, router, exchanger and HUB are working normally.
 The server does not support the verification. If the connection is normal, it can be
concluded that the server does not support the verification.
 The server supports the verification, but this function is not activated. Please check that
the verification function is activated.
Tip:
Not all SCPs can support verification. See the SCP properties to confirm whether the SCP can
support this service. If not, the verification will not be successful.

11-10 DICOM/HL7
11.3 DICOM Services
If all the DICOM presets on the DICOM Service Preset screen are completed, you are ready for
the Storage, Print, Worklist (HL7 Query), MPPS, Storage Commitment and Query/Retrieve
applications.

11.3.1 DICOM Storage

DICOM Storage is used to send images to the DICOM storage server for storage.
 Send images on iStation/Review/main screens
(1) Select images
 Press <iStation> on the control panel to open the iStation screen. Click to select a patient
or an exam record in the list. Thumbnails are displayed in the thumbnail area in the lower
part of the screen, then click to select a thumbnail or several thumbnails. Or
 Press <Review> on the control panel to enter the Review screen. Click to select a
thumbnail or several thumbnails. Or
 On the main screen, select a thumbnail or several thumbnails.
(2) Click in the top-right part to bring up the following dialog box.

(3) Click to select “DICOM” in the Target box on the left side, then select the DICOM storage
server in the Storage Server box on the right side.
(4) Click [OK] to start sending.
 To send images using a shortcut key
You can save single-frame images or multi-frame images to a DICOM server while saving to
hard drive using a shortcut key. The procedure is as follows:
(1) Define the key. For details, see “10.2.8 Auxiliary Output Function”.
(2) Set a default storage server:
a) Enter the DICOM Service Preset screen via “[Setup]→ [DICOM Preset] → [Set
DICOM Service].”
b) Select a storage server in the Service List and click [Default]. You will see “Y” marked
in the Default column.
c) Click [Exit] to exit the page and return to the Setup menu, then click [Save] on the
Setup menu to make the preset take effect.
(3) Press the key to send to DICOM storage.

DICOM/HL7 11-11
  To send images to storage after an exam ends
(1) Open “[Setup]→ [System] → [General]” and then check
in the Patient Info area.
(2) Set a default storage server.
a) Enter the DICOM Service Preset screen via “[Setup]→ [DICOM Preset] → [Set
DICOM Service].”
b) Select a storage server in the Service List and click [Default]. You will see “Y” in the
Default column.
c) Click [Exit] to exit the page and return to the Setup menu, then click [Save] on the
Setup menu to make the preset take effect.
(3) After finishing the presets, perform image scanning. Each time <End Exam> is pressed on
the control panel, the system will send the image to the default DICOM storage server for
storage.

11.3.2 DICOM Print

DICOM Print is used to send images to the DICOM print server for printing.
 Print images on iStation/Review/main screens
1. Select images. Operations are the same as for DICOM storage.
2. In the Send To dialog box, select a DICOM print server. (For the dialog box, see DICOM
Storage).

3. Click [OK] to begin printing.

 To send images using a shortcut key
You can send single-frame images to a DICOM print server while saving to hard drive using a
shortcut key.
1. Define the short key. For details, see “10.2.8 Auxiliary Output Function”.
2. Set a default printer server.
a) Enter the DICOM Service Preset screen via “[Setup]→ [DICOM Preset] → [DICOM
Service].”
b) Click [Print] to open the Print page.
c) Select a Print server in the Service List and click [Default]. You will see “Y” marked in
the Default column.
d) Click [Exit] to exit the page and return to the Setup menu, then click [Save] on the
Setup menu to make the preset take effect.

11-12 DICOM/HL7
3. Press Key1 (defined as the shortcut key for Save Image to Hard Disk and Send to DICOM
Printer). The system captures the current screen and sends it to the print server.
 To print images for storage after an exam ends
(1) Open “[Setup]→ [System] → [General]” and then check
in the Patient Info area.
(2) Set a default print server.
a) Enter the DICOM Service Preset screen via “[Setup]→ [DICOM Preset] → [DICOM
Service].”
b) Click [Print] to open the Print page.
c) Select a Print server in the Service List and click [Default]. You will see “Y” marked in
the Default column.
d) Click [Exit] to exit the page and return to the Setup menu, then click [Save] on the
Setup menu to make the preset take effect.
(3) After finishing the presets, perform image scanning. Each time <End Exam> is pressed on the
control panel, the system will send the image to the default DICOM print server for printing.

11.3.3 DICOM Worklist

For details, see “4.1.2.2 Worklist”.

11.3.4 MPPS
MPPS is used to send exam state information to the configured server. This facilitates the other
systems in obtaining the exam progress in time.
The status information is described as follows:
 When you begin an exam or send images during an exam, the system sends “Active”
status information to the MPPS server.
 When the exam is complete, the system sends “End” status information to the MPPS
server.
 When a paused exam is continued, the system sends “Active” status information to the
MPPS server.
 When an exam is canceled, the system sends “Canceled” status information to MPPS
server.

11.3.5 Storage Commitment

Storage commitment is used to confirm whether the images or structured reports are successfully
stored on the DICOM storage server.
Before using storage commitment, set the associated storage service.
 Storage commitment after sending images on the iStation screen.
1. Open the iStation screen.
2. Select an exam (a suspended exam or an inactive exam) (images are stored in the exam
record). Click the [Send Exam] button in the menu which appears to open the Send To dialog
box.
3. Click to select “DICOM” in the Target box on the left side, then select the DICOM storage
server in the Storage Server box on the right side.
4. Click [OK] to start sending. The system will send all the images stored in the exam record to
the storage server. Meanwhile, it will send storage commitment to the storage commitment
server.

DICOM/HL7 11-13
  To send storage commitment after an exam ends

1. Open [Setup] → [System] → [General], then check

in the Patient Info area.
2. Set the default storage server and storage commitment server.
a) Enter the DICOM Service Preset screen via “[Setup] → [DICOM Preset] → [Set
DICOM Service].”
b) Set a default server in the Storage page and set an associated storage service in
Storage Commitment page.
c) Click [Exit] to exit the page and return to the Setup menu, then click [Save] on the
Setup menu to make the preset take effect.
3. After finishing the presets, perform image scanning. Each time <End Exam> is pressed on the
control panel, the system will send the image to the default DICOM storage server for storage
and send storage commitment to the storage commitment server.
If images are successfully sent to the storage server, the storage commitment server will
return information about the successful image storage. In the iStation screen, you will see a
tick “√” marked in the list below .
Tip:
Storage commitment is confined to the whole exam. Not each image sending can be indicated.
NOTE: Multi-frame storage is not allowed if “Allow Multiframe” is not selected ([Setup] →
[DICOM/HL7] → [Set DICOM Service] → “Storage”). For example, even if there is a
multi-frame file in the exam to be sent, only single-frame image storage will be
performed. After the storage is complete, there is no “√” marked in the list below in
the iStation screen.

11.3.6 Query/Retrieve
The query/retrieve function is used to query and retrieve patient exam records in a designated server.
After setting the DICOM query/retrieve server, you can perform the query/retrieve function in the
iStation screen.
1. Open the iStation screen: press <iStation> on the control panel.
2. Click [Query/Retrieve] to open the screen.

11-14 DICOM/HL7
1. Select the server in “Server and Service” area (source, destination, and level).
Select Level from the drop-down list:
 Study: search by exams;
 Series: search by file types, such as US or SR.
2. Enter the query information, such as Patient ID, Patient Name, Accession #, Exam Date, or
other patient properties from the drop-down list.
Click [Clear] to empty the entered query information.
3. Click [Query], the system performs the query and lists out the results into the patient (source)
list.
You can perform further query basing on the results by entering new query information.
4. Select one or more patient records according to the actual situation.
Click [Select All] to select all the patient records in the list.
Click [Deselect All] to deselect all the patient records in the list.
5. Click [Retrieve] to retrieve the patient records in the DICOM query/retrieve server into the local
machine.
6. Click [Exit], you can see the retrieved patient records are listed in the iStation screen.

11.4 DICOM Media Storage

Patient data in the ultrasound system can be saved on external media in DCM format, while DCM
files can be accessed in the ultrasound system.

DICOM/HL7 11-15
 Media Storage
1. Select patient records in the iStation screen.
2. Click [Send Exam] in the menu which appears to open the dialog box.
3. Select the destination to “DICOMDIR”, cize zoom mode, compression mode, and
compressiom ratio. You can select to delete the exam or the image after the backup, and
select to hide patient information.
4. Click [OK] to begin the storage.
If the backup is successful, a tick will appear in the Backup list in the iStation screen. If not, there
will be no tick.
There must be no DICOMDIR/DCMIMG/IHE_PDI files on the external storage media of the same
name as the one being backed up. Otherwise, the backup cannot proceed. Ensure there is enough
storage space, or the backup may fail due to shortage of space.
Data Restore
After the DICOM format data are saved to external media, restore the data to the ultrasound
system.
1. Connect the external media containing DCM files to the system.
2. In iStation, review the data stored on the external media.
3. Select the data to be restored in iStation.

4. Click on the iStation screen.

NOTE: Only system-accessible media can be selected.

11.5 Structured Report

DICOM OB/GYN Structured reports, Cardiac Structured reports, Vascular Structured reports, and
Breast Structured reports are supported by this system. They can be sent together with the exam
only.

11-16 DICOM/HL7
 Send images and structured reports for storage in the iStation screen
(1) Select “Attach SR when store images” or “Only Store SR” on the DICOM Storage preset
page. For details, see “11.1.3.1 Storage Service Preset.”
(2) Create new patient information or load scheduled patient information.
(3) Perform measurements.
(4) Save the images.
(5) End the exam.
(6) Open the iStation screen, select the patient exam, and click the corresponding [Send
Exam] button in the menu which appears in order to open the Send To dialog box.
(7) Click to select “DICOM” in the Target box on the left side, then select the DICOM storage
server in the Storage Server box on the right side.
(8) Click [OK]. Check for the result in the DICOM Task Management dialog box. After
successful storage of both the image and structured report, you will see the storage
commitment mark “√” in the list below in the iStation screen.
The structured report can be sent automatically. For details, see “11.3.1 DICOM Storage.”
 Back up structured report
When recording or storing exams that have structured reports to external media (DICOMDIR),
the structured reports can be backed up together.

NOTE: Only the PACS system from the Medstreaming company

(http://www.medstreaming.com/default.aspx) supports sending self-defined
measurements by DICOM SR.

11.6 Showcase Recording

Showcase software can be employed for DICOM image file viewing.
When files and structured reports are saved in DCM format through DICOMDIR and sent to
storage devices, the showcase can be sent to the storage devices together. Connect the storage
device, and the user can view files in DCM format through showcase.
NOTE: To view the DCM files successfully, it is suggested to install NET Framework
(Visual Studio.Net) of a version later than 2.0, if your computer was installed
with TortoiseSVN.

11.7 DICOM Task Management

DICOM Task Management is used for viewing task progress or managing tasks after sending
images for storage, printing or media storage. For details, see “10.9 Patient Task Management.”

DICOM/HL7 11-17
12 Setup
The Setup function is designed to set the configuration parameters of operating the system and
maintaining user workflow setup data. The setup data of the user and system are stored to the
hard drive, and should be backed up to CD/DVD or USB memory device.
When the preset data is changed, be sure to save the preset data
CAUTION: according to the methods described in this chapter. Mindray is not
responsible for the loss of preset data.
 To enter Setup:
Press the <F10 Setup> key on the keyboard to enter the setup menu.
 To exit Setup:
Select [Save] in the Setup menu. The parameter settings are saved.
Select [Cancel] in the Setup menu or press <ESC> to close the Setup menu.
When you change the system language and click [OK] in the Setup menu, the system
automatically shuts down to make the modification effective.
 Basic operations
The commonly-used setting types are:
 Text box: position the cursor over the corresponding field box. Enter the desired value
using the keyboard or soft keyboard on the soft menu.
 Radio button: click the button to select an item.
 Check box: click the checkbox to select one or more options.
 Drop-down list: click the arrow beside the list to select an item.

Setup 12-1
 12.1 System Preset
The system automatically enters the [System] screen after you enter Setup.

Page Description
To set the hospital name, language, time zone, time format and system
Region
date/time.
General To set patient information, exam setup, system dormancy, display and so on.
Image To set general parameters in imaging modes.
To set the measure ruler, measure setting, follicle method, comment setting
Application
and so on.
To set the relevant information about fetal gestational age, fetal growth formula
OB
and fetal weight.
Key Config To assign functions to footswitch and the user-defined keys.
Gesture Preset the gesture on the touch screen.
Output Set the output format, the range and the resolution for the image.
Access Control To set the user account control relevant information.
Scan Code To set the code parameters for barcode reader.
Biopsy To set the grid parameters.

12-2 Setup
12.1.1 Region
Open the Region page via [Setup] → [System] → [Region].
Item Description
To set the hospital-relevant information such as name,
Hospital Information
address, telephone, and so on.
Language To select a language (input) for the system.
Import image for logo loading.
NOTE: For a better display effect, please try to use an
Load Logo
image with 400*400 pixels.

Time Zone To select the time zone.

Time Format To select the time format.
Date Format To set the date format.
System Date To set the date for the system.
Move the cursor over the corresponding field and enter the
time manually using the keyboard, or, move the cursor over the
System Time
time segment and press <Set>, then increase or decrease the
required value by clicking the icons on the right side.
To assign a time server and make the time of the ultrasound
Time Sync
machine consistent with the server.

Setup 12-3
 12.1.2 General
Open the page via [Setup] → [System] → [General].

Type Item Description

Patient Banner Display To select if to display the available patient information
Content items on the screen.

Patient Info H&W Unit To set the unit for patient height and weight.
Surface Formula To set the surface formula.
Font Size (For Storage) To set the font size of the patient information
Freeze
Status after freeze To set the system state after the image is frozen.
Setting
Storage Set the key volume for saving single / multi-frame
Storage Beep Volume
Volume image.

Status after exam ends To set the system status when an exam ends.

After selected, perform measure application and save

Auto Screenshot of
single frame image, then end the patient exam, the
Exam Setup Report Page by Page
system will save the report image in iStation.
Maximum number of To set the maximum number of exams to be kept in
exams to be kept iStation.
Sending/printing after End Select if to automatically archive the exam data to
Exam DICOM server for storage/print.
To set the brightness and the contrast of the main
LCD
screen, or restore to the default.
Display
After selection, the system restores the touch screen
TouchPanel
settings back to factory.

12-4 Setup
 Type Item Description
Select the different saver methods to the system.
After enabling the screen saver, check “Mindray” to
select the image from the system. Or click [Browse] to
select the image on your own. Click [Preview] to
preview the screen saver image.
To set the waiting time before the system enters
Screen
Screen Saver dormancy status in the drop-down list beside “Wait”.
Saver
The system enters screen saver automatically if the
system waiting time exceeds the screen saver already
set.
The system enters screen saver automatically if the
system waiting time exceeds the screen saver already
set and standby time.

12.1.3 Image Preset

Open the page via [Setup] → [System] → [Image].

Type Item Description

To set the default probe model for the system from the
drop-down list.
Reset Config Probe The default parameters are applied to the new probe if
checking Use the default setting when start a new
exam.
Set the standard for saving the image or using the
Image size /
digital/graph printer.
Default Elasto / To set the default elasto imaging mode for the system.

Setup 12-5
 Type Item Description
To set the steer mode in B+ Color +PW/CW imaging
mode.
C&(PW/CW): select to adjust the sample volume in
color mode and sample line in PW or CW mode
Steer
together.
C/(PW/CW): select to adjust the sample volume in
color mode and sample line in PW or CW mode
individually.
The spectrum can automatically invert when the color
Auto Invert flow is steered to a certain angle, thus accommodating
operator’s habit of distinguishing flow direction.
Image
Auto Invert Past Zero Set smart invert mode of Color Map.
B+Color Refresh with To set whether to turn on the function that when
PW/CW Sampling Line moving PW/CW sampling line, B+Color image is
Movement activated under B+Color+PW/CW mode.
B+Color+PW UnFreeze To set whether to retain PW images when unfreezn
keeping PW under B+Color+PW mode.
To set if to display the iScape ruler on iScape imaging
iScape Ruler Display
mode.
To set whether to enter automatic cine play status after
Auto Play
freezing.

12.1.4 Application
Open the page via [Setup] → [System] → [Application].
Type Item Description
Clear comments
while unfreezing To set whether to clear comments after unfreezing image
image or changing or changing probe or exam.
probe/exam
Comment
Clear bodymark To set whether to clear body marks after unfreezing
upon unfreeze image.
Voice comment
To set whether to enable voice comment feature.
enabled
Intelligent Input Method
To set whether to enable intelligent input method.
Input Association

On this page, you can set the measurement ruler and relevant information. For details, see the
Operator’s Manual [Advanced Volume]

12.1.5 OB Preset
Open the page via “[Setup] → [System] → [OB].” On this page, you can set the gestational age
formula, fetal growth formula, fetal weight formula and relevant information. For details, see the
Operator’s Manual [Advanced Volume].

12.1.6 Key Configuration

Open the page via “[Setup] → [System] → [Key Config].”

12-6 Setup
 Key function setting
You can set the functions for <Save>, <Print>, user-defined keys (including F3, F4, F5, F6,
F12 and P) and two-finger gesture. See “3.8.4 Touch Screen Operation” for details about two-
finger gesture operation.
To assign a function to a key:
a) Click to select the desired key in the Key Function column on the left side of the page.
b) Click to select a function in the Function area. You can see the available functions
selected on the right side.
c) Click [Save] to complete the function setting.
 Foot switch function setting
You can assign a function to the left/middle/right key of the foot switch. The method is similar to
setting key functions. See the steps above.
 Other Settings
Item Description
Key Volume To set the key volume at 3 levels, 0 means no sound.
Control Panel Brightness To set the brightness for the control panel.
Trackball Speed To set the speed of the trackball when moving the trackball.

12.1.7 Gesture
The gesture setting is the same with the settings of other keys. See Chapter "12.1.6 Key
Configuration" for details.

Setup 12-7
 12.1.8 Output

Type Item NOTE

Set the image quality of unloaded AVI. The system
unloads according to the settings.
Image quality The higher the image quality is, the clearer the unloaded
image is. The unloading speed become slower with the
AVI encode larger space.
Set the unloading format of the AVI. The system unloads
Operating System according to the settings.
Compatibility If checking “Mac OS”, saving CIN files to USB flash drive
as “MP4 Video”.
Analog output
Select the format to output/separate the video format: NTSC or PAL.
mode

12.1.9 Admin
Open the page via “[Setup] → [System] → [Admin].” For details, please refer to "10.10
Administration"

12.1.10 Scan Code Preset

See “Appendix B Barcode Reader” chapter for details.

12.1.11 Biopsy
Open the Biopsy page via “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [Biopsy]”.

12-8 Setup
 Parameter setting
Guide Line Dot Type: Small, Medium, Large.
Grid Size: 2x2, 4x4, 6x6.
Grid Type: Circle, +, X, Dot.

12.2 Exam Mode Preset

Open “[Setup] → [Exam Mode]” to enter the screen.

You can assign available exam modes for probes.

1. To select a probe, move the cursor over the Probe column and select the probe model using
the drop-down list.
2. Select/delete exam modes:
On the left side, you can view all the available exam modes in the exam library for the probe.
On the right side of the screen, you can view the current exam modes assigned to the probe.
 Select the exam from the Exam Library on the left and click [>] to add it to the Exam Mode
Selected.
 Click [<<] to delete all exam modes in the Exam Selected area.
 To delete an exam supported by the current probe, first select the exam and then click [<]
to delete it.
 Click [Delete] to delete a user-defined exam in the Exam Mode Library area.

Setup 12-9
  Click [Default] to set a selected exam mode as the default exam mode. The default exam
mode is marked by a “√” in the top-left corner.

12.3 Measurement Preset

For details about Measurement Preset, see the [Advanced Volume].

12.4 Comment Preset

 Comment Configure
You can preset the custom comments library for current exam mode. The comments in the library
are provided by the system or user-defined ones.

1. Add comments: directly enter user-defined comment texts, or select available items (select
comment texts for the comment library or select comment in groups).
 Directly enter user-defined comment texts: posit the cursor in the field box above [Add
Comment], enter the text comment through the keyboard, and then click [Add Comment].
Then the directly-entered comment will be added to the Available Items and Selected
Items.
 Select available items: First select a comment library and "Comment" from the drop-down
lists beside "Available Items", and then all items will be displayed below “Available Items”.
Or Select "Group" from the drop-down list beside "Available Items", all groups will be
displayed below “Available Items”.
 Click [>] to add the item in Available Items on the left into Selected Items on the right.
 Click [>>] to add all items in Available Items on the left into Selected Items on the right.
2. Change position of the selected items: select an item on the right side box and click [Up],
[Down], [Left] or [Right] button to change the position of the item.
3. Withdraw or delete a user-defined comment:
 Withdraw an item (from the library or user-defined) in the Selected Items list:
 Click [<] to withdraw selected Items to the Available Items list.
 Click [<<] to withdraw all items in Selected Items.
 Delete a user-defined item in the Available Items box: You can only delete the user-
defined items rather than the items in the system library. After a user-defined item is
deleted, it will not be available.

12-10 Setup
 Select a user-defined item in the Available Items box, and click [<].
4. List Config: select a desired group from the drop-down list.
5. After you customize comments, click [Save] to confirm and exit the screen.
 Comment Group Define
You can add user-defined comment group for current exam mode. The groups in the library are
provided by the system or user-defined ones.

1. Add groups: posit the cursor in the field box near [Lists Name], enter the group name through the
keyboard, and then click [Add Group]. Then the entered group will be added to the Group Lists.
2. Rename groups: select a user-defined group, enter the group name through the keyboard, and
then click [Rename]. Then the new group name will be displayed in the group lists.
3. Delete groups: select a user-defined group, click [Delete Group]. After a user-defined group is
deleted, it will not be available.
4. Add comments to groups: the operation is the same to that of the "Comment Configure" tab.
5. Change position of the selected items: the operation is the same to that of the "Comment
Configure" tab.
6. After you customize groups, click [Save] to confirm and exit the screen.
Note: You can rename, add comment to, delete comment from, or change position of the selected
items in the user-defined groups, while system standard groups cannot be modified

12.5 iWorks Preset

For details, see “Appendix C iWorks.”

12.6 Stress Echo Preset

For details, see “5.14.5 Maintenance and Protocol”.

Setup 12-11
 12.7 DICOM/HL7 Preset
For details, see “11.1 DICOM Preset.”

12.8 Print Preset

This screen is used to set up the printer and image printing.
Click [Print] in the preset menu to enter.
 Printer setting
The printer settings include print service and print driver.

 Print Service Setting

 Add Service: click to begin adding print services.
 Remove Service: click to delete the selected print service.
 Rename Service: click to rename the selected print service.
 Default print service: click to set the selected print service as the default one.
 Property: to preset print service properties.
For details about adding printers, see “3.7 Installing a Printer.”
 Image Settings
Click [Image Setting] to enter the page, you can set the brightness, contrast and saturation of
image printing, or you can use the default values.

12-12 Setup
12.9 Network Preset
Parameters for transferring are set here. For details of local IP setting, see “Appendix D Wireless
LAN”.

12.9.1 iStorage Preset

You can send exam data or images to the iStorage server and perform analysis using UltraAssist.
For details about this feature, see the UltraAssist manual.
 The iStorage screen is as follows:

Name Description
Service Name The name of the iStorage service.
IP Address IP address of the iStorage service device.
Port Port for transmitting.
Connect Click to verify connection.
Add Click to add the Network service to the service list.
Update To save the changed parameters.

Delete Click to delete the selected service from the service list.

 Add an iStorage service

1. Set the iStorage server properties as described above.
2. Click [Add] to add the service to the Service list.
 Modify a network service
1. Select the service to be updated in the service list.
2. You can see properties in the Configure Service area.
3. Modify the parameters and click [Update] to update the setting.

12.9.2 Network Settings

The Network Settings screen is as follows:

Setup 12-13
  Transmission Encryption
After accessing the network, click [VPN Config] to enter the "VPN Config" interface.

Parameter Description
No driver: click [SetupDriver] to enter the "TAP-
Windows 9.21.2 Setup" interface, and do as
instructed.
Ready: the VPN is ready for use.
Status Advance: VPN Advance Configuration
Connected: VPN is successfully connected.
Disconnected: VPN is disconnected.
Error: error connection.
Server IP
Group
/
User Name
Password
Hide characters The password is displayed as *.

12-14 Setup
 Parameter Description
Connect/ Disconnect Connect or disconnect VPN.
Enters the "VPN Advance Config" interface.

Advance

Reset: if the system does not respond after you

click [Config], click [Reset].
Config: enters the "OpenConnect-GUI VPN client"
interface. For details about the settings, please
refer to the TAP manual.
Note: after exiting the "VPN Advance Config"
interface, you need to reboot the system;
otherwise, you cannot connect VPN normally.
Close Close the "VPN Config" interface.

 Turn on hosted network function:

You can set the system as a hotspot. When other devices (with available wireless network function)
are connected to the system, DICOM, iStorage and network print function can be implemented this
way.
1. Select [Network Settings] page in Network Preset screen.
2. Confirm the Wi-Fi is enabled: you see [Disable Wifi] in the screen.
3. Enter the name and password for this hotspot in the Hosted Network box.
4. Click [Start] to enable the function.
5. Use other devices to search and connect to this network.

12.9.3 MedTouch/MedSight Preset

You can set environment for MedTouch/MedSight here and then use the MedTouch/MedSight
function by mobile phone or tablet computers. See MedTouch/MedSight manual for details.

12.9.4 Remote Maintenance

1. Press <F10> to enter the Setup interface, choose [Network][Remote Maintenance], and
select [Remote Maintenance Permission].
Risk After the remote maintenance permission is enabled, it indicates that the
Explanation ultrasound equipment permits remote access from the remote controller
to upgrade the equipment, transmit files, or check and download logs.
Once enabled, the remote maintenance permission is enabled by default
after restarting the ultrasound equipment.

Setup 12-15
 2. Select [Upload logs to remote server] to upload logs to the remote server, Mindray service
engineers can acquire and handle those log.
Check the process in “task management” page, please refer to “10.9 Patient Task
Management”.

12.9.5 Network Storage

 The Network Storage screen is as follows:
Note: Before adding a network service, you should firstly set a shared directory in your PC server.

Name Description
Service Name The name of the network service, which cannot be empty
Destination
Name of the device, which cannot be empty
Device
IP Address IP address of the network service device, which cannot be empty
Ping Press Ping to confirm that a device is connected
User name for entering the shared PC server, which is decided by
User Name
the server

12-16 Setup
 Name Description
Password for entering the shared PC server, which is decided by the
Password
server
Shared Dir Shared folder directory, which cannot be empty
To enter the Net Disk Browse screen to set the shared folder
Browse directory. And if the user name or the password is incorrect, the
server cannot be entered.
Add Click it to add the Network service to the service list.

Cancel Click to cancel parameter setting

Update To save the changed parameters.

Default To set as the default server for network storage

Delete Click to delete the selected service in the service list.

Exit Click to exit the screen.

 Add a network service:

1. Set the network server properties as described above.
2. Click [Add] to add the service to the Service list.
3. Select the added service in the service list, you can set it as default or delete it.
 Modify a network service:
1. Select the service to be updated in the service list.
2. You can see properties in the Configure Service area.
3. Modify the parameters and click [Update] to update setting.
Tips: in order to make network storage function normally, setting of the sharing folder of the PC
server in advance is a must, e.g. destination, user name and password should be confirmed at first.

12.9.6 Route Settings

The ultrasound system can be set to connect to the local network and internet network through
route settings at the same time. For details, please contact the service engineers.

12.10 Maintenance
In the Setup menu, select [Maintenance] to enter the screen.
The [Maintenance] function is designed for you to import or export user data, restore factory setting
and export log. You may also execute self-test and option installation/trial through the maintenance
menu.
If you require other maintenance functions, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department
or sales representative.

12.10.1 Option
The system enters the Option page after entering the Maintenance screen. In the Option list, the
system lists all the system-supported options and their installation status (not installed or installed).

Setup 12-17
  Install and uninstall
 Click [Install] to begin installing a disabled option.
 Click [Uninstall] to begin uninstalling a previously-installed option.
Please contact the Mindray Customer Service Department or a sales representative for details.

12.10.2 Exporting Setup Data

This function is used to write all setup data of the system into a disk for backup. The format of the
data file is .PDP.
You can select 3 types of preset data to export from the system:
 General module preset data: including “All Preset”, “Image Preset”, “iWorks Preset” and
“DICOM/HL7” data.
 Exam mode related preset data, including all image setting, comment and body mark
setting and measurement setting data.
Procedures:
1. Select the target module.
2. Click [Export] to open the [Export All Data] screen.
3. Select the path to save the data.
4. Select the exported file and type as PDP and click [OK].

12.10.3 Importing Setup Data

This function is used to import the existing setup data to the setup data memory of the system. The
system will reset and operate according to the setup preferences that were imported.
Procedures:
1. Click [Import] to open the Load Data screen.
2. Select the imported file.
3. Click [OK], a progress bar will appear and the setup data is imported to the specified path.
4. To restore the factory setup data, click [Load Factory] on the right side of the screen.

12.10.4 Probe Check

This function enables users to check if a transducer element is in malfunction, so as to evaluate
the transducer performance.
 Click [Probe Check] to open the Probe Check screen. The system automatically performs
probe check to the element of the currently activated probe. If a transducer element is in
malfunction, it is displayed as a red spot. If a transducer element functions well, it is displayed
as a green spot.
 You can export the result image to the external device.

Notes: Each time a transducer is connected to the main system or activated, the users are
recommended to implement probe check of transducer performance.
Before probe check, make sure the probe is clean and not being used for scan.

12-18 Setup
12.10.5 Other Settings
Item Description
Export Log Export the log.
Self Test Perform system self-test and restart the machine.
Recover the ultrasound system (including Operating System and
Recover
Doppler).
For this function, you need a one-time password, please contact the
Enter Windows
Setup service engineer or your agent.
Prepay
Entrance of prepay of payment function.
Installment
Start/Stop
Cursor debug interface.
WinProxy
Fast Startup To speed up the startup process.
If you have any questions, please contact the service engineer or your agent.

12.11 Security
Click [Security] on the Setup menu to enter the security-setting screen.

1. Drive Encryption/Secure Data Wipe

Encrypt the patient data stored in the hard disk. The system provides two encryption methods:
Factory Default and User Define.
 Factory Default: the system is in factory state by default.
 User Define: add a user-defined password.
1) Select [User Define]. If the patient data are already stored in the hard disk, the system
prompts the following message: (if no patient data are stored in the hard disk, perform steps 5
to 6 directly)

2) Click [OK] to return to the Security screen, click [Wipe], and the system prompts the following
message:

Setup 12-19
 3) Click [OK], and the system prompts the following message:

4) Click [Yes] to wipe the patient data.

5) Select [User Define] and click [Confirm].
6) Input the password and click [Confirm] to finish the password setting.

Notes 1. If you want switch to Factory Default, perform steps 1 to 6 again. The
password is the same as that of the User Define.
2. When you set password, multi-language and Chinese characters are not
supported.
2. Anti-Virus
The system provides a piece of anti-virus software: Windows Defender. It can effectively prevent
the ultrasound system from being attacked by virus, spyware, or other malware.
 Windows Defender is already installed on the system.

12.12 System Information

Click [About] on the Setup menu to enter the system information screen.
This screen displays the system software version, WLAN module FCC version and versions of
other modules. You cannot edit the information, only view them. The information varies depending
on the system configurations and version.

12-20 Setup
13 Probes and Biopsy
13.1 Probes
The system supports the following probes:

C5-2E P4-2E

C11-3E P7-3E

L14-6WE V11-3E

V11-3BE DE10-3E

C7-3E L12-3E

Probes and Biopsy 13-1

 L14-6NE V11-3WE

D6-2E CW5s

D7-2E D6-2NE

C5-1E CB10-4E

P7-3TE P10-4E

SP5-1E V11-3HE

13-2 Probes and Biopsy

 L9-3E DE11-3E

L14-5WE L20-5E

6LB7E SC6-1E

SD8-1E L16-4HE

For details about the TEE probe, please refer to the TEE Ultrasonic Transducer manual.

Probes and Biopsy 13-3

 13.1.1 Probe Functions by Part
The basic structures and corresponding functions of probes are basically the same. Take the
following probe as an example.

<2>

<1>
<3>

<4>

<5>

No. Name Function

<1> Probe head Converts the electrical signal to an ultrasonic signal, focusing
the sound beams in a given direction while it receives the
reflected ultrasonic signal and converts it to an electrical
signal for transmission over the cable. The lens on the surface
is the acoustic lens. Apply ultrasound gel to the acoustic lens
for correct operation.

<2> Needle-guided bracket Provides mounting support for the needle-guided bracket.
fixing tabs and grooves

<3> Probe cable Transmits electrical signals between the probe body and
connector.

<4> Probe connector Connects the probe and cable to the ultrasound diagnostic
system.

<5> Lock handle Locks the connector to the ultrasound diagnostic system.

Tip:
The probes’ structure, marked <2> in the figure above, may vary depending on the corresponding
needle-guided brackets.

13-4 Probes and Biopsy

13.1.2 Orientation of the Ultrasound Image and the Probe
Head
The orientation of the ultrasound image and the probe are shown below. The “Mark” side of the
ultrasound image on the monitor corresponds to the mark side of the probe. Check the orientation
prior to the examination (using a linear probe as an example).

Orientation mark

Mark

13.1.3 Operating Procedures

This section describes the general procedures for operating the probe. The proper clinical
technique to use for operating the probe should be selected on the basis of specialized training
and clinical experience.

Probes and Biopsy 13-5

 Operating procedures (with biopsy function):

Inspection before examination

Connection to the ultrasonic

diagnostic system

Examinations

Biopsy procedure

Disconnection to the ultrasonic

diagnostic system

Thoroughly cleaning the

needle-guided bracket

Wiping off the ultrasound gel

Sterilization of the needle-
guided bracket
Thoroughly cleaning the transducer
Inspection after use

Drying the transducer

Storage

Disinfecting the transducer

Rinsing the transducer

Drying the transducer

Inspection after use

Storage

13-6 Probes and Biopsy

Operating procedures (with no biopsy function):

Inspection before examination

Connection to the ultrasonic diagnostic

system

Examinations

Disconnection to the ultrasonic

diagnostic system

Wiping off the ultrasound gel

Thoroughly cleaning the transducer

Drying the transducer

Disinfecting the transducer

Rinsing the transducer

Drying the transducer

Inspection after use

Storage

Thoroughly clean the probe and needle-guided bracket, then

WARNING: disinfect the probe and sterilize the needle-guided bracket before
and after each ultrasound-guided biopsy procedure is performed.
Failure to do so may cause the probe and the needle-guided bracket
to become sources of infection.

Probes and Biopsy 13-7

 13.1.4 Wearing the Probe Sheath
A legally-marketed probe sheath must be installed over the probe before performing intra-cavitary
and intra-operative examinations. Protective barriers may be required to minimize disease
transmission. Probe sheaths are available for use in all clinical situations where infection is a
concern.
To order probe sheaths, contact:
CIVCO Medical Instruments Co.
102 First Street South, Kalona, IA 52247-9589 USA Tel: 1-319-656-4447
E-mail: [email protected]
http://www.civco.com
1. Be sure to cover the probe with a new (unused) probe sheath to
CAUTION: prevent infection during examination. If the probe sheath packaging
is open or broken, the probe sheath may not be sufficiently
sterilized. DO NOT use the probe sheath in such circumstances.
2. The cover contains natural rubber latex and talc that can cause
allergic reactions in some individuals.
3. DO NOT use an expired probe sheath. Before using a probe sheath,
verify whether the term of validity has expired.
Method (for reference only):
1. Place an appropriate amount of gel inside 2. Insert the probe into the sheath. Be sure
the sheath or on the probe acoustic lens. to use a proper sterile technique. Pull the
Poor imaging may result if no gel is used. cover tightly over the probe acoustic lens
to remove wrinkles and air bubbles, taking
care to avoid puncturing the sheath.

3. Secure the sheath with the enclosed elastic 4. Inspect the sheath to ensure there are no
bands. holes or tears.

13-8 Probes and Biopsy

The above is a dimension illustration of the C7-3E probe.
You can select the probe sheath according to the actual application situation.

13.1.5 Probes Cleaning, Disinfection and Sterilization

Before and after completing each examination, clean and disinfect (or sterilize) the probes as
required. When biopsy procedures have been performed, be sure to sterilize the needle-guided
bracket. Fail to do so may result in the probe and the needle-guided bracket to becoming sources
of infection. Please follow the instructions in the manual for cleaning.
Never immerse the probe connector into liquid such as water or
WARNING: disinfectant. Immersion may cause electrical shock or malfunction.

1 No cleaning and disinfecting may result in the probe becoming

CAUTION: a source of infection.
2 Please follow the disinfectant manufacturer's manual for
performing cleaning and disinfection, including preparing
sterile water and cleaning and disinfection time.

NOTE: 1. After the examination, wipe off the ultrasound gel thoroughly. Otherwise, the
ultrasound gel may solidify and degrade the image quality of the transducer.
2. DO NOT make the probe to become overheated (more than 55°C) during cleaning
and disinfections. High temperature may cause the probe to become deformed or
damaged.

Probes and Biopsy 13-9

 Cleaning and Disinfection/sterilization Overview
Cleaning and disinfection refer to two distinct processes. According to the Centers for Disease
Control and Prevention (CDC) "Guideline for Disinfection and Sterilization in Healthcare Facilities"
(2008):

"Cleaning is the removal of visible soil (e.g. organic and inorganic material) from objects and
surfaces and normally is accomplished manually or mechanically using water with detergents or
enzymatic products. Thorough cleaning is essential before high-level disinfection and sterilization
because inorganic and organic material that remains on the surfaces of instruments interfere with
the effectiveness of these processes."

"Disinfection describes a process that eliminates many or all pathogenic microorganisms, except
bacterial spores."

Low-Level Disinfection—Destruction of most bacteria, some viruses, and some fungi.

Low-level disinfection will not necessarily inactivate Mycobacterium tuberculosis or
bacterial spores.

High-Level Disinfection (HLD)—Destruction/removal of all microorganisms except

bacterial spores.

“Sterilization describes a process that destroys or eliminates all forms of microbial life and is
carried out in healthcare facilities by physical or chemical methods.”

Selecting a Microbicidal Method

Transducers can be divided into three categories based on their intended use. Some transducers
may fall into more than one category (e.g. transducers use for biopsy procedures). When selecting
a disinfectant, determine the required level of disinfection based on intended use and possibility of
cross-contamination.

Contacts intact skin: Transducers that only come into contact with clean, intact skin are
considered noncritical devices and require cleaning after every use. Cleaning may be followed by
a low-level disinfectant spray or wipe.

Contacts mucous membranesand non-intact skin: This category includes all endocavity
transducers - intravaginal, transrectal, and transesophageal (TEE) and transducers use for biopsy
procedures. These semi-critical transducers must be cleaned with an appropriate cleaner after use
followed by high-level disinfection.

Contacts otherwise sterile tissue or body-space: These transducers are considered critical and
include all intraoperative transducers. These transducers must be cleaned with an appropriate
cleaner after each use, followed by a sterilization process.

Cleaning
Please refer to the instructions in the manual and follow your hospital policy and procedures for
cleaning.
1. Wear a pair of gloves to prevent infection.
2. Disconnect the ultrasound probe from the ultrasound system. If the sheath is used, take off the
sheath and discard it.
3. Wipe away the ultrasound gel or other dirt on the surface of the probe by using a piece of
disposable lint-free soft cloth or tissue.

13-10 Probes and Biopsy

4. Prepare a cleaning solvent (enzymatic or neutral pH detergent, e.g., liquinox, MetriZyme) by
using distilled or softened water in accordance with the operator's manual provided by the
manufacturer.
5. Immerse the ultrasound probe fully in the cleaning solvent for at least 1 minute or a period
specified by the manufacturer.
6. Wipe and wash the probe surface gently by using a piece of lint-free soft cloth or soft sponge
until no dirt is visible. When necessary, wash the locating groove of the needle-guided bracket
and other items by using disposable cotton swabs. Avoid using a brush to wash the lens
because it may damage the probe.
7. Rinse the probe thoroughly by using a large amount of distilled or softened water (about 2
gallons) at room temperature for about 30s to remove the residual dirt and cleaning solvent.
Repeat the operation twice.
8. Dry the probe by wiping with a piece of disposable lint-free soft cloth or tissue. Do not dry the
probe by heating.
9. Inspect the probe. If visible dirt still exists, repeat the preceding steps to wash the probe until it
is all clean.
10. Check whether the probe has defects such as peeling, rifts, bumps, cracks, or liquid spill. If
such defects exist, the probe has reached the end of its service life. In this case, stop using it
and contact the Mindray service department.

Low-level disinfection of a non-critical probe

Use protective eyewear when disinfecting using sprays.
CAUTION:

1. Wear a pair of gloves to prevent infection.

2. Clean the probe thoroughly in accordance with the cleaning procedure before disinfection.
3. Disinfect the probe by using an appropriate low-level disinfectant. If you use a wet wipe for
disinfection, refer to the wiping method specified by the supplier and the wiping duration
specified in the operator's manual provided by the manufacturer.
4. If you use a disinfectant spray, spray the disinfectant on a piece of disposable lint-free soft
cloth and wipe the probe. For details about the wiping duration, see the operator's manual
provided by the manufacturer.
5. Wipe away the residual disinfectant on the probe by using a piece of lint-free soft cloth soaked
with distilled water. Wipe three times. Or rinse the probe thoroughly by using a large amount of
distilled or softened water (about 2 gallons) at room temperature.
6. Dry the probe by wiping with a piece of disposable lint-free soft cloth. Do not dry the probe by
heating.
7. Check whether the probe has defects such as peeling, rifts, bumps, cracks, or liquid spill. If
such defects exist, the probe has reached the end of its service life. In this case, stop using it
and contact the Mindray service department.
8. Store the probe in a cool, clean and dry environment. And repeat the cleaning and disinfection
process before the next use.

Probes and Biopsy 13-11

 Connector

Strain relief

NOTE: Observe the graph here carefully to perform disinfection. Do not spray the strain relief on
the connector end or the connector.

High-level disinfection of a semi-critical probe

1. Wear a pair of gloves to prevent infection.
2. Clean the probe thoroughly in accordance with the cleaning procedure before disinfection.
3. Disinfect the probe by using an appropriate high-level disinfectant. For how to use a high-level
disinfectant, see the operator's manual provided by the manufacturer. Prepare a disinfectant
by using distilled or softened water when necessary.
4. Immerse the probe head partially in the disinfectant and shake the probe appropriately to
remove any bubbles on the probe surface. For details about the probe immersion duration,
see the operator's manual provided by the manufacturer.
5. Rinse the probe thoroughly by using a large amount of distilled or softened water (about 2
gallons) at room temperature for about 30s to remove the residual disinfectant. Repeat the
operation twice.
6. Dry the probe by wiping with a piece of disposable lint-free soft cloth. Do not dry the probe by
heating.
7. Check whether the probe has defects such as peeling, rifts, bumps, cracks, or liquid spill. If
such defects exist, the probe has reached the end of its service life. In this case, stop using it
and contact the Mindray service department.
8. Store the probe in a cool, clean and dry environment. And repeat the cleaning and disinfection
process before the next use.

13-12 Probes and Biopsy

 Strain relief
Probe handle

NOTE: 1. Observe the graph here carefully to immerse the transducer. Only soak parts of
the transducer below the strain relief.

Sterilization of a critical probe

For intra-operative transducers, they have to be thoroughly cleaned and sterilized after completing
each examination.
1. Wear a pair of gloves to prevent infection.
2. Clean the probe thoroughly in accordance with the cleaning procedure before sterilization.
3. Sterilize the probe by using an appropriate sterilant. MINDRAY recommended the following
solution to sterilize the probe. For how to use the sterilant, see the operator's manual provided
by the manufacturer. Prepare a sterililant by using sterile water when necessary.

Glutaraldehyde-based sterilization solution

Trade Name Chemical Name Procedures
Cidex Activated
Glutaraldehyde
2.2-2.7% Glutaraldehyde
Solution (applicable
for CE region only) Please refer to the instructions provided by the
Cidex Activated manufacturer of the solution for details.
Dialdehyde Solution
2.4% Glutaraldehyde
(applicable for FDA
region only)

 Refer to the instructions provided by the chemical manufacturer concerning concentration

of the sterilization solution, method of sterilization and dilution and cautions during use.
 Do not soak the transducer connector or the cable near it into water or any solution.
 Follow local regulations when selecting and using the sterilization solution.
4. Immerse the probe head partially in the sterilant and shake the probe appropriately to remove
any bubbles on the probe surface. For details about the probe immersion duration, see the
operator's manual provided by the manufacturer.
5. Rinse the probe thoroughly by using a large amount of sterile distilled water (about 2 gallons)
at room temperature for about 30s to remove the residual disinfectant. Repeat the operation
twice. Or, follow the rinsing method recommended by the manufacturer of the sterilant to rinse
the probe.

Probes and Biopsy 13-13

 6. Dry the probe by wiping with a piece of sterile disposable lint-free soft cloth. Do not dry the
probe by heating.
7. Check whether the probe has defects such as peeling, rifts, bumps, cracks, or liquid spill. If
such defects exist, the probe has reached the end of its service life. In this case, stop using it
and contact the Mindray service department.
8. Store the probe in a cool, clean and dry environment. And repeat the cleaning and sterilizing
process before the next use.

Immerse the intra-operative transducer in the solution (for reference)

Repeated sterilization will eventually damage the transducer,

CAUTION: please check the transducer’s performance periodically.

Compatible Cleaner, Disinfectants, and Sterilants

High-level disinfectant
510K NO Name
K030004 Cidex OPA Solution
K924434 CidexTM Activated Dialdehyde Solution
K923744 Cidex PlusTM 28 Day Solution
K091022 Resert XL HLD High Level Disinifectant

Low-level level disinfectant

EPA Name
Registration
NO
9480-6 SANI-CLOTH PLUS GERMICIDAL DISPOSABLE CLOTH
70627-56 OXIVIR TB
9480-9 PDI Sani-Cloth AF3 Germicidal Disposable Wipe
46781-8 CAVIWIPES
46781-6 CAVICIDE

13.1.6 Environment
Working condition
Use the probes in the following ambient conditions:

13-14 Probes and Biopsy

 Ambient Atmospheric
Probe Relative humidity
temperature pressure

30%~85%RH（no
6LB7E 0℃-40℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
CB10-4E 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
25%～90%RH（no
D7-2E 10℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
L14-6NE 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
L12-3E 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
C7-3E 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
L14-6WE 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
P10-4E 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
C11-3E 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
V11-3E 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
V11-3WE 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
V11-3BE 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
C5-1E 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
20%～85%RH（no
SP5-1E 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
20%～85%RH（no
DE11-3E 18℃～30℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
20%～85%RH（no
SC6-1E 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
20%～85%RH（no
V11-3HE 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
20%～85%RH（no
L9-3E 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
20%～85%RH（no
SD8-1E 18℃～30℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）

Probes and Biopsy 13-15

 Ambient Atmospheric
Probe Relative humidity
temperature pressure

30%～85%RH（no
P4-2E 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
C5-2E 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
20%~85%RH（no
L14-5WE 0℃～40℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
P7-3E 10℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
D6-2E 10℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
DE10-3E 18℃～30℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
15%~80%RH（no
L20-5E 0℃～35℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
L16-4HE 10℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
D6-2NE 15℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）
30%～85%RH（no
CW5s 0℃～40℃ 700hPa～1060hPa
condensation）

Storage and transportation Condition

Store and transport the probes in the following ambient conditions:

Ambient Atmospheric
Probe Relative humidity
temperature pressure

30%~95%RH（no
6LB7E -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
CB10-4E -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
D7-2E -10℃～60℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
L14-6NE -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
L12-3E -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）

13-16 Probes and Biopsy

 Ambient Atmospheric
Probe Relative humidity
temperature pressure

30%~95%RH（no
C7-3E -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
L14-6WE -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
P10-4E -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
C11-3E -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
V11-3E -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
V11-3WE -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
V11-3BE -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
C5-1E -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
20%~95%RH（no
SP5-1E -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
DE11-3E -10℃～50℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
20%~95%RH（no
SC6-1E -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
20%~95%RH（no
V11-3HE -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
20%~95%RH（no
L9-3E -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
20%~95%RH（no
SD8-1E -10℃～50℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
P4-2E -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
C5-2E -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
20%~95%RH（no
L14-5WE -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
P7-3E -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
D6-2E -10℃～60℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）

Probes and Biopsy 13-17

 Ambient Atmospheric
Probe Relative humidity
temperature pressure

30%~95%RH（no
DE10-3E -10℃～50℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
15%~90%RH（no
L20-5E -20℃～60℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
L16-4HE 0℃～60℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
5%~95%RH（no
D6-2NE -10℃～60℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）
30%~95%RH（no
CW5s -20℃～55℃ 700 hPa ~ 1060 hPa
condensation）

When all examinations for the session have been completed, confirm that the probe is in good
condition. After disinfecting the probe, confirm that the probe is in good condition and stored in a
suitable place.
1. To prevent the probe from being damaged, DO NOT store it where it may be exposed to:
 Direct sunlight or X-rays
 Sudden changes in temperature
 Dust
 Excessive vibration
 Heat generators
2. When the probe is sent to the MINDRAY Customer Service Department or a sales
representative for repair, be sure to disinfect it and keep it in the carrying case to prevent
infection.
3. Sterilize the carrying case as necessary.

13-18 Probes and Biopsy

13.2 Biopsy Guide
The person performing biopsy procedures must understand
WARNING: diagnostic ultrasound thoroughly and have been adequately
trained, otherwise the patient may suffer consequences.
In the situations listed below, the biopsy needle may fail to
penetrate the target. Incorrect biopsy may cause various
consequences for the patient.
 Using a needle-guided bracket other than that provided.
 Mounting the needle-guided bracket incorrectly.
 Using a biopsy needle that is unsuitable for the type of biopsy
being performed.
 Using a biopsy needle that is unsuitable for the needle guide.
Before and after a biopsy procedure is performed, confirm
that the needle-guided bracket is normal. Manually confirm
that the parts of the needle-guided bracket do not slip or
move from their proper positions. If the needle-guided
bracket is used when parts are not securely and correctly
installed, the patient may be injured. If an abnormality is
found on the needle-guided bracket, immediately stop using
it and contact the MINDRAY Customer Service Department or
a sales representative.
DO NOT use a needle-guided bracket while scanning is
performed. The needle may advance in an incorrect direction
and possibly injure the patient.
Never perform a biopsy during image scanning.
DO NOT freeze an image while performing a biopsy
procedure.
During biopsy procedures, the needle may deviate from the
desired course due to tissue characteristics or the type of
needle. In particular, needles with small diameters may
deviate to a greater degree.
Disinfect the probe and sterilize the needle-guided bracket
before and after each ultrasound-guided biopsy procedure is
performed. Failure to do so may cause the probe and the
needle-guided bracket to become sources of infection.
The needle mark displayed on the ultrasound image does not
indicate the actual position of the biopsy needle. Therefore, it
should only be used as a reference. Always monitor the
relative positions of the biopsy needle during procedures.
Adjust the needle mark before the biopsy procedure is
performed.

Probes and Biopsy 13-19

 When performing biopsy procedures, only use sterile
ultrasound gel that is certified as safe and manage the
ultrasound gel properly to ensure that it does not become a
source of infection.
When performing an operation involving biopsy, wear sterile
gloves.
Image of the biopsy target and the actual position of the
biopsy needle:
Diagnostic ultrasound systems produce tomographic
plane images with information about particular
thicknesses in the thickness direction of the probe.
(That is to say, the information shown in the images
consists of all the information scanned in the
thickness direction of the probe.) Therefore, even
though the biopsy needle appears to have penetrated
the target object in the image, it may not actually have
done so. When the biopsy target is small, dispersion
of the ultrasound beam may lead to the image
deviating from the actual position. Be aware of this.
The target object and biopsy needle appear in the image as
shown in the figures below (for reference only):

Biopsy

Target

The biopsy needle appears to reach the target object in the

image


13-20 Probes and Biopsy

Dispersion of the ultrasound beam

Probe

Needle
Target
Ultrasound beam

The biopsy needle may not have actually entered the target
object even though it appears to have done so in the image.
To avoid this, note the points below:
 Do not rely only on the needle tip in the image. Pay careful
attention to the fact that when the biopsy needle enters the
target object or comes into contact with it, the object should
shift slightly.
Before performing the biopsy, evaluate the size of the object
and confirm whether the biopsy can be carried out.

Probes and Biopsy 13-21

 13.2.1 Needle-Guided Brackets
Needle-guided brackets are available for purchase as optional accessories and are used in
combination with the probe. Some probes have corresponding needle-guided brackets and
needles. To order needle-guided brackets, contact the MINDRAY Customer Service Department or
a sales representative.
For biopsy or treatment, ultrasound-guided biopsy procedures can be performed using the probe
together with a needle-guided bracket (optional accessory) and a biopsy needle (provided by the
user).

Names of Parts
This section describes the parts and corresponding functions of each needle-guided bracket. Here,
we take a corresponding probe as an example.
 NGB-004

Locking nut Retaining clamp

Locating bulge Needle guide

Locating groove Probe

13-22 Probes and Biopsy

 NGB-007
Metal/needle detachable needle-guided bracket:

No. Name Description

Support for needle-
<1> Used for installing the needle-guided bracket on the probe.
guided bracket
Tab and groove for the
<2> Corresponding to the tab and groove of the probe.
needle-guided bracket
<3> Angle-adjusting base There are 3 types of angles available for adjustment.
Angle shift sign
<4> Corresponding to the biopsy angle (40°, 50° and 60°).
(40°, 50°, 60°)
<5> Angle pinch nut Used for fixing the angle lock at a chosen angle.
Used for determining the angle of the biopsy. Different
<6> Angle block
specifications of blocks can be used.
Used for installing biopsy needles. There are five guiding block
<7> Guiding block
specification for different biopsy needles.
Guiding block
<8> Matched with the corresponding biopsy needle (14G).
specification (14G)
<9> Needle guide hole Used for installing the biopsy needle.
Needle-guided bracket
<10> Used for locking the needle-guided bracket and the probe.
pinch nut

Probes and Biopsy 13-23

 Plastic/needle detachable needle-guided bracket:

No. Name Description

Support for needle-
<1> Used for installing the needle-guided bracket on the probe.
guided bracket
Used for determining the angle of the biopsy. There are three
<2> Angle block
angle block specifications.
Used for installing biopsy needles. There are five guiding block
<3> Guiding block
specification for different biopsy needles.
Tab and groove for the
<4> Corresponding to the tab and groove of the probe.
needle-guided bracket
Guiding block
<5> Matched with the corresponding biopsy needle (13G).
specification (13G)
Biopsy needle
<6> Used for installing the biopsy needle.
guiding hole
Angle block
<7> The corresponding biopsy angle is 60°.
specification (60°)

13-24 Probes and Biopsy

 NGB-009

2 6
7 9
3
10
8
4 11

No. Name Description

Support of Used for installing the needle-guided bracket on the
<1>
needle-guided bracket transducer.
Knob of fixing needle-guided Used for fixing the needle-guided bracket on the
<2>
bracket transducer.
<3> Groove Match with the tab on the transducer.
Hole for installing guiding Used for installing the knob of fixing needle-guided
<4>
block bracket.
Indicate distance between needle and the transducer
<5> Needle distance scales
head surface.
Used for installing biopsy needle; there are five
<6> Guiding block
specifications of guiding blocks for different needles.
<7> Knob of fixing the needle Used for fixing the needle.

<8> Guiding hole of the needle Used for installing the biopsy needle.
Specification of guiding
<9> Matched with the corresponding biopsy needle.
block

<10> Mark of indicating scales Indicating needle distance scales.

Knob of fixing the guiding

<11> Used for fixing the guiding block.
block

Probes and Biopsy 13-25

  NGB-011

Needle guide Needle guide

clamping knob

Locating pit
Clamp

Needle guide hole

Locating groove Grip knob Needle guide rack

Needle-guided
bracket

Probe

 NGB-015

Guiding hole
V-shaped guiding block
Groove

Lock pin

Needle type
adjusting base
Needle fixing nut
Needle type dial scale

V-shaped cover
Clamp
Angle block
Angle-adjusting
Pinch nut
base

Angle shift sign Angle pinch nut

13-26 Probes and Biopsy

 NGB-018
Needle guide hole
Guiding block
Guiding block
specification

Pinch nut of bracket

Angle shift sign
Angle pinch nut Angle-adjusting base

Angle block Groove

Clamp

 NGB-019
NGB-019 and NGB-015 structures are similar. See the NGB-015 description for details.
 NGB-020

Locating groove Guiding hole

V-shaped guiding block
Lock pin
Clamp pinch nut
Needle type
Needle type dial scale

Retaining clamp

V-shaped cover

Angle adjusting
block
Angle pinch nut

Probes and Biopsy 13-27

  NGB-021

Retaining Locating
Needle guide clamp clamp Retaining clamp (back)
(front)
Locating bulge Probe

Locating groove Locking nut

 NGB-022
Needle fixing nut
Groove
Lock pin
Clamp
Needle type dial scale

Clamp

Angle adjusting base

Angle fixing nut

Needle guide hole

 NGB-025 Metal/needle undetachable needle-guided bracket:

Location
Front
clamp
clamp
Upper clamp
Front
Pinch nut
slot
Intra-cavity
prob

Lower Location
clamp hole

13-28 Probes and Biopsy

 NGB-027

Position
Upper clamp block Front clamp
Pinch nut
Intra-cavity probe

Lower clamp Front slot

Positioning block

 NGB-034

Needle
V-shaped guide hole Lock pin
Clamp V-shape cover
Needle fixing guiding block
nut Needle
adjusting base

Needle type dial

scale
Guiding groove
Angle fixing
nut

Angle adjusting
base

Probes and Biopsy 13-29

  NGB-035

 NGB-039

13-30 Probes and Biopsy

Note: the above needle-guided brackets whose name starts with NGB are reusable. The CIVCO
brackets are disposable.

13.2.2 Basic Procedures for Biopsy Guiding

1. Select the correct needle-guided bracket and needle and install them properly. For details, see
“13.2.3 Needle-Guided Bracket Inspection and Installation.”
2. Verify the biopsy guide line.
3. Press <F11 Biopsy> on the keyboard or touch [Biopsy] on the touch screen to enter the biopsy.
Tip:
 If the current probe has no corresponding bracket, or the image is frozen and the guide
line was hidden before the image was frozen, then you cannot enter the Biopsy menu.
 Before entering the Biopsy menu, the system will display the prompt “Please calibrate
guidelines before biopsy!.”
4. Use touch screen controls to select the bracket and guide line according to the actual situation.
5. In the Biopsy menu, touch [Verify] to enter the Verify menu to verify the guide line. After
verification, click [Save] to save the parameter setting. Then click [Exit] to return to the Biopsy
status.
Tip:
 If you changed the probe or needle-guided bracket during the biopsy, verify the guide line
again.
 When exiting the Verify menu without saving, the system will display the prompt “Are you
sure to save data changes?” Click [Yes] to save the setting and return to the Biopsy status.
6. Scan to locate the target. Center the target in the electronic guidezone path.
7. Direct the needle into the area of interest for specimen.
8. After extracting the biopsy sample is complete, gently remove the probe from the body.
To exit Biopsy: press <F11 Biopsy>.
9. Disassemble the items and properly dispose of these items as required.

Probes and Biopsy 13-31

 Failure to match the guidezone displayed to the guide may cause the
DANGER needle to track a path outside the zone.
It is extremely important that when using the adjustable angle biopsy
guides, the angle displayed on the screen matches the angle set on the
guide, otherwise the needle will not follow the displayed guidezone and
this could result in repeated biopsies or patient injury.

13.2.3 Needle-Guided Bracket Inspection and Installation

13.2.3.1 Inspection of the Needle-Guided Bracket
Be sure to perform inspections before and after using the needle-guided bracket. If an abnormality
is found on the needle-guided bracket, immediately stop using it and contact the MINDRAY
Customer Service Department or a sales representative.
1. Sterilize the needle-guided bracket before and after use.
2. Confirm that the needle-guided bracket is free from damage, deformation, stripping,
malfunction, loose or missing parts.
3. Confirm that the needle-guided bracket is securely mounted in the correct position.

13.2.3.2 Installing the Needle-Guided Bracket

 NGB-004
(1) Put the sterile probe sheath on.

(2) Open the retaining clamp, align the needle-guided bracket with the probe to align the
locating bulge on the needle guide with the locating grooves on the probe, then turn the
retaining clamp to align it with the probe (see the figure below).

(3) When the retaining clamp is turned to the correct position, the locking nut will lock the
retaining clamp and the needle-guided bracket is then mounted in the correct position.

13-32 Probes and Biopsy

 NGB-007
Metal/needle detachable needle-guided bracket:
(1) Put the sterile probe sheath on.
(2) Hold the probe in one hand, select the correct needle-guided bracket and hold it with the
other hand. Match the groove and tab with the tab and groove of the probe respectively.
Mount the bracket onto the probe.

(3) Screw the pinch nut of the needle-guided bracket to ensure that the needle-guided
bracket is properly installed on the probe.
(4) Select a suitable guiding block and push it into the groove above the angle block, then
clamp it tightly.

(5) Screw the block's nut to secure the block.

(6) Insert a biopsy needle with the same specification as that of the guiding block into the
guiding block hole.

Plastic needle-guided bracket:

(1) Put the sterile probe sheath on.
(2) Hold the probe in one hand, select the correct needle-guided bracket and hold it with the
other hand. Align the tab at the narrow end of the needle-guided bracket with the groove
of the probe, then push the needle-guided bracket forward, so the tabs and grooves of the
needle-guided bracket align with the grooves and tabs of the probe.

(3) Check manually to confirm that the needle-guided bracket is securely installed on the
probe.
(4) Select a suitable guiding block and push it into the groove above the angle block, then
clamp it tightly.

Probes and Biopsy 13-33

 (5) Insert a biopsy needle with the same specification as that of the guiding block into the
guiding block hole.

NGB-009
(1) Put on the transducer cover.

(2) Cover the support of needle-guided bracket on the transducer, making the groove of the
needle-guided bracket to match with the tab of the transducer. Set the needle-guided
bracket at the desired position, turn tightly the knob of fixing needle-guided bracket to fix
the needle-guided bracket.

(3) Select a proper guiding block and thread the knob of fixing the guiding block through the
hole of installing guiding block, move the guiding block to the desired position, then turn
tightly the knob of fixing the guiding block to fix the guiding block on the support of needle-
guided bracket.

13-34 Probes and Biopsy

 (4) Insert a biopsy needle with the same specification as that of the guiding block into the hole
of the guiding block and turn tightly the knob of fixing the needle.

 NGB-011
(1) Connect the locating groove on the clamp with the two raised edges on the probe head
and align the locating pit of the clamp with the convex point on the probe head.
(2) Turn the grip knob at the tail of the needle-guided bracket tightly.
 NGB-015
(1) Put the probe sheath on.
(2) Hold the transducer in one hand, select the correct needle-guided bracket and hold it with
the other hand. Match the groove of the bracket to the tab of the transducer. Mount the
bracket onto the transducer.

(3) Screw the pinch nut of the needle-guided bracket to ensure that the needle-guided
bracket is properly installed on the transducer.
(4) Adjust the dial scale to the required needle type shift, then screw the needle fixing nut to
lock the dial scale. (To adjust the dial scale, loose the needle fixing nut first.)
(5) Pull the lock pin and close the V-shaped cover to fix the lock pin in the groove of the
needle type adjusting base, so as to install the needle in the guiding hole.

Probes and Biopsy 13-35

  NGB-018
(1) Put the sterile probe sheath on.
(2) Select a suitable needle-guided bracket and match the groove to the tab of the transducer.
Mount the bracket onto the transducer. The needle-guided brackets may be different from
each other, but the methods are the same.

(3) Screw the pinch nut of the needle-guided bracket to ensure that the needle-guided
bracket is properly installed on the transducer.
(4) Select a suitable guiding block and push it into the groove above the angle block.

(5) Screw the block's nut to secure the block.

(6) Insert a biopsy needle with the same specification as that of the guiding block into the
guiding block hole.
 NGB-019
NGB-019 and NGB-015 structures are similar. See the NGB-015 description for details.
 NGB-020
(1) Put on the sterile transducer sheath.

(2) Select a proper needle-guided bracket, and match the locating groove with the tab of the
transducer. Mount the bracket onto the transducer. Screw the pinch nut of the needle-
guided bracket to confirm that the needle-guided bracket is properly installed on the
transducer.
(3) Adjust the dial scale to the required needle type shift.

(4) Pull the lock pin and close the V-shaped cover to fix the lock pin in the groove of the
needle type adjusting base, so as to install the needle into the guiding hole.
 NGB-021
(1) Put the sterile transducer sheath on.
(2) Loosen the retaining clamp, align the needle-guided bracket with the transducer to align
the locating clamp on the needle guide with the locating grooves on the transducer, then
press the retaining clamp (front) to align the locating clamp and the locating bulge on the
front retaining clamp with the corresponding groove.

13-36 Probes and Biopsy

 (3) Screw the retaining clamp to align it with the transducer structure. When the clamp is
turned to the correct position, the locking nut will lock the retaining clamp and the needle-
guided bracket is then mounted in the correct position.

 NGB-022
(1) Put on the sterile transducer sheath.
(2) Hold the transducer by one hand, select the proper needle-guided bracket, and hold it with
the other hand. Match the groove of the bracket with the tab of the transducer. Amount the
bracket onto the transducer.

(3) Screw the pinch nut of the needle-guided bracket to confirm that the needle-guided
bracket is properly installed on the transducer.
(4) Adjust the dial scale to the required needle type shift, and then screw the needle fixing nut
to lock the dial scale. (To adjust the dial scale you have to loose the needle fixing nut first.)
(5) Pull the lock pin and close the V-shaped cover to fix the lock pin in the groove of the
needle type adjusting base, so as to install the needle into the guiding hole.
 NGB-025
1. Put on the sterile probe sheath.

2. Open the clamp. Insert the front clamp to the front groove.

Align front clamp with

front groove
3. Push the bispy forward (arrow’s direction) until the locating pole inserting into the location hole.
Turn the lower clamp againsy the intra-cavity probe. Tighten the nut to lock the biopsy (arrow’s
direction).

Probes and Biopsy 13-37

 Insert the locating pole
into the locating hole

 NGB-027
1. Put on the sterile transducer sheath.

2. Open the clamp. Insert the front clamp to the front groove.
3. Push the biopsy forward (arrow’s direction) until the locating pole inserting into the location
hole. Turn the lower clamp against the intra-cavity probe. Tighten the nut to lock the biopsy
(arrow’s direction).

 NGB-034
1. Put on the sterile probe sheath.

2. Select a proper needle-guided bracket, and match the locating groove with the tab of the
transducer. Mount the bracket onto the transducer.

3. Tighten the pinch nut of the needle-guided bracket to confirm that the needle-guided bracket is
properly installed on the transducer.

13-38 Probes and Biopsy

4. Adjust the dial scale to the required needle type shift.

5. Adjust the needle angle to the proper shift as required (loosen the nut first, and then tighten
the nut based on the shift you need).

6. Pull the lock pin and close the V-shaped cover to fix the lock pin in the groove of the needle
type adjusting base, so as to install the needle into the guiding hole.

 NGB-035
(1) Put the sterile sheath on the probe.

Probes and Biopsy 13-39

 (2) Select a proper needle-guided bracket, and match the locating groove with the tab of the
transducer. Mount the bracket onto the transducer.

(3) Tighten the pinch nut of the needle-guided bracket to confirm that the needle-guided
bracket is properly installed on the probe. Loosen the angle adjusting nut.

(4) Hold the probe and press the pressing block to separate V-shaped guiding block from the
pressing block.

(5) Insert the needle into V-shaped guided block.

13-40 Probes and Biopsy

 (6) Release the pressing block, adjust the angle adjusting nut to confirm that the needle can
freely slide in a vertical direction.

 NGB-039
(1) Put the sterile sheath on the probe.
(2) Select a proper needle-guided bracket, and match the locating groove with the tab of the
transducer. Mount the bracket onto the transducer.

(3) Tighten the pinch nut of the needle-guided bracket to confirm that the needle-guided
bracket is properly installed on the probe. Loosen the angle adjusting nut.

Probes and Biopsy 13-41

 (4) Hold the probe and press the pressing block to separate V-shaped guiding block from the
pressing block.

(5) Insert the needle into V-shaped guided block.

(6) Release the pressing block, adjust the angle adjusting nut to confirm that the needle can
freely slide in a vertical direction.

13-42 Probes and Biopsy

Select the Needle
Select the proper needle according to the specification above, and adjust the needle shift to the
same specification of the selected needle.
Ensure that all guide parts are properly fixed prior to performing a
CAUTION: biopsy.

13.2.4 Biopsy Menu/Guideline Verification

Adjusting the needle mark is necessary before each biopsy procedure.
1. Confirm that the needle-guided bracket has been installed securely in the correct position.
2. Prepare a container filled with sterile water.
3. Place the head of the probe in the sterile water and place a biopsy needle in the needle guide.
4. When the biopsy needle appears on the image, confirm that the biopsy needle is displayed at
almost the same position as the selected needle mark.

Prior to each biopsy procedure, be sure to verify the guide

WARNING: line.
If the needle is not consistent with the guide line, DO NOT
perform the biopsy procedure.

NOTE: You can perform guide line verification on a single live B/C image, and all biopsy-
irrelevant operations are forbidden.

Biopsy Guideline
Press <F11 Biopsy> to enter Biopsy or touch [Biopsy] on the touch screen.
You can also operate on the menu. Use touch screen operations as an example.
 Select the biopsy bracket angle/guide line
If the needle-guided bracket supports more than one biopsy angle or guide line, select the
angle/guideline by touching the [Biopsy Kit: NGB-XXX-XX] on the touch screen (last two letters
are angle or the guide line).
 Select the guide line dot size
Touch [Dot Size] to select the dot size from Small, Medium and Big.
Tip:

Probes and Biopsy 13-43

  The guide line is a dotted line which consists of three kinds of dots. The distance between
two dots is depth-dependent. Move the cursor over the big dot and a numeral,
representing the biopsy depth, is displayed.
 The biopsy guidezone adjusts along with image adjustments, such as image
inversion/rotations, zoom and depth changes.
 When the imaging depth and area are changed, the guide line is adjusted.
 Select guide grid size (only applicable for the 6LB7E probe)
Touch [Grid Size] to select the the grid size among 2x2, 4x4 and 6x6.
 Select guide grid type (only applicable for the 6LB7E probe)
Touch [Grid Type] to select the grid type among Circle, +, X and Dot.
 Exit
 Touch [Biopsy Kit XXX] to be OFF or press <F11 Biopsy>.
Tips: in real-time status, press <F11 Biopsy> to exit biopsy status; in frozen status, press <F11
Biopsy> to hide/show the guide line if biopsy function is enabled.

Verification
Touch [Verify] to open the Biopsy Verify menu.
 Adjust the guide line position
Rotate the knob under [Position] on the touch screen to change the position of the guide line.
 Adjust the angle
Rotate the knob under [Angle] on the touch screen to change the guide line angle.
 Biopsy guide grid
Note: touch the [C-L] item on the touch screen or press the user defined key/footswitch
assigned with the "2 in 1 Probe Switch" function to switch the linear and convex plane.
For probe 6LB7E-C, the biopsy needle appears as a spot on the image.
On the image, find and select the guide grid point corresponding to the biopsy needle insertion
point of the template grid, and then adjust the parameters of the menu on the screen to make
sure that the biopsy needle is displayed at almost the same position as the selected guide grid
point.
For probe 6LB7E-L, select one grid point in the D column of the template grid to insert the
needle, and the biopsy needle appears as a line on the image.
On the image, find and select the guide grid line corresponding to the biopsy needle insertion
line of the template grid, and then adjust the parameters of the menu on the screen to make
sure that the biopsy needle is displayed at almost the same position as the selected guide grid
line.
 Rotate the knob under [Position] on the touch screen to move the grid in the horizontal
direction.
 Rotate the knob under [Depth] on the touch screen to move the grid in the vertical
direction.
 Save the verified settings
After the position and angle of the guide line are adjusted, touch [Save] and the system saves
the current guide line settings. If biopsy is entered again, the displayed Position and Angle are
the verified value.
 Restore the factory default settings
Touch [Load Factory] and the position and angle of the guide line are restored to the factory
default settings.
 Exit biopsy verify status
Touch [Exit] and the system exits the guide line verification status.

13-44 Probes and Biopsy

NOTE: For biopsies performed with a biplanar probe, verification is performed on the first guide
line. The other guide lines move together with the first one in parallel.

13.2.5 Removing the Needle-Guided Bracket

 NGB-004
Hold the probe in your left hand. Unscrew the locking nut with your right hand to open the
retaining clamp, then raise the needle-guided bracket to separate the locating bulge from the
locating grooves.
 NGB-007
Metal needle-guided bracket:
(1) Loosen the guiding block's nut and slightly move the guiding block in the direction of the
needle’s tail.
(2) Separate the residual part of the needle-guide bracket and the probe from the needle.
(3) Loosen the bracket's pinch nut and remove the needle-guided bracket from the probe.
Plastic needle-guided bracket:
(1) Slightly move the guiding block in the direction of the needle’s tail.
(2) Separate the residual part of the needle-guide bracket and the probe from the needle.
(3) Remove the needle-guided bracket support from the probe.
NGB-009
(1) Turn on the knob of fixing the needle and separate the needle from the needle-guided
bracket.
(2) Turn on the knob of fixing guiding block and remove the guiding block from the hole of
installing guiding block.
(3) Turn on the knob of fixing needle-guided bracket and remove the needle-guided bracket.

 NGB-011
Hold the probe and the needle-guided bracket, then open the grip knob of the needle-guided
bracket.
 NGB-015
(1) Pull the lock pin and open up the V-shaped cover to expose the needle.

(2) Separate the bracket and the transducer from the needle.
(3) Turn the pinch nut to release the needle-guided bracket.

(4) Separate the bracket and the transducer.

Probes and Biopsy 13-45

  NGB-018
(1) Loosen the guiding block's nut and slightly move the guiding block in the direction of the
needle’s tail.

(2) Separate the residual part of the needle-guide bracket and the transducer from the needle.
(3) Loosen the bracket's pinch nut and remove the needle-guided bracket from the transducer.

 NGB-019
NGB-019 and NGB-015 structures are similar. See the NGB-015 description for details.
 NGB-020
(1) Pull the lock pin out and open up the V-shaped cover to expose the needle.

(2) Separate the bracket and the transducer from the needle.
(3) Screw the pinch nut to release the needle-guided bracket.

(4) Separate the transducer and the needle-guided bracket.

 NGB-021
Hold the transducer in your left hand and unscrew the locking nut with your right hand to
loosen the retaining clamp. Lift the needle-guided bracket to separate the locating clamp/bulge
from the locating grooves.
 NGB-022
(1) Pull the lock pin and open up the V-shaped cover to expose the needle.

(2) Separate the bracket and the transducer from the needle.
(3) Screw the pinch nut to release the needle-guided bracket.

13-46 Probes and Biopsy

 (4) Separate the bracket and the transducer.
 NGB-025
Hold the prober in the left hand; unscrew the locking nut with the right hand to loose the clamp
(arrow’s direction). Lift the biopsy up (towards arrow’s direction). The locating pole, front clamp,
the locating hole and the front clamp become loose.

 NGB-027
Hold the prober in the left hand; unscrew the locking nut with the right hand to loose the clamp
(arrow’s direction). Lift the biopsy up (towards arrow’s direction). The locating pole, front clamp,
the locating hole and the front clamp become loose.

 NGB-034
 Separate needle from bracket during surgery (NGB-034)
1. Pull the lock pin out until the V-shaped cover can be turned and opened up.

2. Turn over the V-shaped cover to expose the needle. Remove the probe and bracket.

Probes and Biopsy 13-47

  Separate
Screw the pinch nut to release the needle-guided bracket.

 NGB-035
(1) Hold the probe and press the pressing block to separate V-shaped guiding block from the
pressing block.

(2) Remove the needle.

(3) Rotate the clamping nut to separate the bracket from the probe.

13-48 Probes and Biopsy

 NGB-039
(1) Hold the probe and press the pressing block to separate V-shaped guiding block from the
pressing block.

(2) Remove the needle.

(3) Rotate the clamping nut to separate the bracket from the probe.

Probes and Biopsy 13-49

 13.2.6 iNeedle (Needle Visualization Enhancement)
During a biopsy, the metal needle attached to the probe pierces the tissue at a certain angle. Due
to the needle's acoustic impedance, the ultrasonic beam cannot penetrate the metal needle and a
reflecting boundary is formed. As in Figure 1, if the deflection angle is very large, the needle
display is not clear.
In deflected ultrasound transmission, the beam direction is perpendicular to the needle direction
and the reflection direction is the same as the needle, as shown in Figure 2, meaning the needle
display in the ultrasound image is very clear. The system provides additional deflection
transmission that is approximately perpendicular to the metal needle when the normal transmission
(perpendicular to the transducer surface) is being processed. The deflection angle can be chosen
by the user.
iNeedle is an option.

Figure 1 Figure 2

To enter/exit iNeedle
 To enter iNeedle
Touch the [iNeedle] item on the B page on the touch screen.
Or, assign a user-defined key for entering iNeedle.
 Open iNeedle in Biopsy status
1. Perform scanning and locate the target, press <F11 Biopsy> to enter the screen.
2. Touch [iNeedle] to enter the status. Available adjusting parameters are displayed in the menu.
 To exit iNeedle
Press the user-defined key or touch [iNeedle] to exit the status and enter B mode.
 Premium angle display
The premium angle appears on the screen after entering iNeedle.
The appropriate angle is 30° as shown in the figure below.

13-50 Probes and Biopsy

Needle Direction
Description This function adjusts the biopsy needle direction according to actual direction of
needle insertion. The iNeedle region changes correspondingly.
Operation Rotate the knob under the [Needle Dir.] item on the touch screen to select the
direction, which can be left or right.

B/iNeedle
Description This function is used to display the B image and iNeedle image synchronously.
Operation To turn the function on or off, touch [B/iNeedle] on the touch screen.
Tip: iZoom (full-screen magnification) is available in iNeedle status.

Verify
To verify the biopsy guide line, see “13.2.4 Biopsy Menu/” chapter for details.

13.2.7 Clean and Sterilize the Needle-Guided Bracket

Only the CIVCO brackets are disposable. Needle-guided brackets whose name starts with NGB
are reusable, and need thorough cleaning and sterilization before and after each biopsy.

Cleaning
Follow the cleaning instructions in the manual.
1. Wear a pair of gloves to prevent infection.
2. After use, immerse the needle-guided bracket in distilled water immediately to prevent dirt from
drying. Wipe the entire surface of the needle-guided bracket by using a piece of disposable
lint-free soft cloth to remove coarse dirt.
3. Prepare a cleaning solvent (enzymatic or neutral pH detergent, e.g., liquinox, MetriZyme) by
using distilled or softened water in accordance with the operator's manual provided by the
manufacturer.
4. Detach all the detachable parts of the needle-guided bracket and immerse the detached parts
fully in the cleaning solvent for at least 1 minute or a period specified by the manufacturer.

Probes and Biopsy 13-51

 Please refer to "13.2.5 Removing the Needle-Guided Bracket".
5. Immerse the needle-guided bracket and all its parts fully in the cleaning solvent. Wipe and
wash the surface and connecting parts of the needle-guided bracket gently by using a soft
brush until no dirt is visible. Place the needle-guided bracket inside an ultrasonic cleaner and
perform ultrasonic cleaning for 3–5 minutes.
6. Rinse the needle-guided bracket thoroughly by using a large amount of distilled or softened
water (about 2 gallons) at room temperature for about 30s to remove the residual dirt and
cleaning solvent. Repeat the operation twice.
7. Wipe away the water on the needle-guided bracket by using a piece of disposable lint-free soft
cloth.
8. Inspect the needle-guided bracket. If visible dirt still exists, repeat the preceding steps to wash
the bracket until it is all clean.
9. Check whether the needle-guided bracket has defects such as deformation and rusting. If such
defects exist, the bracket has reached the end of its service life. In this case, stop using it and
contact the Mindray service department.

Sterilization with a sterilant

1. Wear a pair of gloves to prevent infection.
2. Clean thoroughly in accordance with the cleaning procedure before sterilization.
3. Sterilize the needle-guided bracket by using an appropriate sterilant. MINDRAY recommended
the following solution to sterilize the needle-guided bracket. For how to use a sterilant, see the
operator's manual provided by the manufacturer. Prepare a sterilant by using sterile distilled
water when necessary.
4. Immerse the needle-guided bracket fully in the sterilant and shake the bracket appropriately to
remove any bubbles on the surface. Use a syringe to draw an appropriate amount of sterilant
and inject the sterilant into the hole to remove the bubbles inside the hole. For details about
the immersion duration, see the operator's manual provided by the manufacturer.
5. After sterilization, wash the needle-guided bracket thoroughly by using a large amount of
sterile distilled water (about 2 gallons) at room temperature for about 30s to remove the
residual sterilant. Repeat the operation twice.
6. Dry the needle-guided bracket by using a piece of sterile disposable lint-free soft cloth.
7. Check whether the needle-guided bracket has defects such as deformation and rusting. If such
defects exist, the bracket has reached the end of its service life. In this case, stop using it and
contact the Mindray service department.
8. Store the needle-guided bracket in a cool, clean and dry environment. And repeat the cleaning
and sterilizing process before the next use.

 Glutaraldehyde-based sterilant:
Chemical
Trade name Procedures
name
Glutaraldehyde
(2.4%) Cidex
Refer to the instructions provided by the solution
(applicable for Activated Dialdehyde manufacturer for details.
FDA region Solution
only)

 High-pressure steam sterilization (High-pressure steam sterilization is preferred for the metal
guided brackets)
1. Wear a pair of gloves to prevent infection.

13-52 Probes and Biopsy

2. Clean the needle-guided bracket thoroughly in accordance with the cleaning procedure before
sterilization.
3. Package the needle-guided bracket in accordance with the sterilization requirements of
surgical instruments using the sterilization wrap or pouch cleared by FDA.
4. Place the packaged needle-guided bracket inside a high-temperature steam sterilizer and
perform sterilization. The sterilization parameters are 121°C and 30 minutes for a gravity
displacement steam sterilizer.
5. Take out the sterilization package after sterilization and dry it in an oven at 60°C for 20–30
minutes.
6. Keep the sterilization package together with other sterilized surgical instruments in a sterile
item storage area.
7. Check whether the needle-guided bracket has defects such as deformation and rusting before
use. If such defects exist, the bracket has reached the end of its service life. In this case, stop
using it and contact the Mindray service department.

NOTE: 1. Repeated sterilization with liquid sterilant may degrade the safety and performance
of the plastic needle-guided bracket. Please check the needle-guided bracket’s
performance periodically.
2. Needle guided brackets are required to verified before each biopsy. If the verification
fails, it indicates that the needle-guided brackets are out of service life. For details
about needle guided bracket verification, please refer to "13.2.4 Biopsy
Menu/Guideline Verification".

13.2.8 Storage and Transportation

1. Do not use the carrying case for storing the needle-guided bracket. If the carrying case is used
for storage, it may become a source of infection.
2. Between examinations, keep the needle-guided bracket in a sterile environment.
3. If the needle-guided bracket is sent to your MINDRAY representative for repair, be sure to
disinfect or sterilize it and keep it in the carrying case to prevent infection.
4. Sterilize the carrying case as necessary.
5. Store or transport the needle-guided bracket under the following ambient conditions:
 Ambient temperature: -20°C to 55°C
 Relative humidity: 20% to 85% (no condensation)

13.2.9 Disposal
Be sure to sterilize the needle-guided bracket before disposing of it.
Contact your MINDRAY representative when disposing of this device.

13.3 Middle Line

Middle Line helps to locate and observe the focus point of lithotripsy wave during lithotripsy
treatment. By means of providing information for the lithotripsy machine as well as a tool for
watching the procedure of lithotripsy in real-time, you can adjust the intension and frequency of the
lithotripsy wave through lithotripsy machine.
NOTE: This function in the ultrasound system is for lesion (stone) location and observation only.
For details, please refer to lithotripsy machine accompanying manuals.

Probes and Biopsy 13-53

  To enter the mode: touch [Middle Line] in the biopsy tab or preset a shortcut key for middle line
function (for details, see “12.1.6 Key Configuration”). Press the user-defined key to turn on the
function.

 The middle line is a vertical dotted line located in the middle of the screen, the position
and direction of which cannot be changed.
 There is a mark icon of “×” located on the middle line which can be moved up and down
along the line by rolling the track ball.
 To use the Middle Line function of the ultrasound system:
a) Use the trackball to change the mark position and by adjusting lithotripsy machine
tools or patient posture to locate the stone center at the mark.
b) Read the depth of the mark by observing the depth caliper on the right of the image.
c) After the stone is located, refer to lithotripsy machine manuals to perform the
lithotripsy.
 The depth of the mark is displayed in the image parameter area of the screen.

13-54 Probes and Biopsy

14 DVR Recording
NOTE: Strictly observe the procedures described here to perform the recording and replaying
operations; otherwise it may result in data loss or system malfunction.
Accidental exposure to strong electromagnetic fields may result in image and data loss,
so check if the recording is successful as soon as possible. Mindray is not responsible
for any data loss.
The system provides built-in DVR recording function. You can use the DVR to record and replay
videos and audios that can be stored in DVD disc or hard disc.
The recorded video is AVI format; you can save it in the hard disk drive, burn to the DVD or export
to the USB disk.
When the built-in DVR is in normal status, the displays at the lower right corner of the screen.

14.1 DVR Recording

After recording, the system will save the recording file automatically, you can select to save in Hard
disk, U disk or optical disk.
1. Perform ultrasound exams, select appropriate views and adjust parameters to prepare for
recording.
2. Click to open the dialogue box and select desired recording type: Hard disk/USB/CDROM;
3. Click [Close] to enter recording status;
4. Press <F9> to record, and the DVR icon displays as in recording status.
During the recording process, you can perform imaging mode switching, comments adding,
body mark adding and measurements.
5. Press <F9> again to stop recording, the DVR icon in the lower right corner turns into data
transfer status .
 If USB/CDROM is selected, the system sends the recorded file to the target storage media
(USB disk or DVD optical disk drive) in the meantime.
 If Hard disk is selected, the system saves the file to the path: D:\dvr.
In the patient task management screen, click [Media Storage Task] tab to check transferring
status.

14.2 Send Image

The system also supports exporting recorded images that are saved in the local disk.
1. Click to open the dialogue box, and click [Local Video Manage] to enter the managing
dialogue box;
2. Select the destination and the target file, click [Send] to send the file to the selected path.

During sending progress, the icon displays as .

DVR Recording 14-1

 14.3 DVR Video Replay
You can replay the video and audio record.
 Replay on PC
Connect the USB disk or optical disk with the file to the PC, open the file directly.

 Replay on the ultrasound system

1. Click to open the dialogue box and select desired playing type: Hard disk/USB/CDROM;
2. Click [Play] to open the dialogue box;
3. Select the path and name for the file and then click [OK] to replay the file, or double-click the
file name directly.

14-2 DVR Recording

15 Acoustic Output
This section of the operator’s manual applies to the overall system, including the main unit, probes,
accessories and peripherals. This section contains important safety information for device
operators pertaining to acoustic output and how to control patient exposure through use of the
ALARA (as low as reasonably achievable) principle. This section also contains information
regarding acoustic output testing and real-time output display.
Read this information carefully before using the system.

15.1 Concerns with Bioeffects

Diagnostic ultrasound is recognized as being safe. There have been no reports of injuries to
patients caused by diagnostic ultrasound.
However, it cannot be stated categorically that ultrasound is 100% safe. Studies have revealed that
ultrasound with extremely high intensity is harmful to body tissues.
Diagnostic ultrasound technology has made a great leap forward during the last several years.
This rapid advance has generated concerns about the potential risk of bioeffects when new
applications or diagnostic technologies become available.

15.2 Prudent Use Statement

Although there are no confirmed biological effects on patients caused by exposure from present
diagnostic ultrasound instruments, the possibility exists that such biological effects may be
identified in the future. Thus ultrasound should be used in a prudent manner to provide medical
benefit to the patient. High exposure levels and long exposure times should be avoided while
acquiring the necessary clinical information.

15.3 ALARA Principle (As Low As Reasonably

Achievable)
The ALARA principle must be practiced when using ultrasound energy. Practicing ALARA ensures
that the total energy level is controlled below a low enough level at which bioeffects are not
generated while diagnostic information is being accumulated. The total energy is controlled by
output intensity and total radiation time. The output intensity necessary for examinations differs
depending on the patient and the clinical case.
Not all examinations can be performed with an extremely low level of acoustic energy. Controlling
the acoustic level at an extremely low level leads to low-quality images or insufficient Doppler
signals, adversely affecting the reliability of the diagnosis. However, increasing the acoustic power
more than necessary does not always contribute to an increase in the quality of the information
required for diagnosis, rather increasing the risk of generating bioeffects.
Users must take responsibility for the safety of patients and utilize ultrasound deliberately.
Deliberate use of ultrasound means that the output power of ultrasound must be selected based
on the ALARA principle.
Additional information regarding the concept of ALARA and the possible bioeffects of ultrasound is
available in a document from the AIUM (American Institute of Ultrasound Medicine) entitled
“Medical Ultrasound Safety.”

Acoustic Output 15-1

 15.4 MI/TI Explanation
15.4.1 Basic Knowledge of MI and TI
Mechanical Bioeffect and Thermal Bioeffect
The relationship of various ultrasound output parameters (frequency, acoustic pressure and
intensity, etc.) to bioeffects is not fully understood at present. It is recognized that two fundamental
mechanisms may induce bioeffects. One is a thermal bioeffect involving tissue absorption of
ultrasound, and another is a mechanical bioeffect based on cavitations. Thermal Index (TI) gives
the relative index of temperature increase by thermal bioeffect, and Mechanical Index (MI) gives
the relative index of mechanical bioeffect. TI and MI indices reflect instantaneous output conditions.
They DO NOT consider the cumulative effects of the total examination time. TI and MI models
contain practical simplifications for complex bioeffect interactions. The operator must be aware
that the actual worst case temperature rise may be up to several times higher than the displayed
TI value.
 MI (Mechanical Index)
The mechanical bioeffects are the result of compression and decompression of insonated
tissues with the formation of micro bubbles that can be referred to as cavitations.
MI is an index that shows the possibility of cavitation generation based on acoustic pressure,
and the value at which the peak rarefactional acoustic pressure is divided by the square root
of the frequency. Therefore, the MI value becomes smaller when the frequency is higher or the
peak rarefactional acoustic pressure is lower, and it becomes more difficult to generate the
cavitations.
Pr, α
MI =
fawf × CMI

CMI = 1 (MPa / MHz )

For the frequency 1 MHz and the peak rarefactional acoustic pressure 1 MPa, MI becomes 1.
It is possible to consider MI as one threshold of cavitation generation. It is particularly
important to keep the MI value low when both gases and soft tissues exist together, such as
with lung exposure in cardiac scanning and bowel gas in abdominal scanning.
 TI (Thermal Index)
The TI is determined by the ratio of the total acoustic power to the acoustic power required to
raise the tissue temperature by 1°C. In addition, because the raise in temperature can be
greatly different according to tissue structures, TI is divided into three kinds: TIS (Soft-tissue
Thermal Index), TIB (Bone Thermal Index) and TIC (Cranial-bone Thermal Index).
TIS: Thermal index related to soft tissues, such as abdominal and cardiac applications.
TIB: Thermal index for applications such as fetal (second and third trimester) or neonatal
cephalic (through the fontanel) applications, in which the ultrasound beam passes through soft
tissue and the focal region is in the immediate vicinity of bone.
TIC: Thermal index for applications such as pediatric and adult cranial applications, in which
the ultrasound beam passes through bone near the beam entrance into the body.
Although the output power is automatically controlled for the selected applications, high TI
values should be kept to a minimum or avoided in obstetric applications. WFUMB (World
Federation for Ultrasound in Medicine and Biology) guidelines state that temperature
increases of 4°C for 5 minutes or more should be considered as potentially hazardous to
embryonic and fetal tissue.
The smaller the MI/TI values, the lower the bioeffects.

15-2 Acoustic Output

15.4.2 MI/TI Display
TI and MI values are displayed in the top part of the screen in real time. The operator should
monitor these index values during examinations and ensure that exposure time and output values
are maintained at the minimum amounts required for effective diagnosis.
NOTE: If a value of MI or TI exceeds 1.0, the ALARA principle must be practiced.
The display precision is 0.1.
Display accuracy of MI is ≤14.7%, and TI is ≤28.5%.

15.5 Acoustic Power Setting

 Acoustic power adjustment
Click the [A.power] on the soft menu to adjust the acoustic power percentage. Its value is
displayed on the corresponding item, as well as at the top of the screen. The greater the
acoustic power percentage, the greater the current acoustic output. When the image is frozen,
the system stops transmitting acoustic power.
 Default acoustic power setting
Selection of diagnostic applications is the most important factor in controlling ultrasound output.
The permissible level of intensity of ultrasound differs depending on the region of interest. For
fetal examinations, in particular, much care must be exercised.
Within this system, imaging setups can be created using the ultrasound output set by you.
Once you set the preset settings, the system's default setting values may be changed
and invalid. The user is responsible for any change to the default settings.
 Adjusting range
Initial power: 3.2% to 100%*
Definition of 100%: the maximum acoustic power of a probe determined by the increase in
probe surface temperature in the selected mode and the acoustic power restrictions specified
by the FDA.
Default settings of the acoustic power value refer to the best image quality for the probe. The
larger the acoustic power value, the better the image quality.
In the DC-70 series product, to obtain optimum images for applications under the requirements
of safety and ALARA principle, we set acoustic power default values in factory to be maximum
96.6% in all exam modes for a better image quality. The user can make adjustments according
to the imaging effect in practical use.

NOTE: This system automatically returns to the settings whenever changes are made to the
values (when you turn on the power, switch between probes, press <End Exam>, or
select OK or Cancel in the Setup menu). In the factory default settings, the Acoustic
Output is limited to below 100%. Following the ALARA restriction, you are allowed to
increase the acoustic power under FDA 510(k) Guidance-Track 3 limits and to set it in
the image preset screen.
The system's acoustic output has been measured and calculated in accordance with
IEC60601-2-37: 2015, FDA 510(K) GUIDANCE, IEC 62359: 2017, Ultrasonics-Field
characterization-Test methods for the deter mination of thermal and mechanical indices related
to medical diagnostic ultrasonic fields.

Acoustic Output 15-3

 15.6 Acoustic Power Control
A qualified operator may use the system controls to limit the ultrasound output and to adjust the
quality of the images. There are three categories of system controls relating to output. They are:
 Controls that have direct effect on the output
 Controls that indirectly control the output
 Controls that are receiver controls
 Direct controls
It is possible to control, if necessary, the acoustic output with the “A.power” item on the soft
menu or the corresponding knob at the bottom of the soft menu. In this case, the maximum
value of the acoustic output never exceeds an MI of 1.9 and an ISPTA.3 of 720 mW/cm 2 in any
mode of operation.
 Indirect controls
The controls that indirectly affect output are the many imaging parameters. These are
operating modes, frequency, focal point positions, overall depth and PRF.
The operating mode determines whether the ultrasound beam is scanning or non-scanning.
Thermal bioeffect is closely connected to M mode, Doppler and Color mode. Acoustic
attenuation of tissue is directly related to probe frequency. The focal point is related to the
active aperture of the probe and beam width. For higher PRF (pulse repetition frequency),
the more output pulses occur over a period of time.
 Receiver controls
The receiver controls (for example, gain, dynamic range and image post-processing, etc.) do
not affect output. These controls should be used, when possible, to improve the image quality
before using controls that directly or indirectly affect output.

15.7 Acoustic Output

15.7.1 Derated Ultrasonic Output Parameters
In order to determine the relevant Ultrasonic Output Parameters, a method is used which allows
for the comparison of ultrasound systems which operate at different frequencies and are focused
at different depths. This approach, called “derating” or “attenuating”, adjusts the acoustic output as
measured in a water tank to account for the effect of ultrasound propagation through tissue. By
convention, a specific average intensity attenuation value is used, which corresponds to a loss of
0.3 dB/cm/MHz. That is, the ultrasound intensity will be reduced by 0.3 dB/MHz for every
centimeter of travel from the probe. This can be expressed by the following equation:

I atten = I water ×10 (－0.3 /10 × fc × z )

Where Iatten is the attenuated intensity, Iwater is the intensity measured in a water tank (at distance z),
fc is the center frequency of the ultrasound wave (as measured in water) and z is the distance from
the probe. The equation for attenuating pressure values is similar except that the attenuation
coefficient is 0.15 dB/cm/MHz, or one-half the intensity coefficient. The intensity coefficient is
double the pressure coefficient because intensity is proportional to the square of pressure.
The attenuation coefficient chosen, 0.3 dB/cm/MHz, is significantly lower than any specific solid
tissue in the body. This value was chosen to account for fetal examinations. In early trimester
ultrasound fetal examinations, there may be a significant fluid path between the probe and the
fetus, and the attenuation of fluid is very small. Therefore the attenuation coefficient was lowered
to account for this.

15-4 Acoustic Output

15.7.2 Limits of Acoustic Output
In accordance with the FDA Track 3 requirements, the derating (or attenuated) approach was
incorporated into the FDA Acoustic Output Limits, as listed below. The maximum acoustic output
level from any probe in any operating mode is expected to fall below these limits.
FDA Maximum Acoustic Output Limits for Track 3 (Attenuated Values)
Application Ispta.3 (mW/cm2) Isppa.3 (W/cm 2) MI
Regions (except or
≤ 720 ≤ 190 ≤ 1.9
eyes)

15.7.3 Differences between Actual and Displayed MI and TI

In operation, the system will display the Acoustic Output Parameters Thermal Index (TI) or
Mechanical Index (MI) (or sometimes both parameters simultaneously) to the operator. These
parameters were developed as general indicators of risk from either thermal or mechanical action
of the ultrasound wave. They serve to indicate to the operator whether a particular system setting
increases or decreases the possibility of Thermal or Mechanical effect. More specifically, they were
designed to assist in the implementation of the ALARA principle. As an operator changes a given
system control, the potential effect of the change in output is indicated. However, the Thermal
Index is not the same as the raise in temperature in the body, for several reasons. First of all, in
order to provide a single display index, a number of simplifying assumptions had to be made. The
biggest assumption was the use of the attenuating formula described above, which is much lower
than the actual value for most tissues within the body. Scanning through muscle or organ tissue,
for example, will produce much higher attenuation than 0.3 dB/cm/MHz. Significant simplifications
were also made for the thermal properties of tissue. Therefore, scanning through highly-perfused
tissue, such as the heart or vasculature, will produce significantly less thermal effect than that
suggested by the Thermal Index.
Similarly, the Mechanical Index was derived to indicate the relative possibility of mechanical
(cavitation) effects. The MI is based on the derated peak rarefactional pressure and the center
frequency of the ultrasound wave. The actual peak rarefactional pressure is affected by the actual
attenuation caused by tissue in the path between the probe and the focal point. Again, all solid
tissues within the body have higher attenuation than the prescribed 0.3 dB/cm/MHz value, and
therefore, the actual peak rarefactional pressure will be lower. Further, the actual peak
rarefactional pressure will change depending on the region of the body being scanned.
For these reasons, the TI and MI displays should only be used to assist the operator in
implementing ALARA at the time of the patient examination.

15.8 Measurement Uncertainty

The total estimated measurement uncertainty (where the total uncertainty includes uncertainties in
hydrophone response, measurement, calculation and positioning) are:
Ispta 28.5%
Isppa 28.5%
Center frequency (fc) 2%
Total power (W) 28.5 % (5.1% for Scan-mode and Combined-mode)
Rarefactional pressure (pr) 14.7%

Acoustic Output 15-5

 15.9 References for Acoustic Power and Safety
1. “Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound” issued by AIUM in 1993
2. “Medical Ultrasound Safety” issued by AIUM in 1994
3. “Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment, Revision 3”
issued by AIUM/NEMA in 2004
4. “Standard for real-time display of thermal and mechanical acoustic output indices on
diagnostic ultrasound equipment, Revision 2” issued by AIUM/NEMA in 2004
5. “Information for Manufacturers Seeking Marketing Clearance of Diagnostic Ultrasound
Systems and Transducers” issued by FDA in 2008
6. “Medical electrical equipment – Part 2-37: Particular requirements for the safety of ultrasonic
medical diagnostic and monitoring equipment” issued by IEC in 2007

15-6 Acoustic Output

16 EMC Guidance and
Manufacturer's Declaration
The system complies with the EMC standard IEC 60601-1-2: 2014.
Intended Environments: HOME HEALTHCARE ENVIRONMENT (except for near active HF
SURGICAL EQUIPMENT and the RF shielded room of an ME SYSTEM for magnetic resonance
imaging).

WARNING: 1. The use of unapproved accessories may diminish system

performance.
2. Use of components, accessories, probes, and cables other than
those specified may result in increased emission or decreased
immunity of system.
3. Operation of system, in the case that the patient physiological
signal is lower than the minimum amplitude or value specified in
the product specifications, results may not be obtained (results
can be obtained when the HR is in the range of 30-250 bmp or
when the QRS wave amplitude is between 0.5-5 mV.)
4. Use of this equipment adjacent to or stacked with other
equipment should be avoided because it could result in improper
operation. If such use is necessary, this equipment and the other
equipment should be observed to verify that they are operating
normally.
5. Use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those
specified or provided by the manufacturer of this equipment could
result in increased electromagnetic emissions or decreased
electromagnetic immunity of this equipment and result in
improper operation.
6. Portable RF communications equipment (including peripherals
such as antenna cables and external antennas) should be used no
closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to any part of the system, including
cables specified by the manufacturer. Otherwise, degradation of
the performance of this equipment could result.

NOTE: 1 The system needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be installed and
put into service according to the EMC information provided below.
2 Other devices may interfere with this system even though they meet the requirements
of CISPR.
3 Preventing conducted RF immunity. Due to technological limitations, the conducted
RF immunity level are limited to 3Vrms level, conducted RF interference above 3Vrms
may cause wrong diagnosis and measurements. We suggest that you position system
further from sources of conducted RF noise.
4 Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affects system. See tables 1,
2, 3, and 4 below.

EMC Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration 16-1

 If the system is operated within the electromagnetic environment listed in Table 2 and Table 3, the
system will remain safe and will provide the following basic performances:
 Imaging;
 Doppler acoustic spectral displaying;
 Taking measurements;
 Patient information;
 Date/time information.

TABLE 1
GUIDANCE AND MINDRAY DECLARATION—ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS
The system is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of system should assure that it is used in such an environment.
ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIROMENT－
EMISSIONS TEST COMPLIANCE
GUIDANCE
The system uses RF energy only for its
internal function. Therefore, its RF
RF emissions emissions are very low and are not likely
Group 1
CISPR 11 to cause any interference in nearby
electronic equipment.
RF emissions
Class B
CISPR 11 The system is suitable for use in all
establishments including domestic
Harmonic Emissions
Class A establishments and those directly
IEC 61000-3-2 connected to the public low-voltage
Voltage Fluctuations/ Flicker power supply network that supplies
Emissions Compliance buildings used for domestic purposes
IEC 61000-3-3

16-2 EMC Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration

TABLE 2
GUIDANCE AND MINDRAY DECLARATION—ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
The system is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of system should assure that it is used in such an environment.
IEC 60601 COMPLIANCE ELECTROMAGNETIC
IMMUNITY TEST
TEST LEVEL LEVEL ENVIRONMENT-GUIDANCE
Electrostatic Floors should be wood,
Discharge(ESD) concrete or ceramic tile. If
±8 kV contact; ±8 kV contact; floors are covered with
IEC 61000-4-2
±15 kV air ±15kV air synthetic material, the
relative humidity should be at
least 30%.
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power Mains power quality should
Transient / burst supply lines; supply lines; be that of a typical
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for ±1 kV for commercial or hospital
input/output lines input/output lines environment.
Surge ±1 kV line(s) to
±1 kV line(s) to
Mains power quality should
line(s); be that of a typical
IEC 61000-4-5 line(s);
±2 kV line(s) to commercial or hospital
±2 kV line(s) to earth
earth environment.
Voltage dips, 0 % UT; 0,5 cycle 0 % UT; 0,5 cycle Mains power quality should
Short interruptions At 0°, 45°, 90°, At 0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, be that of a typical
and voltage 135°, 180°, 225°, 180°, 225°, 270° and commercial or hospital
variation on power 270° and 315° 315° environment. If you require
supply input continued operation during
voltage 0 % UT; 1 cycle 0 % UT; 1 cycle power mains interruptions, it
IEC 61000-4-11 70% UT for 25/30 70% UT for 25/30 is recommended that our
cycle cycle product be powered from an
at 0° at 0°
uninterruptible power supply
or a battery.

0 % UT; 250/300 0 % UT; 250/300

cycle cycle
Power frequency Power frequency magnetic
(50/60 HZ) fields should be at levels
magnetic field characteristic of a typical
30 A/m 30 A/m
IEC 61000-4-8 location in a typical
commercial or hospital
environment.
NOTE: UT is the A.C. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

EMC Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration 16-3

 TABLE 3
GUIDANCE AND MINDRAY DECLARATION—ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
The system is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of system should assure that it is used in such an environment.
IMMUNITY IEC 60601 TEST COMPLIANCE ELECTROMAGNETIC
TEST LEVEL LEVEL ENVIRONMENT-GUIDANCE
Portable and mobile RF
3 Vrms communications equipment should
3 Vrms 0,15 MHz – 80 be used no closer to any part of
0,15 MHz – 80 MHz MHz system, including cables, than the
6 Vrms in ISM and 6 Vrms in ISM recommended separation distance
Conduced RF calculated from the equation
amateur and amateur
IEC 61000-4-6 applicable to the frequency of the
radio bands between radio bands
between transmitter. Recommended
0,15 MHz and 80
MHz 0,15 MHz and 80
separation distance
MHz
d = 1.2 x P

d = 1.2 x P 80 MHz to 800 MHz

d = 2.3 x P 800 MHz to 2.7GHz
Radiated RF 10 V/m 10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3 80MHz - 2.7GHz 80MHz - 2.7GHz Where, P is the maximum output
power rating of the transmitter in
watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d is
the recommended separation
distance in meters (m).
27 V/m
27 V/m Field strengths from fixed RF
380–390 MHz
Proximity fields transmitters, as determined by an
from RF 28 V/m electromagnetic site survey, should
be less than the compliance level in
wireless 430–470 MHz, 800–
960 MHz, 1700–1990 28 V/m each frequency range.
communications MHz, 2400–2570 Interference may occur in the vicinity
equipment MHz of equipment marked with the
IEC 61000-4-3 9 V/m following symbol:
704–787 MHz, 5100– 9 V/m
5800 MHz

Note 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
Note 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular
/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast
and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy.
To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the
location in which system is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above,
system should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is
observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the
system.
b Over the frequency range 150kHz to 80MHz, field strengths should be less than 3V/m.

16-4 EMC Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration

TABLE 4
RECOMMENDED SEPARATION DISTANCES BETWEEN PORTABLE AND MOBILE
RF COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND THE SYSTEM
The system is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF
disturbance are controlled. The customer or the user of system can help prevent
electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and
mobile RF communication equipment (transmitters) and system as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communication equipment.
Separation Distance According to Frequency of Transmitter
Rated Maximum
Output power of (m)
Transmitter 150kHz -80MHz 80MHz-800MHz 800MHz-2.7GHz
(W) d＝1.2√P d＝1.2√P d＝2.3√P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended
separation distanced in meters (m) can be determined using the equation applicable to
the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
If system image distortion occurs, it may be necessary to position system further from
sources of conducted RF noise or to install external power source filter to minimize RF
noise to an acceptable level.

Note 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range
applies.
Note 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.

Cable sample
No. Name Cable length (m) Shield or not Remarks
1 Power input 2.5m Not shielded /
2 SIP/SOP ＜3.0m Shielding /
3 ECG cable 4.0m Shielding /
4 Probe Cable ＜3.0m Shielding /
5 Footswitch Cable 2.9m Shielding /

 Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Statement

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful

EMC Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration 16-5

 interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver
is connected.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Any Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
The device has been evaluated to meet general RF exposure requirement. The device can be
used in portable exposure condition without restriction.

16-6 EMC Guidance and Manufacturer's Declaration

17 System Maintenance
Routine system maintenance shall be carried out by the user. System maintenance after the
warranty has expired is the full responsibility of the owner/operator.
The responsibility for maintenance and management of the product after delivery resides with the
customer who has purchased the product.
If you have any questions, please contact the Mindray Customer Service Department or a sales
representative.
1. Only an authorized Mindray service engineer can perform
WARNING: maintenance which is not specified in this operator’s manual.
2. For the sake of system performance and safety, perform
periodical checks of the system.

17.1 Daily Maintenance

You are responsible for daily maintenance.

17.1.1 Cleaning the System

1. Before cleaning the system, be sure to turn off the power and
WARNING: disconnect the power cord from the outlet. Cleaning the system
while the power is “On” may result in electric shock.
2. DO NOT directly spray solution onto the monitor, system control
panel or hard surfaces that are under pressure or pumped.
Ingress fluid leakage into the monitor or system can damage the
monitor or system, causing possible electric shock or system
failure.

Do not spill water or other liquids into the system while cleaning. This may
CAUTION: result in malfunction or electric shock.

NOTE: 1. DO NOT use hydrocarbon glass cleaner or cleaner for OA (Office Automation)
equipment to clean the monitor. These substances may cause deterioration of the
monitor.
2. Clean the control panel periodically, otherwise the button may become blocked with
dirt and the system will buzz while the button has no effect.

System Maintenance 17-1

  Cleaning the probe cover and connector:
 Tools: mild soapy water, soft dry cloth, soft brush
 Method:
a) Wipe away dust attached to the surface of the probe head, connector and cable.
b) Use a soft brush to gently brush away dust from inside the probe connector.
c) Remaining stains or dust attached to the surface of the cable or connector should be
wiped away using a cloth with a little soapy water and then air dried.
Refer to chapter “0

The above is a dimension illustration of the C7-3E probe.

You can select the probe sheath according to the actual application situation.

Probes Cleaning, Disinfection” for cleaning and disinfection for the probes.
NOTE: Do not use a wet cloth to clean the probe connector.

 Cleaning the probe cable

a) Use a soft dry cloth to wipe away stains from the probe cable.
b) If the stains are difficult to remove, use a soft cloth dipped in a mild detergent and
then let the cable air dry.
 Cleaning holders
 Tools: soft dry cloth, soapy water, soft brush
 Method:
The surface of the power button should be cleaned with a soft dry cloth. Remaining stains
should be wiped away using a cloth with clean or soapy water (NOTE: the cloth should not
be made too wet, as this may cause electric shock) and the surface left to air dry.

17-2 System Maintenance

 a) Use a soft dry cloth to wipe away dust attached to the inside, outside and gaps in the
probe holder or gel holder. Use a soft brush to brush away dust or stains from the
small intra-cavity probe holder or its gap.
b) Remaining stains on the inside and outside of the holder should be wiped away using
a cloth with a little soapy water and then air dried.
c) Gel warmer: remove the gel warmer after pulling out the power supply cable. Use a
soft dry cloth to wipe away dust attached to the inside and outside, then brush away
dust in the gel warmer or brush stains with a little soapy water and then air dry.
 Cleaning the monitor and the touch screen
 Tool: soft dry cloth, clean or soapy water
 Method:
The surfaces of the monitor and touch screen should be cleaned with a soft dry cloth.
Remaining stains should be wiped away using a cloth with a little clean or soapy water and
then air dried.

System Maintenance 17-3

  Cleaning the trackball
 Tools: paper, dry cloth, mild soapy water
 Method:
1. Disassembling the trackball:
Press the bulges on the clamping ring using both hands and turn the ring about 35° clockwise
until it lifts. Take out the ring and the rotary ball. Be careful not to drop the ball. See the figure
below.

Rotary ball
Top cover
Clamping ring

2. Cleaning
Clean the two long shafts, the bearing and the rotary ball with a clean soft dry cloth or paper.

Long shaft
Bearing

Long shaft

3. Installing the trackball

Put the rotary ball back in the trackball mechanism and put the clamping ring back in. Turn the
ring counterclockwise until the bulges are flush with the top cover and the ring clicks and locks,
meaning the ring is secured. See the figure below.

17-4 System Maintenance

 Cleaning the main panel
 Tools: soft dry cloth, soapy water
 Method:
Use a soft dry cloth to clean the surface of the control panel (including the keystrokes,
encoders and sliders). If the control panel is dirty, moisten the soft cloth with a little mild soapy
water and wipe away any stains. Use another soft dry cloth to remove any moisture and allow
all hard surfaces to completely air dry. If the control panel is difficult to clean, disassemble the
encoder caps first and then clean it with mild soapy water.
NOTE: The keyboard on the control panel should be cleaned periodically, otherwise the keys
may become blocked with dirt and when the buzzer rings the keys will not work.
 Cleaning the cover
 Tools: soft dry cloth, soapy water
 Method:
Use a soft dry cloth to clean the system's cover. If the system is dirty, moisten the soft cloth
with mild soapy water, wipe away any stains, then air dry.
 Clean the dust-proof cover
 Tools: soft brush
 Method:
a) Disassemble the dustproof cover before cleaning.
System's dustproof cover: use one hand to pull the dust proof clip in the direction of arrow
1 and use the other hand to pull the dust proof cover in the direction of arrow 2 at the
same time.

Clip

1
2
Tab

Probe port dustproof cover: Pull it out.

b) Clean with a soft brush and then wipe away the dust.
c) Assemble the dustproof covers.
Insert the dustproof clasp into the slot on the main unit, push the dustproof clasp inward
until it is fixed in the slot.

System Maintenance 17-5

 CAUTION: Please clean all the system's dustproof covers periodically (once per
month). Failure to do so may result in system damage. Cleaning times
can be increased when the system is used in the open air or
somewhere more dusty.

NOTE: Use a soft brush to brush away dust attached to all visible sockets or interfaces (such as
probe sockets, sockets or interfaces in the IO panel and power supply panel). Do not use
a cloth and water.
 Cleaning the peripherals
Carry out cleaning maintenance according to your actual peripheral configuration. Items which are
not configured can be skipped.
Content Description
Wipe away dust or stains on the printer cover with a soft dry cloth, then clean
Color and B/W
the inside of the printer. Carry out cleaning maintenance according to the
video printer
operation manual if necessary.
Wipe away dust or stains on the printer cover with a soft dry cloth, then clean
Graph/text
the inside of the printer. Carry out cleaning maintenance according to the
printer
operation manual if necessary.
Use a soft dry cloth with a little mild soapy water to wipe away dust or stains
Foot switch
attached to the foot switch pedals or cable.
Use a soft dry cloth to wipe away dust from the glass panel of the reader, then
Barcode reader wipe away dust or stains from the cable and bracket. See Appendix B Barcode
Reader for details.

17.1.2 Checking the Probe

 Visually check to confirm that there are no cracks or expansion of the probe head.
 Visually check to confirm that there is no deterioration or erosion of the probe cable.
 Visually check to confirm that none of the connector pins are bent, destroyed or falling off.

17.1.3 Checking the Power Cable and Plug

 Visually check to confirm that there are no wrinkles, cracks or deterioration.
 Manually check to confirm that there is no looseness or rupture. The connection of the plug is
reliable.

17.1.4 Checking Appearance

Check if there are any cracks in the covers:

17-6 System Maintenance

 Ultrasound system covers
 Probe appearance
 External appearance of the ECG lead

17.1.5 System Hard Drive Backup

To prevent deterioration or loss of data stored in the system hard drive (including patient info data,
preset data, etc.), create a backup copy of the hard drive at regular intervals.

17.2 Troubleshooting
If any persistent system malfunction is experienced, e.g., an onscreen error message, blank
imaging screen, absent menus, see the table below. If the failure cannot be resolved, contact the
Mindray Customer Service Department or a sales representative.
 Troubleshooting Table
No. Failure Cause Measure

After the AC power Check that the system is plugged in.

Abnormal power system or
input is connected, Check that the plug has not become
1 incorrect connection of the
the power indicator loose or dislodged from the back of
power cord.
does not light up. the system.
The interval between turning
Turn off the system and wait at least 1
The power indicator off and restarting the system
minute, then restart the system.
of the monitor is lit is too short.
2
up, but the image is The monitor brightness or
blank. Adjust the monitor brightness and
contrast may be improperly
contrast.
set.
The frequency (image quality
parameter), overall gain or Adjust the frequency, gain or TGC
TGC controls are improperly control.
The monitor
set.
displays the
3 characters and Check that a probe is
menus but no connected and/or fully Ensure proper probe connection.
images. connected.
The system is in freeze
Unfreeze the image.
status.
The exam mode is incorrect. Select an appropriate exam mode.
Adjust the image post-processing
The image post-processing
The image quality is settings or reset post-processing to
4 settings are incorrect.
degraded the default values.
The image presets are
Reset the factory default presets.
inappropriate.
Check the control panel for the
The button does not blocked button and press it several
There is dirt blocking the
5 respond and the times to release it.
button
system is buzzing
Clean the button.

System Maintenance 17-7

Appendix A iScanHelper
By providing the referential information, such as, the ultrasonic image, the anatomic
graphic, scanning pictures/other scanning tips or diagnosis comments, the system helps
the doctors to operate the scanning by iScanHelper. Furthermore, it is a good platform for
the self-learning and training of ultrasound scanning technique for doctors. The system
also plays a role in the assistant software system in fulfilling training and education.
Tips: iScanHelper feature is available under abdominal, urological, obstetrics, gynecology,
nerve and small parts exam modes.
NOTE: THIS “iScanHelper” IS FOR REFERENCE OR TUTORIAL PURPOSES ONLY,
AND THE MANUFACTURER WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES
AND/OR OTHER UNDESIRABLE CONSEQUENCE IN ANY KIND THAT MAY
OCCUR TO THE PATIENT OR THE USERS BY USING THE SOFTWARE.

A.1 Enter/ Exit

 Enter
Press the user-defined key for entering iScanHelper (setting path: [Setup] (F10) 
[System]  [Key Config]).
 Exit
Press the user-defined key again to exit iScanHelper.

A.2 Use iScanHelper for Reference

1. Perform ordinary scanning procedure.
2. Press the user-defined key for entering iScanHelper to enter iScanHelper status.
3. Rotate the trackball to move the cursor onto the target view name in the view
selecting box and then press <Set>.
4. Perform scanning according to information displayed on the help information area.
You can zoom in a single window in the help information area to see the window
more clearly. For details, please refer to “A.4.3 Single/quad-window Display”.
5. Press the user-defined key for entering iScanHelper again to exit.

A.3 Use iScanHelper for Learning or

Training
1. Switch to the exam modes that support iScanHelper.
2. Press the user-defined key for entering iScanHelper to enter iScanHelper status.
3. Learn and practise views by system defaulted sequence according to the information
displayed on help information area; or select unfamiliar views to practise.
You can zoom in a single window in the help information area to see the information.
For details, please refer to “A.4.3 Single/quad-window Display”.
4. Press the user-defined key for entering iScanHelper again to exit iScanHelper.

iScanHelper A-1
A.4 Basic Screen and Operation

Section
selecting box

Image
area

Help
information
area

A.4.1 View Selecting Area

Rotate the trackball to move the cursor onto the target view and press <Set>, related
information will be displayed on the help information area.

A.4.2 Help Information Area

Help information area displays on the lower right corner of the screen, providing
ultrasonic image, anatomic graphic, scanning picture and scanning tips.

Ultrasonic
Anatomic image
graphic

Scanning
picture

Scanning
tips

 Ultrasonic image
It is used to compare with images scanned by the operator.
 Anatomic graphic
Related anatomical tissue information are provided here.
 Scanning picture
Ordinary scanning tips can be observed here, including posture, probe mark,
probe swing/sweep techniques.

A-2 iScanHelper
  Scanning tips
You can read tissue related anatomical information and adjacent tissue information
here.

A.4.3 Single/quad-window Display

You can zoom in the anatomic graphic, ultrasonic image as well as scanning picture to
view those information more conveniently.
Press <Cursor> to obtain the cursor. Move the cursor on the anatomic graphic, the
ultrasonic image or scanning tips. Double-click <Set> to go to the single window of each
of them. Double-click single window again to return to quad-window display.

A.5 Measurement, Comments, and Body

Mark
Switching probe or exam, measurement, comments and the body mark are unavailable
under iScanHelper status.

iScanHelper A-3
Appendix B Barcode Reader
The product supports two kinds of readers for logging data as patient ID: 1-D barcode
reader (SYMBOL LS2208) and 2-D barcode reader (ZEBRA DS4308). The laser
transmitted by the two readers is Class 2 laser. ZEBRA DS4308 is classified as “EXEMPT
RISK GROUP” according to IEC 62471: 2006 and EN 62471: 2008.

WARNING: Class 2 laser adopts low power, visible LED.

DO NOT stare into beam because of unknown
hazards of transient radiation provided by
class 2 laser.
DO NOT stare into beam emitted by ZEBRA
DS4308 for more than 10s.

CAUTION: Ensure the information acquired by barcode

reader is consistent with the actual
information.
There are 2 operation modes:
Hand-held mode: press the trigger to decode.
Hands-free mode: seat the reader in the stand to enter the mode, the reader decodes
automatically.
Note: the reader does not support decoding of Multilanguage.

B.1 1-D Barcode Reader

B.1.1 Overview

1. LED Green: A barcode was successfully decoded.

Red: A data transmission error or reader malfunction occurred.

Barcode Reader B-1

 2. Scan window Scan the barcode.
3. Trigger Press to decode

B.1.2 Setting Up the Reader (Take LS2208 as an

example)
1. Plug the interface cable modular connector into the cable interface port on the
bottom of the reader handle, and ensure the connector is properly secured.
2. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host.

1. Cable interface port

2. Interface cable modular connector

B.1.3 Setting
The reader has factory settings; please refer to A.4 for details.
The reader supports some user-defined functions as introduced below.
For more details, please contact the SYMBOL reader agents or Mindray Customer
Service Department.

 Volume setting:
Scan the following barcode to set the volume parameter.

B-2 Barcode Reader

 code 93 and codebar scanning:
To enable or disable Code 93, scan the appropriate barcode below.

To enable Codebar, scan the appropriate barcode below.

 code 39 full ASCII scanning:

Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full
ASCII character set. To enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII, scan the appropriate
barcode below.

 I 2 of 5 symbols setting:

Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the
length using the numeric barcodes below. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols
with 8 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 0 followed by 8.

Barcode Reader B-3

B.1.4 Scanning in Hand-Held Mode
1. Ensure all connections are secure.
2. Aim the reader at the barcode. Press the trigger.
Note: Ensure the scan line crosses every bar and space of the symbol, see the figure
below.

3. Upon successful decode, the reader beeps and the LED turns green.

Tips: Do not hold the reader directly over the barcode. Laser light reflecting directly back
into the reader from the barcode is known as specular reflection. This specular reflection
can make decoding difficult. You can tilt the reader up to 55  forward or back and
achieve a successful decode

B-4 Barcode Reader

B.1.5 Scanning in Hands-Free Mode

B.1.5.1 Assembling the Intellistand

NOTE Before tightening the wingnut under the base, ensure that the flat areas on the
flexible neck fit securely in the grooves in the base.

B.1.5.2 Mounting the Stand (optional)

You can attach the base of the reader’s stand to a flat surface using two screws or
double-sided tape (not provided).

Barcode Reader B-5

 Screw Mount
1. Position the assembled base on a flat surface.
2. Screw one #10 wood screw into each screw-mount hole until the base of the stand is
secure
 Tape Mount
1. Peel the paper liner off one side of each piece of tape and place the sticky surface
over each of the three rectangular tape holders.
2. Peel the paper liner off the exposed sides of each piece of tape and press the stand
on a flat surface until it is secure.

B.1.5.3 Scanning in Hands-Free Mode

When the reader is seated in the stand’s “cup”, the reader’s built-in sensor places the
reader in hands-free mode. When you remove the reader from the stand it operates in its
normal hand-held mode.

B.2 2D Barcode Reader (Take DS4308 as

an example)
The 2-D barcode reader supports hand-deld operation mode.
Hand-held mode: press the trigger to decode.

B-6 Barcode Reader

 B.2.1 Overview

1. LED Green: A barcode was successfully decoded.

Red: A data transmission error or reader malfunction occurred.
2. Scan window Scan the barcode.
3. Trigger Press to decode

B.2.2 Setting Up the Digital Imager Reader

B.2.2.1 Installing the Interface Cable

1. Plug the interface cable modular connector into the cable interface port on the bottom
of the reader handle and ensure the connector is properly secure.
2. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host.

Barcode Reader B-7

 B.2.2.2 Removing the Interface Cable
1. Using the tip of a screwdriver or some other tools with a sharp head, depress the
cable’s modular connector clip.

2. Carefully slide out the cable.

B.2.3 Setting
The reader has factory settings; please refer to A.4 for details.
The reader supports some user-defined functions as introduced below.
For more details, please contact the SYMBOL reader agents or Mindray Customer
Service Department.

Volume setting:
Scan the following barcode to set the volume parameter.

code 93 and codabar setting

To enable Code 93, scan the appropriate barcode below.

To enable Codabar, scan the appropriate barcode below.

B-8 Barcode Reader

code 39 full ASCII setting
Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full
ASCII character set. To enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII, scan the appropriate
barcode below.

I 2 of 5 symbols setting

Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the
length using the numeric barcodes below. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols
with 8 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 0 followed by 8.

Barcode Reader B-9

 B.2.4 Scanning in Hand-Held Mode
1. Ensure all connections are secure (see the appropriate host chapter.)
2. Aim the digital imager reader at the barcode.

3. When the digital imager reader senses movement, in its default Auto Aim trigger mode,
it projects a red LED dot which allows positioning the barcode within the field of view.

If necessary, the digital imager reader turns on its red LEDs to illuminate the target
barcode.
4. Center the symbol. Be sure the entire symbol is within the rectangular area formed by
the illumination LEDs.

5. Hold the trigger until the digital imager reader beeps, indicating the barcode is
successfully decoded.
NOTE: Steps 2 - 4 may be required to repeat on poor quality or difficult barcodes.
The aiming pattern is smaller when the digital imager reader is closer to the symbol
and larger when it is farther from the symbol. Scan symbols with smaller bars or
elements (mil size) closer to the digital imager reader, and those with larger bars or
elements (mil size) farther from the digital imager reader.
The digital imager reader can also read a barcode presented within the aiming dot
not centered. The top examples in show acceptable aiming options, while the bottom
examples cannot be decoded.

B-10 Barcode Reader

Barcode Reader B-11
B.3 Setting in Ultrasound System
Press <Setup> to enter the Setup menu and select [Scan Code] to see the following
screen.
 1-dimension barcode reader (1D):

Parameter Description
After scanning 1D bar code, the regular expression is matched in the
priority order: “Patient ID -> Other ID -> First name -> Last name ->
Middle name -> Accession# -> Operator -> Diagnostician”. If the regular
expression is matched successfully, the data of 1D bar code will be
displayed in this item in Patient page automatically.

Scan Item
Example: The data of the bar code is 123 after scanning 1D bar code.
The regular expression is matched in the priority order: “Patient ID ->
Other ID -> First name -> Last name -> Middle name -> Accession# ->
Operator -> Diagnostician”. If the regular expression of "Other ID" is
matched successfully, “123” will be displayed in “Other ID” item in Patient
page automatically.
Regular
Set the regular expression according to the bar code format.
Expression
The information of operator or diagnostician can be appended after
selecting the check box.
For example, after scanning a 1D barcode of an operator or
Append diagnostician, the obtained data is A, and A will be displayed in
Options "Operator" or "Diagnostician" item in Patient page automatically.
After scanning a 1D barcode of an operator or diagnostician for a second
time, the obtained data is B, and A will be appended by B in "Operator" or
"Diagnostician" item in Patient page automatically.

B-12 Barcode Reader

 Parameter Description
If the default item is set to "No", and both the 2D and 1D barcodes fail to
be matched, the obtained data of the barcode is input as a string of
characters. After selecting a default item from the drop down list of
"Default Item", the obtained data of the scanned barcode will be
Default Item displayed in the corresponding selected default item.
For example, if the default item is set to "Patient ID", and both the 2D and
1D barcodes fail to be matched, the obtained data is displayed in the
"Patient ID" item in Patient page automatically.
Move
Move up or Move down a selected item.
up/Down
Add or delete a selected item. (Only the default item can be added or
Add/Delete
deleted.)
Load default Restore the parameter value to the default value.
Import and export configuration files to preset the barcode. For details, please
Import/Export
contact the Mindray service engineer.

 2-dimension barcode reader (2D):

Select "General" from “Analysis Mode” drop-down list: The scan codes consist of Patient
ID, Other ID, Patient Name, Birth, etc..

Parameter Description
Scan Input a barcode example, barcode example is separated by separators
Barcode (the separator is used to set the start and end position of each item), and
Example the barcode data is displayed in the following items in turn.

Barcode Reader B-13

Parameter Description
 Input a barcode example, and you can change the information of Patient
ID, Other ID, First Name, Last Name, Middle Name, Birth(Day),
Birth(Month), Birth(Year), Age, Gender and etc. in the “Content” list.
Note: Ignore item is used to add one line below the selected item to
hide unimportant patient information
 Set the start and end position of each item via separators. After
Parameters inputting a barcode example, you can select item separators from the
drop-down list of the Separator. (Only separators that are input in the
field box of the Scan Barcode Example can be displayed in the drop-
down list of the Separator.)
Note: You can customize the age unit of Birth(Day), Birth(Month),
Birth(Year) in the Content column. If the DOB provided by the patient
contains only digit, the system displayed an auto-generated age.
Select an age unit from the drop-down list of the "Age Unit": Year, Month,
Age Unit
or Day.
Input the customized gender symbol besides the Male and Female field
Male/Female
box, such as Male (M) or Female (F).

Select "Advanced" from “Analysis Mode” drop-down list: user enters scan barcode
example and regular expression and click [Match], the system will match scan barcode
example with regular expression automatically, and if which is matched successfully, the scan
item will display the barcode by separators.

B.4 Parameter Defaults

Refer to the following table for parameter defaults of LS2208 and DS4308.
Parameter Defaults
1-D Symbologies
UPC/EAN
UPC-A Enable
UPC-E Enable
UPC-E1 Disable
EAN-8/JAN 8 Enable
EAN-13/JAN 13 Enable
Bookland EAN Disable
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2and 5 digits) Ignore
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 10
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Enable
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Enable
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit Enable
UPC-A Preamble System Character
UPC-E Preamble System Character
UPC-E1 Preamble System Character
Convert UPC-E to A Disable
Convert UPC-E1 to A Disable
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend Disable
UCC Coupon Extended Code Disable
Code 128
Code 128 Enable
UCC/EAN-128 Enable
ISBT 128 Enable

B-14 Barcode Reader

Parameter Defaults
Code 39
Code 39 Enable
Trioptic Code 39 Disable
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code) Disable
Code 32 Prefix Disable
Set Length(s) for Code 39 2 to 55
Code 39 Check Digit Verification Disable
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Disable
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable
Buffer Code 39 Disable
Code 93
Code 93 Enable
Set Length(s) for Code 93 4 to 55
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Enable Enable
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 14
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Disable
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Disable
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar Enable
Set Lengths for Codabar 5 to 55
CLSI Editing Disable
NOTIS Editing Disable

2-D Symbologies
PDF417 Enable
MicroPDF417 Disable
Code 128 Emulation Disable
Data Matrix Enable
Maxicode Enable
QR Code Enable

B.5 Maintenance
Cleaning the exit window is the only maintenance required. A dirty window can affect
scanning accuracy.
 Do not allow any abrasive material to touch the window.
 Remove any dirt particles with a damp cloth.
 Wipe the window using a tissue moistened with ammonia/water.
 Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the window.

Barcode Reader B-15

Appendix C iWorks (Auto Workflow
Protocol)

C.1 Overview
The main objective of ultrasound workflow automation (iWorks) is to speed up exam times and reduce
the excessive number of user interface manual key strokes that can lead to repetitive strain injuries
over time. It automates a clinical workflow in common exam protocols in a logical “step by step” manner.
It also prevents missing important parts of examinations as well as decreasing exam times.
A Protocol Event contains series workflow events (annotation comments, body marks and
measurements) and image modal commands to assist the user in routine ultrasound examinations.
The system provides different protocol events based on the different application regions.
iWorks is an option.

C.2 Normal iWorks Basic Procedure

1. Enter the patient information.
2. Touch [iWorks] on the touch screen or press the user-defined key for iWorks to enter the protocol
selection screen, and touch the corresponding protocol button to enter the status.
3. After the system enters the iWorks screen, the available protocol is displayed on the bottom of the
screen. Perform the scanning and saving according to the screen prompt.
Perform measurements or add comments/body marks to the image according to the screen prompt.
4. After a view scanning is complete, press the user-defined save key (usually <Save1> or <Save2>)
to switch to the next view according to the screen prompt.
5. Repeat step 3 and step 4 to acquire all the necessary images.
 If a pathology is discovered, touch [Insert] to select a protocol outside of the normal routine to
start scanning.
 Touch [Repeat] to add a copy of the selected view to work on if necessary.
 Touch [Next] or [Prev] to skip to a particular view you are interested in.
 Touch [Replace] to delete images and operations for the selected view and restart operations
on that view.
 Touch [Delete] to delete the currently activated view.
 Touch [Suspend] to start a manual scan when an unusual or atypical workflow is required, and
touch [Resume iWorks] to restart the iWorks procedure.
6. After all views are finished, the system will prompt you to exit iWorks. Touch [Yes] to exit.

iWorks (Auto Workflow Protocol) C-1

C.3 iWorks OB Procedure
iWorks OB is a variation on the “iWorks” feature. iWorks is based on protocol events occurring in a
linear “step by step” succession. iWorks OB accommodates protocol events that occur in a “random” or
non-linear manner.
1. Enter the patient information.
2. Touch [iWorks] on the touch screen to enter the protocol selection screen, and touch the
corresponding protocol button to enter the status.
3. After the system enters the iWorks screen, four categories of available views are displayed on the
left part of the screen.
4. Navigate the menu and press the knob to select a view (after pressing the knob, the view will be
highlighted).
5. Scan and save according to the screen prompt.
6. Perform measurements or add comments/body marks to the image according to the screen prompt.
7. Repeat step 4 and step 5 to acquire all the necessary images.
 If a pathology is discovered, touch [Insert] to select a protocol outside of the normal routine to
start scanning.
 Touch [Repeat] to add a copy of the selected view to work on if necessary.
 Touch [Next] or [Previous] to skip to a particular view you are interested in.
 Touch [Replace] to delete images and operations for the selected view and restart operations
on that view.
 Touch [Delete] to delete the currently activated view.
 Touch [Suspend] to start a manual scan when an unusual or atypical workflow is required, and
touch [Resume iWorks] to restart the iWorks procedure.
8. After all views are finished, the system will prompt you to exit iWorks. Touch [Yes] to exit.

C.4 Screen Display

 Normal iWorks
For automated protocols of vascular, small parts, cardiac, abdomen and gynecology application regions,
the monitor displays the following screen:

C-2 iWorks (Auto Workflow Protocol)

 1

Name Description

Displays the protocol name and the number of views contained.

1
There may be prompt information here to indicate the following operation.

2 Displays the view steps in the protocol.

3 The current active view, with a solid green frame around the image.
 iWorks OB

iWorks (Auto Workflow Protocol) C-3

 1

5
4
6

Name Description

1 Displays the protocol name.

2 Displays the different types of views based on different attributes.

3 Current view type.

4 Contained views of the current type.

5 Completed view, with a green “√” on the left.

6 The current active view, with a solid green frame around the image.

C-4 iWorks (Auto Workflow Protocol)

C.5 View Operation
In iWorks status, you can perform view selection, repeat, replacement and delete operations using the
touch screen.

For some views, the system switches to the relevant imaging modes if necessary.
The comment for the current view has been automatically added to the bottom-left corner of the image,
ready for you to scan the specified anatomy.

C.5.1 View Selection

Touch [Prev]/[Next] to select the view to be scanned. The current view is surrounded by a solid green
frame.

C.5.2 View Operation

In the current active view, you can perform image scanning, measurements, and adding comments and
body marks, etc. Operations are the same as those for manual operation. See the relevant chapters for
details.

C.5.3 Repeat View

If necessary, touch [Repeat] to insert another template of the current view. You can then perform an
extra examination.

C.5.4 View Replacement

The previous image will be deleted and replaced by the new image.

C.5.5 Delete View

Touch [Prev]/[Next] to select the view to be deleted. Touch [Delete] to delete the selected view.

iWorks (Auto Workflow Protocol) C-5

C.6 Manual Examination
Suspend - Exit the protocol so the user can run the system manually. This is used when an unusual or
atypical workflow is required.
You can run the system manually if necessary.
 Start manual examination: touch [Suspend] to pause the current iWorks protocol. The system enters
manual examination status.
 Return to iWorks: touch [Resume iWorks] to return to automated status. You can continue the
previous iWorks scan.

C.7 Insert
Insert is a specialized protocol event within iWorks and iWorks OB. It assists with the workflow for
documenting and measuring common pathological (disease) states (i.e. Mass, Cyst, Stenosis,
Thrombus) that occurs outside a routine, normal examination.
1. Touch [Insert] on the touch screen to enter the status.
2. Select the necessary protocol and the system adds the protocol events to the current protocol.
3. Perform measurements or add comments/body marks to the image if necessary.

C.8 iWorks Setting

Enter the iWorks preset screen using the path: “[Setup] → [iWorks].” Here you can customize the
protocols and views:

C-6 iWorks (Auto Workflow Protocol)

C.8.1 Protocol Management
 Click to select the protocol in the list. The protocol type can be checked on the right. Check to select
applied exam modes in the “Apply to” column.
 Click [Add Protocol] to create a new protocol. It can be customized.
 Click to select a protocol in the list on the left and click [Copy]. A protocol named “XXX_Copy1”
(Copy1, Copy2, Copy3 etc.) is created with the copied views, which can be customized.
 Click [Delete] to delete a user-defined protocol.
 Click [Up] or [Down] to move the selected protocol.
 Click [Move to Top]/[Move to Bottom] to move the selected protocol to the top or bottom of the list.

C.8.2 View Management

 Click to select the views in the list. The image, annotation, body mark and measurement settings
can be checked on the right.
 Click to select a user-defined protocol in the list. Click [Add View] to add a view template to the
protocol.

iWorks (Auto Workflow Protocol) C-7

C.8.3 Create New Protocol
You can create user-defined protocols and customize the automated procedure.
1. In the iWorks preset screen, click [Add Protocol] to create a new protocol. Enter the protocol name,
type and select the application region.
Or, select an existing protocol and click [Copy] to customize the protocol based on the previous
template.

2. Click [Add View] to enter the view name and perform image settings as shown in the following
figure.

C-8 iWorks (Auto Workflow Protocol)

3. Add comments, body marks and perform measurement settings, as shown in the following figure:

iWorks (Auto Workflow Protocol) C-9

In the image setting, if “Measurement on next section” is selected, the system will save two section
images after finishing the section operation. One of the two sections will include the measurement
result.
4. Select the checkbox for body mark display settings.

5. Click [Save] to complete the setting and exit.

C-10 iWorks (Auto Workflow Protocol)

Appendix D Wireless LAN
The system provides wireless net adapter configuration, so as to assist information query and unlimited
network service.
It is prohibited to use the wireless LAN function in an airplane, as this
WARNING may violate the relevant provisions in the aviation regulations.
Use the wireless LAN function prudently in emergency ambulances (or
other vehicles) as other devices or communication signals may be
interfered with.
Use the wireless LAN function prudently in OR/ICU/CCU as it may
interfere with other devices.
When the wireless LAN function is turned on, the ultrasound system
may suffer interference from other equipment, even if that other
equipment complies with CISPR EMISSION requirements.
Keep at least 20 cm away from the ultrasound system when the wireless
LAN function is in use.

NOTE: For a better wireless LAN transmission effect, please take the following settings:
 SSID>80% with stable WLAN network;
 Wireless router and the server are in the same network segment;
 Router setting:
 Wireless standard 802.11n
 Maximum transmission speed ≥300M
 Use AP (access point) setting;
 Number of the devices connected to the same router ≤5.
 Target server setting:
 Network is stable and not under overloading state (e.g. high CPU/memory usage,
fast HDD speed, limited HDD space);
 Level other than the highest level of firewall is adopted;
 Operating system is Win8 or higher versions and it supports a Gigabit Ethernet.

 Use the Wireless feature

1. Press <Cursor> to show the cursor, click in the bottom bar to open the wireless network
manager.
2. Roll the trackball and press <Set> to select the target network, click [Connect] to connect to the
network.
When connecting an encrypted network, enter the password in the box first. You can select to hide
password characters or not.

3. The system tries to connect and the wireless manager icon turns into . The icon turns into
or after successful connection.

Wireless LAN D-1

 IP Config
Note: When the system background is processing network task (DICOM sending for example),
please do not enter network setting to change the IP, otherwise the background task may fail.
You can check if there are tasks undergoing in the task manager.

IP config is used for setting local network parameters, which is also applied to DICOM connection.
1. In Wireless network manager screen, click [IP Config] to open the page:

 If “DHCP” is selected, the IP address will be automatically obtained from the DNS server.
 Click [Refresh] to check current IP address.
 If “Static” is selected (using a static IP address), enter the IP address.
 IP address of the system should be in the same network segment with the server.
 Subnet Mask: set different network segment.
 Gateway: set the gateway IP.
 Host Name: Ultrasound device name. it is automatically displayed.
2. Click [Apply] to save current setting. Click [Close] to exit.

Note: If the IP address displays as 0.0.0.0, this means that the network is abnormal. The reason for
the failure may be disconnection or the system cannot obtain the IP address.

D-2 Wireless LAN

Appendix E Battery

The battery is inside the machine. Only Mindray technical

WARNING: professionals or engineers authorized by Mindray following
training can perform battery installation and uninstallation.
If you need to change the battery or buy a new one, contact
your sales representative.

E.1 Overview
Battery is an option.
When the system is working, the battery charges when its capacity is not full. The indicator turns green
when the capacity is full.
 Under power off or standby status, charging time of the battery from capacity 0 to 100% takes
less than 4 hours.
NOTE: Power off the system if it will not be used for a long period of time (including
storage/transportation condition). Do not leave the system in standby status, otherwise the
batteries will be discharged and permanently damaged.

The battery cannot support the ultrasound system in normal operation, only in standby.
If it is necessary to move the ultrasound system in a hurry, first put the system into standby mode, pull
out the power plug to put the machine in standby status during moving, then press the power button to
exit standby once the machine is in the target position and reconnect the AC power.

E.2 Battery Status Indicator

The battery status indicator is located in the bottom-right corner of the screen, indicating the battery
capacity.

 : Indicates the battery capacity is nearly empty.

 : Indicates the battery capacity is full.

Battery E-1
Appendix F Ultrasound Gel Warmer
Ultrasound gel warmer is a system option used for heating the ultrasound gel.

F.1 Overview

As shown in the figure above, the warmer is installed on the left side of the control panel, where the
ultrasound gel is positioned.

F.2 Structure

No. Name Function

1. Ultrasound gel box Used for positioning the ultrasound gel.
2. Warming control switch Set the gel warmer to the temperature of 37℃/40℃, or turn off.
Working normally: green.
3. Status indicator
Failure: blink in orange.
4. Power cable Connects to the power socket under the control panel.

Ultrasound Gel Warmer F-1

No. Name Function
5. Bottom cover /

F.3 Specifications
 Power supply
Voltage 12 V
Power consumption 12 W
 Environmental conditions
Operating conditions Storage and transportation conditions
Ambient temperature 0°C~40°C -20°C~55°C
Relative humidity 30%~85% (no condensation) 20%~95% (no condensation)
Atmospheric pressure 700hPa~1060hPa 700hPa~1060hPa

F.4 Function and Requirement

The ultrasound gel warmer can heat the ultrasound gel to about 40±1°C at the most.
When the gel is placed inside the warmer, the time it takes to heat from an ambient temperature of
18°C to 28°C should be no more than 0.5 hours.
The ultrasound gel warmer can work continuously over 12 hours.
NOTE: 1. When the ambient temperature is higher than the required temperature of the
warmer, the warmer does not function.
2. The warmer can only heat one bottle of gel at a time.

F-2 Ultrasound Gel Warmer

F.5 Install the Warmer
1. As shown in the figure below, install the gel warmer into the gel holder on the control panel.

2. Align the buckle of the holder to the slot at the side of the control panel and then insert the buckle
into the slot, push the warmer in the direction of the arrow until the buckle clicks and locks. Connect
the power cable to the power socket under the control panel.

3. Insert the warmer's power plug into the jack on the back of the control panel.

4. Put the gel inside the warmer, and press the warming control switch, the gel warmer starts to work.
There are three levels on the switch:
II: sets the warmer to 40℃
I: Sets the warmer to 37℃.
O: turn the warmer off.

NOTE: If the status indicator is off or blinks in orange after connecting the power cord, it means the
gel warmer is not working normally, please turn it off and contract the service engineer.

Ultrasound Gel Warmer F-3

F.6 Remove the Warmer
1. Pull out the power cable from the control panel jack.
2. As shown in the above figure, press the clip in the direction of the arrow to remove the warmer.

Clip

F.7 Cleaning
1. Press the clasp on the bottom cover to release the cover.

2. Remove and clean the cover.

F-4 Ultrasound Gel Warmer

Appendix G Electrical Safety
Inspection
The following electrical safety tests are recommended as part of a comprehensive preventive
maintenance program. They are a proven means of detecting abnormalities that, if undetected, could
prove dangerous to either the patient or the operator. Additional tests may be required according to
local regulations.
All tests can be performed using commercially-available safety analyzer test equipment. These
procedures assume the use of a 601PROXL International Safety Analyzer or equivalent safety analyzer.
Other popular testers which comply with IEC 60601-1 and are used in Europe, such as Fluke, Metron or
Gerb, may require modifications to the procedure. Follow the analyzer manufacturer's instructions.
An electrical safety inspection should be periodically performed every two years. The safety
analyzer is also an excellent troubleshooting tool for detecting abnormalities in line voltage and
grounding, as well as total current loads.

G.1 Power Cord Plug

G.1.1 The Power Plug
Test Item Acceptance Criteria
The power plug pins No broken or bent pins. No discolored pins.
The plug body No physical damage to the plug body.
The power plug No physical damage to the strain relief. No plug
The strain relief
warmth when device is in use.
The power plug No loose connections.
No physical damage to the cord. No deterioration
to the cord.
For devices with detachable power cords, inspect
The power cord
the connection with the device.
For devices with non-detachable power cords,
inspect the strain relief at the device.

Electrical Safety Inspection G-1

G.2 Device Enclosure and Accessories
G.2.1 Visual Inspection
Test Item Acceptance Criteria
No physical damage to the enclosure and accessories.
No physical damage to meters, switches, connectors, etc.
The enclosure and accessories
No residue of fluid spillage (e.g., water, coffee, chemicals, etc.).
No loose or missing parts (e.g., knobs, dials, terminals, etc.).

G.2.2 Contextual Inspection

Test Item Acceptance Criteria
No unusual noises (e.g., rattles inside the case).
No unusual smells (e.g., burning or smoky smells,
The enclosure and accessories particularly from ventilation holes).
No taped notes that may suggest device
deficiencies or operator concerns.

G.3 Device Labeling

Check that the labels provided by the manufacturer or the healthcare facility are present and legible.
 Main unit label
 Integrated warning labels

G.4 Protective Earth Resistance

a. Plug the analyzer probes into the device’s protective earth terminal and the protective earth
terminal of the AC power cord.
b. Test the earth resistance with a current of 25 A.
c. Verify the resistance is less than the limits.
 LIMITS
ALL COUNTRIES R = 0.2 Ω Maximum

G-2 Electrical Safety Inspection

G.5 Earth Leakage Test
Run an Earth Leakage test on the device being tested before performing any other leakage tests.
The following outlet conditions apply when performing the Earth Leakage test.
 normal polarity (Normal Condition);
 reverse polarity (Normal Condition);
 normal polarity with open neutral (Single Fault Condition);
 reverse polarity with open neutral (Single Fault Condition).
 LIMITS
For UL60601-1:
 300 μA in Normal Condition.
 1000 μA in Single Fault Condition.
For IEC60601-1:
 500 μA in Normal Condition.
 1000 μA in Single Fault Condition.

G.6 Enclosure Leakage Test

The following outlet conditions apply when performing the Enclosure Leakage test.
 normal polarity (Normal Condition);
 reverse polarity (Normal Condition);
 normal polarity with open neutral (Single Fault Condition);
 reverse polarity with open neutral (Single Fault Condition);
 normal polarity with open earth (Single Fault Condition);
 reverse polarity with open earth (Single Fault Condition).
 LIMITS
For UL60601-1:
 100 μA in Normal Condition.
 300 μA in Single Fault Condition.
For IEC60601-1:
 100 μA in Normal Condition.
 500 μA in Single Fault Condition.

G.7 Patient Leakage Current

Patient leakage currents are measured between a selected applied part and mains earth. All
measurements have a true RMS only.
The following outlet conditions apply when performing the Patient Leakage Current test.
 normal polarity (Normal Condition);
 reverse polarity (Normal Condition);
 normal polarity with open neutral (Single Fault Condition);
 reverse polarity with open neutral (Single Fault Condition).
 normal polarity with open earth (Single Fault Condition);
 reverse polarity with open earth (Single Fault Condition).

Electrical Safety Inspection G-3

 LIMITS

For BF applied parts:

 100 μA in Normal Condition.
 500 μA in Single Fault Condition.

G.8 Mains on Applied Part Leakage

The Mains on Applied Part test applies a test voltage, which is 110% of the mains voltage using a
limiting resistance, to selected applied part terminals. Current measurements are then taken between
the selected applied part and earth. Measurements are taken with the test voltage (110% of mains) on
applied parts in the normal and reverse polarity conditions.
The following outlet conditions apply when performing the Mains on Applied Part test.
 Normal Polarity;
 Reversed Polarity.

 LIMITS

 For BF applied parts: 5000 μA.

G.9 Patient Auxiliary Current

Patient Auxiliary currents are measured between any selected Applied Part connector and the
remaining Applied Part connectors. All measurements may have a true RMS response.

The following outlet conditions apply when performing the Patient Auxiliary Current test.
 normal polarity (Normal Condition);
 reverse polarity (Normal Condition);
 normal polarity with open neutral (Single Fault Condition);
 reverse polarity with open neutral (Single Fault Condition);
 normal polarity with open earth (Single Fault Condition);
 reverse polarity with open earth (Single Fault Condition).
 LIMITS

For BF applied parts,

 100 μA in Normal Condition.
 500 μA in Single Fault Condition.

NOTE: Make sure the safety analyzer is authorized and complies with the requirements of IEC61010-1.
Follow the analyzer manufacturer's instructions.

G-4 Electrical Safety Inspection

P/N: 046-011974-01 (3.0)